(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Community Texts | Project Gutenberg | Children's Library | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Additional Collections
Search: Advanced Search
Anonymous User (login or join us)
Upload
See other formats

Full text of "The primary synopsis of universology and Alwato : the new scientific universal language"

:'fe>fe>: &$ 

$. 

I*;' 

' 

w 

&>&>&$& 

-&>&$ 

> - 









>- 






I - 

felM 
$>|>: 

.>fe->fe>>;: 

Ifii 

:4>>M4. 
. ->^>^: 
1>IP>|; 

j<&<<y\(ty.&?.Ji$ 



>ft v W^w^.\< 

/<'%'-' 

|>M 

XK4: 
%/>! 

, 


















};.) 



<W 



v y \ v v y 



I . < v 



mm . . 



















. 
. I 




THE LIBRARY 

OF 

THE UNIVERSITY 
OF CALIFORNIA 



BEQUEST OF 



Alice R. Hilgard 













VAL. 




ON T 






AS 



(Formerly of 142 Nassau Street,) 









REMOVED TO 

141 Fulton anb 20 Ann Streets, 



Between Nassau Street and Broadway, 

* * 



, ,8 7 i. 



Standard and Rare Books, For Sale, Cheap ! 



THE PRIMARY SYNOPSIS 



OP 



UNIVERSOLOGY 



AND 



A. L "W A. T O 

(Pronounced ahl-wa-to), 

THE NEW SCIENTIFIC UNIVERSAL LANGUAGE. 



BY 

STEPHEN PEARL ANDREWS, 

MEMBKR OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY OF ARTS AND SCIENCES; OF THE A.MKBICAN 

ETHNOLOGICAL SoOIKTY, ETC. 

AUTHOR OF "THE SCIENCE OF SOCIETY," "DISCOVKRIKS IN CHINESE," 
"TIJK BASIC OUTLINE OF UN1VEK80LOGY," ETC. 



In the beginning was the WORD, and the Word was with God, and the Word 
was GOD. John 1 : 1. (Text 19, p. 17.) 



NEW YOKE: : 

DION THOMAS, 141 FULTON STREET. 

1871. 



f - - i V -. -* + , . 

^ / 







GIFT 

U'/CI 

f ' 



Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1871, by 

STEPHEN PEARL ANDREWS, 
In the O.Tice of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington. 



Stereotyped by SMITH & McDouoAi., 82 Beekman Street. 





TO 



MRS. E* THOMPSON, 



M860782 



PREFACE. 



"THE Basic .Outline of Universology " lias been 
announced by my publisher to appear earlier than 
the present date. Reconsideration and the advice 
of scientific friends in whose judgment I have great 
confidence have resulted in some change in the order 
of publication. 

It is urged on me by my advisers, who have read 
and who express their great interest in the success 
of the larger work, that, while I have regarded it as 
an Introduction merely to the Science of Universology, 
it needs , itself, to be introduced ; and not alone by Intro- 
ductions which speak about the science, descriptively, 
(" The Basic Outline ' is itself prefaced by several 
such), but by a smaller work, less technical and 
elaborate, giving, nevertheless, some real insight into 
the nature and principles of the science itself, and 
some intelligible illustrations of the working of those 
principles, upon so limited a scale as to be accessible 
by the whole intelligent public. 

It is urged that the larger work, by its bulk and 
expensiveness, and by the greater difficulty which 
attaches to its more technical, and consequently less 
popular form, will be necessarily restricted to a 
smaller public; that it may even incur neglect, if 
not misapprehension and a temporary unpopularity, 



IV PREFACE. 

from the prevalence of new terras and methods of 
treatment, unless a previous interest is secured, on 
the part of readers, l)y a specimen, at least, of 'the 
subject first presented in a simpler and less laborious 
way. The very great advantage of the technicalities 
of the science, as contained and used in " The Basic 
Outline," is not for a moment questioned ; but it is 
again urged, that an appetite for a new article of 
mental food, as well as in the case of physical nutri- 
ment, must first be cultivated, to some extent, before 
the people will appreciate, and take the trouble to 
learn to use, the machinery, however simple in itself, 
by which the acquisition and preparation of such 
food are to be facilitated. 

I have yielded to the force of these arguments, 
and shall delay the publication of " The Basic Out- 
line of Universology ' until after that of this Pre- 
amble, or " Synopsis," which has been prepared with 
a view to meet the special demand so laid upon me, 
with what success the readers of this little prelim- 
inary work must judge. Brunei, when he had built 
" The Great Eastern," found nearly as much diffi- 
culty in launching her as he had met and overcome 
in the construction. If, by the judicious advice of 
friends, or by, in a word, the use of all appropriate 
means, I can succeed in projecting this new science 
on the world in such a manner as to secure its 
earliest and most favorable acceptance, a slight 
change of programme, which postpones, for a little, 
the publication of a particular work, already electro- 
typed and in proofs, will be of small moment ; and 



PREFACE. V 

the subscribers for " The Basic Outline r will, I 
doubt not, excuse the temporary disappointment. 

Considerable preparation has already been made, 
in the public mind, for such favorable reception of 
"the New Science, by the publication of the following 
card, signed by gentlemen who are at once recog- 
nized as among those most competent to form a just 
opinion upon a subject of this nature : 

" UNIVERSOLOGY." A CARD. 

The undersigned having listened to Mr. STEPHEN PEARL 
ANDREWS'S preliminary statement of " Universology," and been 
impressed with the importance and originality of the new scien- 
tific claim, as well as with the profound research implied in it, do 
cordially concur in urging the publication of the work at the ear- 
liest possible date. 

PARKE GODWIN. 

ISAAC LEWIS PEET, Prin. N. Y. Inst. for Deaf and Dumb. 

F. A. P. BARNARD, President of Columbia College. 
Prof. E. L. YOUMANS. 

GEORGE OPDYKE. 
Rev. 0. B. FKOTHIXGHAM. 

CHARLES P. DALY, President of the American Geo- 
graphical and Statistical Society. 

Rev. BENJ. N. MARTIN, Professor, New York University. 
C. GOEPP. 

E. R. STRAZNICKY, Assistant Librarian, As tor Library. 
CHAS. F. TAYLOR, M.D. 
FREDERIC R. MARVIN. 
GEO. WAKEMAN. 
N. B. EMERSON, M.D. 
TITUS MUNSON Co AN, M.D. 

J. WEST NEVINS, late U. S. Vice-Consul at Genoa, Italy. 
JOHN II. STAATS. 
T. B. W AXEMAN. 

G. W. MADOX. 



VI PREFACE. 

I cut from the "Washington Chronicle," of Janu- 
ary 13, 1870, the following very brief and lucid appre- 
ciation of the fundamental character of Universologv. 

o*/ 

Emanating from another source, it is, perhaps, better 
adapted to give, in a few words, a first proper im- 
pression of the whole matter, than any thing which 
I may have said, or may be able to say, on the 
subject : 

" UNIVERSOLOGY DEVELOPMENT OF A NEW SCIENCE. 
Mr. Stephen Pearl Andrews, of New York, claims 
to have discovered a new science, which he calls 
Universology, and which is so inclusive in its scope 
as to exhibit the fundamental laws which pervade 
and govern the universe. These laws, he contends, 
are few in number, but infinite in their application, 
and so modified by the necessities of the various 
domains of thought, being, or action, in which they 
manifest themselves, as to present myriads of phe- 
nomena apparently unrelated to each other. There 
is, according to Mr. Andrews, really but one science, 
what are now called sciences being merely sub- 
sciences, or so many different manifestations of one 
universal law, varied in its application according to 
the sphere of its operations. 

u Just as the mathematician recognizes all the ap- 
plications of arithmetic to be merely different ways, 
for different purposes, of adding numbers to or sub- 
tracting them from each other ; just as he sees in the 
pair of scales, the pair of scissors, and the propul- 
sion of a boat by an oar or a paddle, precisely the 
same principle, the lever, but so necessarily modi- 



P B E F A C E . Vll 

fiecl in its application, in each case, as to be unrecog- 
nized by the superficial observer, so Mr. Andrews 
claims that all the so-called sciences, abstract and 
concrete and, if we understand him, all arts, all 
things, are inter-related are, in fact, but so many 
varied manifestations of one Supreme Law, or God's 
"Will. And it is this law and its boundless opera- 
tions that Mr. Andrews claims to have discovered 
and is about to publish. Such a discovery, if really 
made, would so far transcend any past achievement 
of man, and seems altogether so doubtful, that the 
most sanguine progressive scientist might well be 
excused for receiving the announcement with an 
incredulous smile, were it not for the fact that the 
New York papers contain a highly complimentary 
card, signed by Professor Youmans, President Bar- 
nard, of Columbia College, Judge Daly, ex-Mayor 
Opdyke, Parke Godwin, and a dozen other equally 
eminent men, who have partially investigated Mr. 
Andrews' claims, calling upon him to publish his 
discoveries." 

It is evident that the discovery of Universology 
will not only exert a revolutionary influence on the 
positive body of systematized knowledge in the 
world, as such, that is to say upon science itself, but 
equally upon the Art of Communicating Scientific 
Knowledge ; that it will, in other words, reconstitute 
the whole business of Education. It will establish 
Unity of System in the Educational Domain, for the 
world, and will be to the rapid extension of learning 
what the rail-road is for travel, and the telegraph for 



V1I1 PREFACE. 

the transmission of news. The future students of 
Science, instead of coming up laboriously to some 
imperfect mastery of the whole subject through the 
details of two or three special Sciences, will begin in 
the knowledge of Universal Principles, and will come 
down upon the whole substrate mass of Scientific 
specialties from a previously attained height of Uni- 
versal Scientific knowledge equally applicable to 
every domain. This subject is too large to be more 
than alluded to in this place, but its importance 
cannot fail to be appreciated. The masses of the 
people, in all countries, in the future, instead of 
arriving at a mere knowledge of the rudiments of 
education, will possess, in an astonishing degree, 
the theory and details of all the sciences. Science 
will become popularized beyond any conception of 
the possibility of such a result which has prevailed 
hitherto. The whole people will enjoy the eleva- 
ting influences and the new powers conferred by 
literary and scientific acquisitions vastly be} r ond 
what is now meant by " a liberal education." 

The discovery of this new Centralizing and Uni- 
tary Science will demand the founding of a special 
UNIVERSITY, vastly larger, in design, than any now or 
ever heretofore extant, devoted to the promulgation 
of Universal Principles, to the introduction of this 
New System of Education for the Planet, and to 
serve as the nucleus of a New Universal or Planetary 
Government, which should accompany the Unification 
of the Science and that of the Language of tho 



PREFACE. ix 

Human Race. The ivealtli of the world may le legiti- 
mately levied upon for that end. 

The classically educated reader may be impatient 
at times with the pains-taking explanation of the 
meaning of terms which he will find in my writings ; 
but I write, equally, for the non-classical ; and I know 
how necessary and grateful such aids of the under- 
standing often are to them. 

S. P. A. 

NEW YORK, February, 1870. 



NOTICE TO THE READER : DIRECTIONS AND 

ABBREVIATIONS. 

The Paragraphs are numbered in this work, 
throughout, for ease of reference. The figures 
(alone) inserted in parentheses, in the body of the 
work, refer to the Paragraphs of the work itself. 
The letter t. means Text or Paragraph. Preceded 
by the letters B. O., the figures refer to " The Basic 
Outline of Universology," (t. to the Text, c. to the 
Commentary, and a. to the Annotation of that work.) 

1. Old and New Technical Terminations. 

-ism, as a termination, denotes a Principle, as 
tm-ism, meaning the Abstract Principle or Spirit of 
the Number ONE, (Lat. UN-MS, ONE.) 

-ismal is the adjective termination derived from 
-ism, as un-ismal, meaning related to un-ism. 

-ismus is the termination of a new or derived sub- 
stantive, meaning The Realm or Domain in which 
the Principle (-ism) prevails, as un-ism us, the B/ealm 
or Domain of Things in which un-ism prevails ; -ismi 
is the Plural ending. 

-oid, or -oidal signifies like or resembling; nearly 
equivalent to the uneuphoneous English ending -ish. 

2. Abbreviations. 

Eng. for English ; Fr. for French ; Gr. for Greek ; 
Ger. for German ; Ital. for Italian ; Lat. for Latin ; 
Span, for Spanish ; Cf. (Lat. confer, from conferre) is 
used to mean compare. 

The sign = denotes that the ideas compared l>y the 
sign are equivalent one to the other. 



VOCABULARY 

Of Foreign, Unusual, and New Terms, not including, however, 
Words properly belonging to the New Language, for which sse 
Body of the Work. See also the Index, for Texts where some of 
these, and some proper Alwaso terms are further denned. -Ism, 
-ismiis, -ismal, and -aid are riot Alwaso endings, but Anglicised ter- 
minations, from Latin and Greek sources. 



A. 

AD LIBITUM, (Latin), freely, without constraint ; at will. 

ANTHOGENE, (Gr. aner, andr-os t MAN, and gurie, WOMAN), having the two 
sexes, male and female (blended, as of the two parents in the child.) 

AUTISM, the Spirit or Principle of Art Composite, gently modulated, 
curving, graceful, as Hogarth's Line of Beauty, 

AETISMAL, (Adj.), relating to Artism. 

ARTISMUS, the Domain or Kealm of Being, Evolution, or Progress, in 
which the Spirit or Principle of Art, or of that which is Cognate or Analo- 
gical with Art, predominates or prevails. 

ARTISTIC MODIFICATION, the graceful deviation from Primitive Outlay, 
or Type-Forms, in process to completion, in which Nature, like any other 
artist, indulges and delights. (See B. 0. Index.) 

ARTOLOGY, the Science of the Artismus, or of that Third (or Tertiary) 
Department of Being, or Stage of Evolution, in which ARTISM, the Spirit 
or Principle of Art (or of that which is analogous with Art) preponderates. 

B. 

BI-TRINACRIA, a figure having six (twice three) Legs, or Liniar exten- 
sions, at Eight Angles to each other. 

D. 

DUISM, The Second Universal Principle (in Natural Order ; the First in 
Logical Order), derived from and related to the Number Two. 
DTTISMAL, (Adj.), relating to Duism. 
DUISMUS, the Domain or Realm in which Duism governs or prevails. 

E. 

EOHOSOPHIST, a Positivist, in the enlarged, un-technical sense ; not 
meaning, especially, a disciple of the Comtean School. (B. 0, Index.) 



Xll YOCABULARY. 

ENDO-LEXIC, (Greek), within the word, interior to the construction of 
the individual word. 
ET PASSIM, (Latin), and at various points. 

F. 

FUND AMENTA, (Latin), plural of fundamentum. 

FUNDAMENTUM, (Latin), foundation, basis ; whatever is at bottom. 

H. 

HYBRIDITT, Lingual, the mixing of different languages, as in the com- 
position of words ; Sociology from the Latin socius, a COMPANION, and 
Greek logos, A DISCOURSE, etc. 

I. 

IDIOMATISM, the Spirit of Idioms, or of Differentiation in Language of 
Speech. 

IN SITU, (Latin), in its natural position ; unremoved. 

M. 

MODELIC, adjective from model ; serving as a Model or Pattern. 

N. 

NATURISM, the Spirit or Principle of Nature irregular, free, chaotic, etc. 

NATURISMAL, (Adj.), relating to Naturism. 

NATURCSMUS, the Domain or Eealin of Being, Evolution, or Progress, in 
which jtfaturism, the Spirit or Principle of Nature, or of that which is 
cognate or analogical with Nature, predominates or prevails. 

NATUROLOGY, the Science of the Naturismus, or of that Primitive De- 
partment of Being, or Stage of Evolution in which NATCBISM, or the 
Spirit or Principle of Nature, preponderates -free, absolute, spontaneous, 
irregular ', characterized by swelling rotundities, deviations ; or by odd and 
exceptional manifestations ; as of Circles ; Breaks, Spurs, etc. (See Index.) 

o. 

ORIENTATION, the fixing of the Cardinal (and other) Points of the Com- 
pass by a primary reference to the East (the Orient.) 

P. 

PATHAGNOMIO LINES, Lines of Direction in accordance with what tho 
mental energies of the Brain act or express themselves Buchanan. 

PLUMB-CENTERING, the fixing, as by a Plumb-line, of the Central Per- 
pendicular. 

PROPRIUM, (Lat. OWN or PROPERTY), that which is essential to tho self- 
hood; underivcd; personally distinctive, as essential property Swedenborg. 

PBOTO PRAGMATA (Greek ; literally FIRST THINGS) ; Eutieal or Ontologicol 



VOCABULARY. Xlll 

Natural Elements, from which all things are composed : as Substance. 
Form, Space, etc.; distinguished from PRINCIPLES, which are Mathemat- 
ical and Logical, as Unism, Duism, etc. 

PUNCTUK VIT^J, (Lat. POINT OF LIFE), The Centre of Vitality; a Vital 
Centre. 

s. 

SCIENTIC, relating to Science. 

SCIENTISM, the Spirit or Principle of Science regular, excic 1 ., precise, 
etc. 

SCIENTISMAL, (Adj.), relating to Scientism. 

SCIENTISMI'S, the Domain or Realm of Being, Evolution, or Progress, in 
which Scientism, the Spirit or Principle of Science, or of that which is Cog- 
nate or Analogical with Science, predominates or prevails. 

SCIENTOLOGY, the Science of the Scientismus, or of that Secondary De- 
partment of Being, or Stage_of Evolution, in which SCIENTISM, the 
Spirit or Principle of Science (or of that which is analogous with Science) 
preponderates strict, legal, and law-abiding ; FORMAL, regular; character- 
ized by straight ness, accuracy, and adjustment ; as of Straight Lines, 
Parallelisms, Rectangular ities, Squares, Gu~bes, etc. (See Index.) 

SESQUISM, (Lat. sesqui, ONE-AND-A-HALF), the Principle which interme- 
diates between Unism and Duism, and is the Ghostly Centre and Spirit of 
Trinism (t. 214.) 

T. 

TACTUS ERUDITUS, (Latin), the learned touch ; delicacy of touch or 
handling acquired by practice. 

THEANDRIO, (Gr. Theos, GOD, and aner, andr-os, MAN), jointly including 
the Divine and tte Human, or God and Man, (and, by license, Angels, 
Spirits, and all Eational Existences, proven or assumed), as contrasted 
with the Lower Cosmos. 

TRINISM, The TJiird Universal Principle (in both Natural and Logical 
Order; First in order of observation, or the most Ostensible, t. 175), 
derived from and related to the Number THREE. 

TRINISMAL, (Adj.), relating to Trinism. 

TBIXISMUS, the Domain or Realm in which Trinism governs or pre- 
vails. 

u. 

UNISM, The First Universal Principle (in Natural Order), derived from, 
iui'1 related to the Number ONE. 
UMSMAL, (adj.), relating to Unism. 

UNISMUS, the Domain or Realm in which Uuism governs or prevails. 
UNISMI, etc., Plural forms for Unismus, etc. 
UNIVERSOLOGICAL. relating to Universology. 



XIV VOCABULARY. 

UNIVERSOLOGICALLY, after the method of Universology; or in accordance 
with Universology. 

UNIVERSOLOGY, the Science of the Universe ; the Science of the Whole, 
as distinguished from the Special Sciences of the Parts. 

. V. 

VEBBUM, the -Latin for " Word " in English, and " Logos " in Greek ; 
see LOGOS ; has important analogy with the Verb, in Grammar. 
VIT^E PUNCTUM ; see punctum vita?. 
VOCALITY, the Vowel quality, property, or element, in Speech. 

w. 

" WOED," as " Verbum," or Logos, which see ; in the Swedenborgian 
sense, The Scriptures. 

WORD-BUILDING, the Etymological Composition of words. 



z. 

ZERO, The Naught or Auglit of Mathematics or Number; but, universo- 
logically, the Analogue of Nothing, or the Kantian Category of Negation. 



TABLE OF CONTENTS. 



PAGE 

TITLE-PAGE 1 

PREFACE iiUix 

NOTICE TO READER, AND ABBREVIATIONS x 

VOCABULARY xi-xiii 

TABLE OP CONTENTS xv 

CONDENSED STATEMENT OP METHOD xvi 

INTRODUCTION * 

CHAPTER I. 
PRELIMINARY DISCRIMINATIONS AND DEFINITIONS : OBJECTIONS ANSWERED 17 

CHAPTER II. 
PRIMITIVE DISTRIBUTION OF THE UNIVERSE 31 

CHAPTER m. 

FURTHER DISTRIBUTION OF THE UNIVERSE. LANGUAGE, AS AN EPITOME 
OP THE UNIVERSE, DISTRIBUTED 52 

CHAPTER IV. 
INHERENT MEANINGS OP THE ELEMENTS OF LANGUAGE 66 

CHAPTER V. 

JUSTIFICATION OP THE ASSIGNMENT (AS MADE IN CHAPTERS III AND 
IV) OF THE MEANINGS OP THE ELEMENTS or LANGUAGE 76 

CHAPTER VI. 

DISCRIMINATION OF THE POSITIVE AND NEGATPVE ; THE CHAOTIC AND 
THE ORDEPVLY ; THE HOMOGENEOUS AND THE HETEROGENEOUS ; WITH 
OTHER FUNDAMENTAL ONTOLOGICAL DIFFERENCES ; AND WITH THE 
CORRESPONDING LINGUAL AND ALPHABETICAL CLASSIFICATIONS 90 

CHAPTER VLL 
METHOD AND ILLUSTRATIONS OP ALWATONI WORD-BUILDING 103 

CHAPTER VIH. 

CONTINUED EXPOSITION OP THE PRINCIPLES AND METHOD OF ALWASO 
WORD-BUILDING 12 1 

CHAPTER IK. 
SPECIAL CONSIDERATION OF THE ARSTRACT AND THE CONCRETE 138 

CHAPTER X. 

RE-STATEMENT AND EXPANSION OF THE CLASSIFICATION OP THE REALMS 
OR DOMAINS OP BEING ; WITH THEIR NAMINGS IN THE TERMINATIONS 
-10, -so, AND -TO 149 

CHAPTER XI. 

SPECIAL AND TECHNICAL INSTANCES OF THE COMPOSITION OP ALWASO 
WORDS. ILLUSTRATION OF ALWASO GRAMMATICAL STRUCTURE 158 

CHAPTER XII. 

FINAL RrisrME OF TUS SUBJECT 170 

APPENDIXES pp. 180-201 ; Index pp. 203-2:24 



CONDENSED STATEMENT OF METHOD. 

(The Universological.) 

1. BADICAL ANALYSIS, down to PRIME ELEMENTS, of 
each Sphere, and so, of all Spheres, of Being ; as of 
Number, Form, Matter (Chemical), Speech, etc. 

2. IDENTIFICATION (with each other), by ECHO OF 
SAMENESS, (which is Correspondence or Analogy), of 
the Prime Elements of All Spheres of Being. 

3. Ideal and, thence, Practical Constructions (Scien- 
tific and, thence, Artistic ') from the Prime Elements 
(in Nature) ; in CO-ORDINATE BADIATIONS from the 
same centre of Virtual Identity ; the Logos or God" 
like Centre of Abstract Truth. 

4. The Choice of a Modelic or Guiding Sphere, 
and Eange of Development or Construction, in which 
the Logos or Pure Beason (Lat. " verbum," " The 
Word ") is most conspicuous ; which Guiding Sphere 
is Language, the Prime Elements in which are con- 
tained and summed up in THE ALPHABET. 

5. A New Cardinary (or Transcendental) and 
Transcendent Importance conferred on Phonetic 
Analysis, and the Study of Language, and especially 
of the true or Universe Alphabet of Human Speech, 
and of Altuato, the New Scientific Universal Lan- 
guage ; in a word, the Be-installation and Benewed 
Glorification of the Acquisition of the Alphabet (our 
A, B, C, in a New and Higher sense), as the Begin- 
ning of All perfect Learning, and of the Supreme 
Practical Power of the Human Bace ; with the found- 
ing of a University to promulgate this learning. 

Or, in short : 

1. ANALYSIS DOWN TO ELEMENTS, 2. COMPARISON OF 
ELEMENTS, 3. CONSTRUCTIVE COMBINATION OF ELEMENTS, 
4. ILLUSTRATIVE MODEL. 

1 Up to Universal Societary Organization and Government, the 
Supreme Art. 



INTRODUCTION. 



1. An effort is made, in the body of this work, to 
give a very incipient, inductive, and simple presenta- 
tion of the newly discovered Science of the Uni- 
verse. It is thought, however, that it will not be 
inappropriate to make in this Introduction a some- 
what more formal Scientific Statement of the general 
character of Universology. 

2. There are, it is discovered, only Three Funda- 
mental PKINCIPLES in the Universe. These are prop- 
erly named UNISM, DUISM, and TKINISM, because 
they are derived from, and stand definitely related 
to, the numbers ONE, Two, and THKEE, respectively. 
(Unu?, Duo, and Tres are the Latin words for ONE, 
Two, and THREE, and furnish the namings for these 
Three Primordial Principles.) 

3. It is, however, convenient to speak, at times, of 
other special aspects of Being as Principles, but these 
will be all found to be mere Branchings of one or 
another of the Three Basis Principles just stated. 

4. The first two of these three Principles, UNISM 
and DUISM, crop out and reappear under many 
forms, and, in the absence, heretofore, of any suf- 
ciently compendious Generalization, they have re- 



2 INTRODUCTION. 

ceived a variety of narnings, fclius : UNISM is called 
Unity, Sameness, Centralizing or Centripetal Tend- 
ency, Gravitation, Arrival, Conjunction, Thesis or 
Synthesis, Integration, Combination, Contraction, 
Generality, Simplicity, etc., etc. It is the tendency 
to unite, or towards Unity, or the manifestation of the 
presence or results of that tendency, in thousands 
of modes, in every sphere of Being. 

5. DUISM is called, Diversity, Difference or Variety, 
Decentralizing or Centrifugal Tendency, Repulsion, 
Departure, Separation, Antithesis, Analysis, Dif- 
ferentiation, Diffusion, Expansion, Speciality, Com- 
plexity, etc., etc. It is the tendency to disparting or 
dividing, or the manifestation of the presence or re- 
sults of that tendency, in thousands of modes, in 
every sphere of Being. By its nature, it not only 
departs from the Unism, but it also bifurcates or di- 
vides, in departing, into Two (or more) Branches, like 
the Tines of a fork ; and, in all senses, manifests an 
inherent alliance with Plurality, and PKIMAKILY or TYP- 
ICALLY ivith the number Two. 

6. TBINISM is the Principle symbolized by the 
Totality of Being, or of any particular being. It is 
compounded of Unism and Duism as its Factors, 
Constituents, or Elements. Hence it is a Cardinated 
or Hingewise Principle, Entity, or Manifestation, as 
loetween the handle of the fork, which is One, on 
the one hand, and the Tines of the fork, which are 
Two (or moie), on the other hand. Trinism is, there- 
fore, the Type or Representative of the whole Fork, 
or other Compound and Resultant Object, and, so of 



INTRODUCTION. d 

All CONCRETE or BEAL Being Unism and Duism 
being Abstract Elements of Being merely, or, as it 
were, Parts not united in any whole. (The Latin 
Cardo means a HINGE, hence we have Cardinal, Car- 
dinated, and, finally, CARDINISM, for the Hinging- 
Principle.) 

7. For this Compound Principle, Trinisin (if the 
term Compound is permissible in respect to a Prin- 
ciple), there is not only no such multiplicity of nara- 
ings as there is for Unism and Duism (4, 5), but 
there is, on the contrary, an almost complete deficit 
of any naming whatsoever, other than in this new 
Technicality of Universology, Trinisin itself ; this 
Hinging Complexity, which is the Type or Plan of all 
Eeal Existence, being so subtle as to have, in a great 
measure, escaped observation. The " Synthesis ' of 
Fichte and Hegel, as differing from " Thesis," means, 
however, virtually Trinism. (B. O. t. 380.) 

8. This is, then, the first statement of strictly Uni- 
versal and Exhaustive Principles, in Science. The im- 
portance of the discovery which has led to the pos- 
sibility of formulating such a statement will gradually 
appear. As these same Principles recur, like an 
echo, in every department of being, and consequently, 
in all the sciences, simply disguised by superficial dif- 
ferences, it results that there exists a Grand Under- 
lying Unity of the Sciences ; that there is, in fine, but 
one Science, of which the Special Sciences are merely 
branches or special manifestations. This One Science 
is UNIVERSOLOGY. It is based on Universal Analogy, 
or the Universal System of Occult Correspondences, 



INTRODUCTION. 

which results, in tarn, from this constant re-echoing 9 
but in new and specific relations, of the same three 
Primitive Principles, (Unism, Duism, and Trinism), 
throughout all Domains. (62, ). 

9. The first and simplest action of the human 
mind, when it begins to attend, is governed by the 
perception of Analogy ; but as the LAW of Analogy 
is not then understood, the result is a riot of the 
imagination, and a total want of the spirit of scien- 
tific exactitude. Thus we may suppose some early 
speculator, fascinated by the idea of a natural har- 
mony of numbers, affirming that there must be 24 
chemical elements because there are twenty-four 
hours in the day (12.) This loosely generalizing 
method of reasoning was The Anticipatory Method in 
Science (improperly dignified as " Deductive "). In 
the technicalities of Universology it is strictly de- 
scribed as The Unismal Stage of the Scientific 
Mental Evolution ; (allied in a variety of senses with 
Primality and the Number One.) 

10. The Baconian or Inductive Scientists, rightly 
disgusted and repelled by such vague guessing in the 
name of Science, instituted the Method of exact ob- 
servation, which now prevails in the scientific world, 
and which has led to such grand results ; but which 
has also the bad effect of making of our Scientific 
men, for the most part, mere Specialists, in a great 
degree incapable of any broad or generalizing idea, 
and even somewhat so of applying their own attri- 
bute of precision in any other than the exact direc- 
tion in which they may have adjusted the tube of 



INTRODUCTION. 5 

their mental microscope. As a natural result of their 
revolt against the first vague and unscientific uses of 
Analogy, they have gone to the opposite extreme, 
and have become the Gradgrinds of Science, abound- 
ing in facts, but alike destitute of any artistic or 
constructive idea in arranging or disposing of their 
facts, and oblivious of any underlying and deeper 
Law which has originated the facts and guided in 
their distribution. The Stage of Scientific Develop- 
ment here described is the Inductive Stage. With no 
knowledge of Universal a priori Laws, but close, pa- 
tient and exact in isolated spheres of inquiry, and with 
an immense array of scientific successes at its back, 
the glory and glare of its triumph somewhat ob- 
scures to the devotees of this school the utter want 
of coherence, or of any spirit of systematic Unity in 
their fragmentary pursuits. (Technically this is the 
Ascending Wing of the Duismal Stage of the Scien- 
tific Mental Evolution ; allied in a variety of senses 
with Sequence or Secondisni and the number Two.) 

11. At length, the impulse of broader and pro- 
founder thought induces us, as seekers after Unity of 
System in the Universe, to recur to the idea of 
Universal Underlying Principles of Analogy, carrying 
back to the inquiry, now, for the first time, the Spirit 
of Inductive Precision borrowed from the Second 
Stage, so modified as to apply to this new field of 
investigation ; to seek by positive discovery for the 
revelation of those Laws, and for the Serial method 
of their development, making of them a veritable 
fountain-head of all Special Laws, a spheral expaii- 



6 INTRODUCTION. 



sion of truth crossing all the lines of existing knowl- 
edges, and combining them, as levels cross perpen- 
diculars, or as chords cross and unite various radii of 
a circle, and so as thereby to exert a new and 
regulative influence over all the future achievements 
of mind. Such a discovery is now made, and constitutes 
Universolocjy. Analogy so understood, is the Anti- 
podes of Analogy as first vaguely intuited, and to 
which the Inductive Scientific World so properly 
opposed itself. But, nevertheless, it is peculiarly 
liable to be confounded, at the first blush, with the 
earlier and imperfect method, and, indeed, will con- 
tinue to be so, until thorough investigation shall 
have dissipated this erroneous impression. It will 
be supposed that the same objections lie against it as 
to that earliest and simplest stage of scientific rea- 
soning, from wliicli it is, however, only more remote than 
the Second or Inductive Stage itself. It is, indeed, 
merely the larger, and, as it were, the final applica- 
tion of the Inductive Principle, culminating in the 
establishment of a Legitimate Universal Deductive 
Method, in aid of, while yet, in part, transcending 
Induction. 

12. (This new Stage of Science is technically the 
Descending Wing of the Duismal Stage of the Scien- 
tific Mental Evolution lapping over upon the Trinis- 
mal or Integral Method and governing it, as Induc- 
tion arose, at the other extreme, out of the Unismal 
Stage. B. O. c. 49, t. 136.) This Phase of Science 
is new, and can only be rightly judged of by those 
who make themselves competent, ly the specific study 



INTRODUCTION. 7 

of Universology itself. The Scientific Men of the 
Fractional Duismal Stage (the Existing Scientific 
world; are, for the most part, no better prepared to 
criticise Universology, than the intelligent public at 
large ; and, in respect to prejudice, they are far less 
so. The life-long habits of a mind bent persistently 
in another direction will require some time to re- 
adjust themselves to a system of thought claiming 
to be as much in advance of their stage of Scientific 
evolution as theirs is in advance of that with which 
they will tend, and perhaps in some cases endeavor, 
to confound it. 1 The captains of sailing craft, 

1 I commit no breach of confidence by stating the views of a 
distinguished and leading scientist on this subject as they were 
delivered to me in the course of conversation, and as they have 
been, in part, published by himself, passim, in his writings. Some 
five or six years ago, and when the discovery of Universology was 
far less advanced than at present, I called on Prof. Louis Agassiz 
to request him to listen to some preliminary statement, and to 
examine certain papers and diagrams in relation to the new 
science. He had been aware, in part, for some years of the nature 
of my pursuits, and on other but related subjects had taken a very 
kindly interest in my labors. 

On this occasion he listened just long enough to ascertain the 
nature of my request and claims, when he declined to enter upon 
the subject any farther, saying in substance as follows: I believe in 
the existence, in the nature of things, of just such a science as you 
claim to have discovered; and in this I differ from most scientific 
mer> who seem as yet to have no conception of Unity of Law, and 
who would therefore regard your whole pretension as Utopian. 
Farther than this, I believe, that we are, just in this age, on the 
verge of making the discovery : and that somebody will make it. 
Whether you have it, or not, I am, of course, unable to say. The 
presumption is strongly against any individual claimant. To 



8 INTKODUCTION. 

would, as a class, have been the last persons, to 
comprehend or approve of a scheme for navigating 
the ocean by steam. When, for example, Universol- 
ogy shall be found to affirm that there are at least 
strong scientific presumptions and potent scientific 



determine the point would require extensive and critical examina- 
tion. That I am not prepared to give, or, rather, not until your 
book is fairly printed and laid before me in that shape. Nor do I 
know that I am competent, or any more competent than any intel- 
ligent man, to judge of it. Indeed, I doubt, whether, if you have 
all you claim, the Scientific men, so-called, will be the first to ap- 
preciate it. We are, he added, all intense specialists, and when the 
Unitary Science comes in the world, it will be something so 
entirely aside from our fixed habits of thought that I think it will 
find its first appreciators, probably, among men of enlarged and 
general culture, rather than among Specialists in Science. 

What, then, I asked, am I to do ? Is there no presiding Scientific 
body competent and prepared to render a verdict on my labors ? 
What of the French Academy ? To these questions he replied : If 
you have what you think you have, God help you ! You must 
work along as Christ did, and find, first, one disciple here and one 
there, from all classes; from, most likely, what scientific men 
would call ' the common people ! ' There is no body of Scientific 
men on earth competent or ready to enter upon such an investiga- 
tion, and as to the French Academy, they have had a by-law stand- 
i:i^ for forty years which would prohibit them from even enter- 
taining the consideration of the subject. 

We are, he repeated, all intense specialists. My own son is 
laboring somewhat in your direction, [the Mathematics of Zoology, 
a preeminent branch of Universological Science], and I decline 
even to look at his diagrams. I confine myself to the merely 
Observational study of a small branch of zoology, and have more 
than I can possibly do. You will find all the rest of us [Specialists] 
in the same fix, and the most difficult people in the world to call off 
to look at any thing new, and not of our specialty. There, ho 



INTRODUCTION. 9 

reasons for believing that 64 is a Typical Number, by 
which the distribution of Chemical Elements, along 
with that of many other things, has been regulated 
by Nature, and that probably the final number of 
Elements will not deviate greatly from this scale, the 
rigid inductionist will be prone to confound the 
statement, at once, with the rhapsodic guess of the 
early and ignorant speculator who should have as- 
sumed that there must be 24 elements because there 
are 24 hours in a day (9) ; and, if induced to examine 
the grounds of the new statement until otherwise 
he might concede its probability, he falls upon an- 
other objection, namely, that the number of elements 
even now known is not exactly 64, but is only 63, or 
is already 67, or some other proximate number. 
To this the Universological answer is, that, 
the Law in Concrete Spheres, like this, is Prox- 
imate Accuracy, and that Absolute Accuracy belongs 
only to Abstract Spheres; that there is in Nature, 
OVERLAPPING, MARGINAL IMPERFECTION (See " Basic 
Outline ") and other modifying Principles which it is, 
in part, the business of Universology to point out ; 
so that the very terms of the question can only be 



added, is where we are ; we may all go to the bad place for it ; but 
there is just where we are. 

Of course, Prof. Agassiz, in what he said of himself was true 
only in respect to the Jidbit of his life, and not at all so in respect 
to the caliber of his mind, or the broader impulsions of his taste 
even. His strong drift towards Generality and Universality of 
thought is attested by his writings despite of his conscientious 
fidelity to the smaller sphere. S. P. A. 



10 INTRODUCTION. 

properly understood by a preliminary study of Uni- 
versology itself. In a word, in such a sphere, math- 
ematical exactitude would refute rather than confirm 
the claims of the New Science, so that, in such a realm, 
nearly, about, proximately, etc., are legitimate Scientific 
expressions. No Classification in Natural Science 
is or can be exact, for the reason that Nature is only 
proximately mathematical. It is only by " squeez- 
ing " and " stretching " that she can be packed like 
herrings in a box, within the theoretical exactitudes 
of adjustment. Still other objections will arise, and 
to meet these, other answers must be extracted from 
the bowels of the New Science itself. 

13. I will illustrate, a little further, the liabilities 
of the ordinary scientist to mistake, in judging of 
Analogical Science. An arrangement occurs, in 
Universology, of the Chemical Elements, by which 
the Non-Metals are recognized as generwdtty Light, 
Upward-tending, Aerial, and Diaphanous, and as, in 
that sense, allied (not in any known Chemical sense, 
but in a new sense not heretofore observed), with the 
Atmosphere above the surface of the Earth, and so 
with the " Face of Day," or with the Main Elevation 
and Front aspect of the Great World-Cathedral, the 
Dome-of-Earth-and-Heaven, and typically, or repre- 
sentatively, therefore, with the Frontal Elevation of any 
House, Edifice, or Tent pie : and the Metals are recog- 
nized, on the contrary, as generically Heavy, Dark- 
ling, Obscure, or Downward-tending, or Earthly, in 
the same Analogical Sense, and so, in tlml sv//.sv, as 
allied with the Subterranean and otherwise Obscure 



INTRODUCTION. 11 

Position in Space, or with the Foundation-and-Back 
or the Remote Depths of an Edifice the Metals 
being therefore more numerous than the Non-Metals 
in the general proportion of 3 to 1, or of a duplica- 
tion both downward and backward. 

14 Further, it is observed, that the Non-Metals, 
Aerial, Upward-and- Front-wise-tending, or, as it were, 
visibly presentative, are generically Electro-Negative, 
or allied with the Lightning, the Grand Type, and, 
as it were, Fountain, of Electricity in the Cosmos, 
and with its Aerial Position overhead, or above ; and 
Electro-Negative because they are so allied, since 
things are not attracted to the Pole of Being which 
is identical with their own nature ; they, therefore, 
being of the nature of the Lightning and of the 
Light (or Front-Presence) are attracted to the 
Metals, which are of the nature of the Earth beneath, 
and of Obscurity, or of that region of the Edifice (or 
of the Human Body, to which the Edifice is an Ad- 
justment) which is posited doivmvard and behind. 
On the contrary, the Metals, being " of the Earth, 
earthy," are, for thai reason, Electro-Positive, or 
capable of attracting the Lightning, and of being 
attracted by it. 

15. To represent these Great New Aspects of 
Science, which, it will be subsequently found, conduct 
to a thousand important Scientific consequences as 
remote from this beginning as the Electric Telegraph 
from Franklin's Kite, and yet as logically connected 
with it, the Architectural Figure or Diagram of an 
Edifice is presented not merely as a bauble, nor 



12 INTRODUCTION. 

even as a Mnemonic aid, (though of infinite im- 
portance in this respect to furnish, educationally, a 
rapid preliminary understanding of Chemical Facts 
and Laws) but as a profoundly true Scientific 
Analogue. The Front Elevation of this Edifice is 
assigned to a significant Grouping of the Non-Metal- 
lic Substances of Chemistry, in which many minor 
Analogies are embodied ; and the Foundations and 
Back-lying portions of the Building are assigned to 
the more numerous Metals, according to their relative 
degrees of prominence (or Frontness), or of Obscur- 
ity (or Downness and Backness). Finally, the Ana- 
logical Relationship of the Lightning and the Earth 
to the Electro-Negative and Electro -Positive Char- 
acters of the Elements is symbolically exhibited in 
the Diagram, by the Lightning-Flash, painted or 
drawn as striking the Top-and -Front of the Edifice, 
and as penetrating it, and passing down and losing 
itself, by satisfying its attraction, in the Metallic 
Fundamenta and Posterior portions of the object 
visited. 

16. This Symbolic Edifice or Temple of the Ele- 
ments is then presented, we will assume, to learned 
Specialists of the Old or Duismal Order of Science 
for their judgment and appreciation. But it is highly 
probable that they will perceive absolutely nothing 
of the great leading ideas which the Temple is in- 
tended to exemplify. They will very likely fasten, 
instead, their microscopic vision upon certain details 
in the grouping of the Elements. They may, per- 
chance, find that exact ratios have been theoretically 



INTRODUCTION. 13 

assigned where their experience has taught them 
that the limits of classes are inexact or variant a 
fact which Universology not only points out but ac- 
counts for, (as they are unable to do), if they would 
be patient to study it ; but they have no patience for 
such novelties. This first apparent discrepancy 
with what they already know is enough for them, 
and with, perhaps, five minutes examination of a 
great new subject, and Method, in science, they de- 
cide adversely ; and imagine they have investigated 
it, and that their opinions should be the guide of 
others who have not done so. 

17. The fact is, that, for the true appreciation, or, 
with many, for any appreciation whatever, of Scien- 
tific Analogy, a special training of a set of mental 
faculties previously neglected is requisite, as much 
so as when we would develop the Musical Ear, or the 
Artistic Eye ; and the ordinary training of the Spe- 
cialists in Science is adverse rather than favorable to 
the ready acquisition of this new kind of knowledge. 
This order of men, eminently respectable in their 
own sphere, will have to be induced by various 
means, some of them, perhaps, somewhat stringently 
coerced, into a respectful deference for the subject to 
be studied, When, however, they shall have ac- 
quired the new point of view and the requisite new 
habits of thought, and shall have become truly pos- 
sessed of the facts and principles of the New Science, 
their old and present habits of exactitude and pre- 
cision will supervene, and will be invaluable as aids 
to their own better understanding of the subject, and 



14 INTRODUCTION. 

for the detailed and elaborate expansion of Univer- 
sologj itself. At present they are apt to be content 
with" their accumulation of mere facts, or with at the 
most some most convenient classification of the facts. 
They rarely inquire into what Richard Owen calls 
the Meaning of the Facts. For example, they under- 
stand by Electro-Negative, that a Substance watched 
in the processes of the Laboratory comports itself in 
a particular manner ; that is to say, that, it passes, 
in the Electro-Magnetic Bath, to the Positive Pole 
of the Battery ; and by Electro-Positive they under- 
stand the opposite occurrence ; but ask them why 
this is so, and they have not even a theory upon the 
subject. If told that this is because Electro-Negative 
bodies are of a similar kind as, or are, so to speak, 
sympathetic with, the Lightning, and the Air, and the 
Light, with the Front-Face and Elevation of an Edi- 
fice, and with the Face and Brow of a Man, and so 
with Heaven and the elevated region of the Sun, and 
that, for that reason, they comport themselves like 
the Lightning ; and that Electro-Positive Bodies are, 
on the contrary, sympathetic with the Earth and the 
Darkness, and with the Lower and Posterior portions 
of a House or a Man, and so with Hell-ward Direc- 
tion or the Antipodes, and the Earth's shadow, all 
this would be to talk to them in an unknown tongue ; 
or, at least, it would be mere poetry and imagination ; 
and yet Science has now to rise to this new range of 
considerations, and they will, in the end, transcend 
infinitely in importance all that Science now means, 
and Avill bind every variety of knowledge, from that 



INTRODUCTION. 15 

of the Hysop on the wall, up to that of the being 
and nature of God, into one compact and organic 
whole. 

18. Universology, for the reasons above stated, de- 
clines the jurisdiction of the technically so called 
learned or Scientific world as a special body of 
judges, and comes for understanding and apprecia- 
tion to the general mind of humanity, learned and 
unlearned alike, according to inherent capacity. It 
will rather arraign and judge the scientific world 
than submit to be judged by it. It is always well to 
remember that " NEW THINGS ARE NEW," and that they 
must be comprehended, before they can be intelligibly or 
usefully criticised. 1 

1 Since writing the last preceding few paragraphs (and some of 
the preceding ones of similar tenor) I have received so much 
genuine courtesy from representative men in the scientific world, 
and my incipient exposition of the claims and principles of Uni- 
versology have been accepted by them so cordially and in so cath- 
olic a spirit, that I have been greatly tempted to expunge this 
criticism upon the scientific position and tendencies of Specialists ; 
but, on further reflection, and recurring to the larger scope of facts, 
as well as to the principles themselves upon which this judgment 
is pronounced, I conclude to let it remain as written, holding the 
conviction that it will find a sufficiently extended field of applica- 
tion. If some eminent men are more liberal, it is because they are 
ceasing to be mere specialists, and are rapidly tending, themselves, 
towards a true Universological expansion. s. P. A. 



CHAPTER I 

PRELIMINARY! DISCRIMINATIONS AND DEFINITIONS. - 
OBJECTIONS ANSWERED. 

19. There is in the Greek language the word 
Logos, which meant primarily the same among the 
Greeks as Word means in English. It occurs in the 
beginning of the Gospel of St. John, and is there 
translated by "The Word." " In the beginning was 
the Word, and the Word was with God, and the Word 
was God." But Logos also meant, at times, Dis- 
course or Language, and so, indeed, does the English 
Word, as when we call the Scriptures " the Word of 
God." Logos also signified more distinctively the 
meaning of the word, and thence, also, the underlying 
MEANING of Discourse, and thence, again, Reason or 
Reasoning, so that Logic which is the Science of the 
Reasoning Process, and, in the larger sense, Intrinsic 
Laiv, in the nature of things, is itself immediately de- 
rived from Logos. It is indeed in this sense, that of 
The Absolute and Pure Reason, that the Logos is said 
by the Evangelist to be equal with God, and to be, 
indeed, the Very God. (199, 215, 216.) 

20. This same Greek word Logos has also been 
affixed or added to many other words as an Ending 



18 LOGOS AND ITS DERIVATIVES. 

* 

or Termination, in English and several other lan- 
guages, to mean Science, in the sense of a Discourse 
or Treatise about the subject named by the root- 
word to which it is so added. Geology, for instance, 
is derived from the Greek word ge, meaning THE 
EARTH, and Logos, and means therefore a Discourse 
about the Earth, as Geography means a writing 
about the Earth, from the same ge and graphein, TO 
WRITE. Numerous similar derivatives will imme- 
diately occur to the mind, without specification. (The 
g of ge was originally hard as in the English go, but 
has been softened by usage in English to the sound 

of./)- 

21. It will be noticed that Ge and Logos would, 

alone, make Ge-logy and not Ge-o-logy. The o at the 
middle of the word is introduced for the sake of 
euphony merely, or to make the sound of the word 
more agreeable, and is denominated in the technical- 
ity of Etymology, the connecting-vowel. These de- 
tails belong to the process of word-building which 
will receive a new and remarkable expansion in im- 
mediate connection with this new Science of the 
Universe, and, in part, further on in the present 
work. 

22. While a Science is thus named etymologically 
as a Discourse about some given subject, and while 
it is really that, it is still something more than a 
mere Discourse. It is not every discourse, or every 
kind of talk about a subject, which is the Science of 
that subject. The Science of a Subject, or of any 
Domain or Department of Being is, on the contrary, 



DOMAINS OF EXISTENCE. 19 

a Systematic, Orderly, and somewhat Complete Ar- 
rangement of what is certainly knoivn or held to be 
knotvn, and of wliat is important to be knoivn, in re- 
spect to the particular subject or Department of 
Being treated of. It is so, that the Animal Kingdom, 
for example, furnishes, as a subject or Domain of 
Being, the Science which is called Zoology (Gr. zoe, 
LIFE, and logos, DISCOURSE). Zoology is therefore a 
regular and systematized treatment or exposition of 
the knowledge which has been acquired in respect to 
animals, as a Domain of Observation and Thought. 
It is the same in respect to other Sciences relating 
to other Domains. 

23. It will be understood from the preceding para- 
graph what is meant by a Domain of Existence, or 
of Being, or of the Universe, or of Observation and 
Thought ; (for all of these terms will occur, from 
time to time, as substantially synonymous). The 
Animals are such a Domain, the Science of which is 
Zoology or Animalogy. Plants (Trees, etc.) are an- 
other such Domain, the Science of which is Botany 
or Vegetalogy. Form is such a Domain, the Science 
of which is Morphology (Gr. morplie, EOKM). Number 
is such a Domain, the Science of which is Abstract 
Mathematics or Numerology, (Arithmetic, Algebra, 
etc.). 

24. Domains of Being are larger or smaller in ex- 
tent ; from the Universe itself, which is collectively 
no other than such a Domain, down to the smallest 
sphere or Realm which it may be practically proper 
to recognize as worthy to be the subject of a distinct 



20 BRANCHINGS OF THE UNIVERSE. 

Science. The largest Domain of Being, which is the 
Universe itself, first splits up into a group of sub- 
ordinate but yet immensely extended Domains, 
which furnish Grand or Collective Sciences corres- 
ponding to them ; these split up, in turn, into Groups 
of smaller, and then of still smaller Domains, down to 
those requisite degrees of minuteness which furnish 
the limits of the ordinary special Sciences, and down 
to the Branches or Departments of these Special 
Sciences ; so that the Universe itself, with all its sub- 
ordinate Departments of Being is, theoretically, subject 
to a grand System of Distribution and Classification, 
similar in principle to that by ivhich a Particular Do- 
main, the Animal Kingdom, for example, is scientifically 
distributed and classified or arranged. 

25. Any single thing, or collection of things, or 
objects, or ideas whatsoever, is a Domain, it may be 
a very small and comparatively insignificant one, of 
Universal Being. A bureau or a table, or better let 
us say, all bureaus or all tables, collectively, are, in 
each case, such a Domain ; and by affixing the termi- 
nation -logy, or the English -lore, cognate with the 
German -lehre actually used for this purpose, we 
might say, Bureau-ology or Bureau-lore or Tabul- 
ology or Table-lore, for the names of such Sciences. 
There are, however, several objections to this proce- 
dure. The first is to what is called Lingual Hybridity, 
which is the combining of words derived from dif- 
ferent languages somewhat like the crossing of 
breeds and species among animals. Another is th.it 
these particular applications of the Principle of 



UNIVERSOLOGICAL CLASSIFICATION. 21 

Word-Building are unusual, and therefore sound bar- 
barous to our ears. Hence they are technically 
called Barbarisms. But the main objection, and the 
only one really important, is that already intimated, 
namely, that these are unimportant Domains, not 
sufficient to sustain the dignity of an independent 
Science. The supposed cases will serve however to 
illustrate the manner in which Scientific men have 
devised names for new Sciences, or in which such 
namings spontaneously spring up amidst the usages 
of the Scientific World and gradually pass into the 
common body of Language. 

26. It will appear from the preceding explanation 
that it is an important, and, at the same time, a diffi- 
cult thing, to determine just what and how many 
sciences there should be recognized or held to exist. 
It is much like the question of how many colors 
there are, when in point of fact, colors are either 
very few, as Three, or Seven, or perhaps Twelve, as 
somewhat primary, or else infinitely numerous, ac- 
cording to the generality or the minuteness of our 
discriminations. The actual origin of New Sciences, 
or their recognition as such, has been, heretofore, 
pretty nearly left to chance ; but various attempts 
have been made, since the incipiency of such effort 
with Aristotle among the Greeks, to enumerate and 
distribute or classify the Sciences. Bacon, D'Alem- 
bert, Auguste Cornte, Ampere, Herbert Spencer and 
others, have been engaged in this important under- 
taking, the difficulty of which has hitherto prevented it 
f L'orn having been fully and satisfactorily accomplished. 



22 A SCIENCE OF THE UNIVERSE. 

27. It has not, perhaps, been clearly seen, that, to 
classify the Sciences is to classify the Domains of 
Universal Being to which the Sciences relate, and 
hence to classify the Universe, or, at all events, that 
portion of it which is systematically known to us ; 
and that a true and exhaustive classification of the 
Sciences would be no less than, in a sense at least, a 
Science of the Universe itself. The difficulty of the 
undertaking is, therefore, such, that we need not be 
surprised that it should have achieved no more than 
a partial success. It is true, however, that a proper 
Science of the Universe is still far more than a mere 
classification of the Sciences, since its Principles must 
enter into the body of each of the Special Sciences 
and classify also all the details and particulars with- 
in them all. 

28. It results, from what has been previously 
shown, that just as truly as there may be, and as 
there are, Sciences of various special parts or Do- 
mains of the Universe, so there may be and indeed 
should be wrought out and systematically exhibited, 
a Science of the Universe itself, as the One, Grand, 
All-inclusive Domain. Such a Science ivould then le 
rightly denominated UNIVERSOLOGY. Our knowledge 
of the parts of a subject can only be fragmentary 
and very imperfect so long as we have not some sys- 
tematic knowledge of the whole subject, and, thereby, 
of the relation of the parts to each other and to the 
grand whole. 

29. To the possibility of the existence of an actual 
and valid Science of the Universe several objections 



OBJECTION ANSWERED. 23 

naturally arise, which it will be appropriate, at this 
point, to consider and remove. 

30. It is first objected that the achievement of the 
discovery of such a Science must be impossible on 
account of the infinite extent of the Subject or Do- 
main. It is obviously impossible, it is said, that any 
one individual, or even all the individuals of any one 
age of the world, should know the whole Universe, in 
detail. How then can any one claim to possess a 
Science of the Universe ? The claim is preposterous, 
it is sometimes added, and no one but God can be 
presumed to have, or can be conceived of, even, as 
having such knowledge. 

31. This objection is at first view plausible, but it 
is unsound, and leads to a too broad denial of the 
human capacity. We do not know in detail the par- 
ticulars of even the smallest of our Sciences. Icthy- 
ology is a branch of Animalogy, confined to the 
study of the fishes; but no Icthyologist is for a 
moment supposed to have become acquainted with, 
so to speak, the individual history of every particular 
fish, and not only of those now in life but of every 
fish that ever did live or ever will live ; and yet such 
a supposition would only parallel what is assumed, in 
this objection, as necessary with reference to the pos- 
sibility of a Universal Science. 

32. What the Icthyologist does is to discover and 
systematize the General Principles, carried into a 
convenient degree of detail, of Fish nature. What 
the Universologist has to do is no more than this in 
respect to the larger subject. He has to discover 



24 HOW THE UNIVEBSE IS KNOWABLE. 

and systematize the General Principles of Universal 
Being, carrying their application, in turn, into no 
more than the appropriate degree of minuteness in 
Branching and Distribution. It is not the Univer- 
sality of Fads (which are indeed infinitely numerous), 
but the Universality of Principles which are infinitely 
unific or simple, which has to be discovered and ex- 
hibited. 

33. There is a sense, then, in which a knowledge 
of the whole Universe is impossible to any finite in- 
telligence ; but there is also another sense in which 
such knowledge is possible. We cannot know the 
Universe in detail, but there is no reason why we 
may not know it in respect to the universality of its 
Laws, if we can be so fortunate as to discover Laws 
which are Universal, as well as exhaustive (that is to 
say exclusive of the possibility of any other Laws) ; 
and which shall be absolutely 'known to be such, because 
they are of such a nature, that, when discovered and 
clearly propounded and apprehended, it becomes im- 
possible to conceive of them as otherwise than as True, 
Universal, and Exhaustive. 

34. It is in a manner similar to this that a True 
Universal Alphabet would apply to the spelling of 
the words of all languages ; because so long as 
men's mouths are formed according to the fixed type 
of the human mouth, (as we know it to be), they 
produce a certain few Elementary Sounds (and only 
these), which are then constantly repeated, in new 
combinations, ia all that men ever say or can MU/. It 
is, also, in a similar manner, that employing so few 



THE MASTERY THROUGH SCIENCE. 25 

signs as 9 digits and zero, we can write all possible 
numbers ; and that we can know positively that we 
have the means at command by which we can write 
new combinations of numbers so soon as they shall occur 
to us, although previously we may never have thought of 
those particular combinations as possible numbers. We 
have thus, in a sense, a mastery, through Science, 
over immense, even over Infinite Domains of details, 
with which, as details, we are entirely unacquainted. 
This is the Inherent, Infinite Power and True Glory 
of Science, and of the unmade Principles of Being as 
contrasted with mere Facts (res gestce or things made 
or done). This is what Science can do, and this is 
the mode in which it transcends all ordinary ex- 
perience and common knowledge, and even that 
which is extraordinary, whether intuitional, inspi- 
rational, or otherwise. 

35. Science is thus the Systematized Knowledge 
of Principles out of which arises a Method for their 
application in new spheres ; spheres of human inter- 
vention which can then be rigorously modeled upon 
the application which Nature is spontaneously mak- 
ing of the same Principles in advance of their dis- 
covery by man. The Multiplication Table is another 
instance of such systematized knowledge furnishing 
a basis and Method for the whole infinitude of prac- 
tical mathematical operations. It gives a scientific 
mastery over the infinite world of numerical conibi- 

t/ 

nations, within its scope, like that which the Scientific 
Universal Alphabet will give over the representation 
of all languages ; like that which the digits and zero 

2 



tt A SECOND OBJECTION. 

give over the mer ? notation of numbers ; and like 
that, in fine, which the discovery of Universal Scien- 
tific Laws is competent to give to the human race 
over every department of knowledge and affairs. 

36. It is, in the next place, objected, that, admitting 
a Science of the Universe to be, in itself, possible, the 
time has not yet arrived for it to be realized ; that 
we can only look for its realization after the Special 
Sciences shall have been much more numerously and 
extensively developed ; when, in other words, the 
human race shall have gone over the Universe much 
more in detail than it has yet been able to do. This 
objection has also a plausible face, but it is alike un- 
tenable. It is indeed true, however, that, if the 
method of arriving at the discovery of Universal 
Laws were alone or chiefly through the necessary 
previous exhaustion of the details, such conditions 
would then be requisite. But the new objection is 
only the former one re-stated, and it meets with the 
same answer. The method of discovery is different 
from that which the objector contemplates. As it is 
not the detailed Facts of Being, but, on the contrary, 
Universal Principles, which are to be discovered, so 
also, the method of discovery is not through the in- 
finite accumulation of details, but by Intellectual 
Analysis, and, so to speak, by Striking at Centres. 

37. Technically speaking it is not through OBSER- 
VATIONAL GENERALIZATIONS, but through ANALYTICAL 
GENERALIZATIONS, that the discovery has to be made. 
(B. O. t. 1012.) Do not be alarmed by these hard 
terms. They express simple ideas. By Obst.rva- 



TWO KINDS OF GENERALIZATIONS. 27 

tional Generalization is meant a method which goes 
around a whole subject, striving to embrace it ; as it 
were, in the arms. By Analytical Generalization the 
opposite method is intended, that of piercing di- 
rectly to the centre, as by the vision of a sharp eye, 
or the blade of a cutting instrument. If a child 
has an apple and wishes to find what is at the middle 
of it, he may cut continually around it, on all sides, 
gradually reducing it in size, and arriving at the 
core only by this tedious and exhaustive process ; or, 
if he have acquired the necessary strength and skill 
in the use of his knife, he may, at a single cut, lay 
open the apple to the centre, and begin his future 
observations from the core of the subject. The Uni- 
verse is our apple, the knife in the hand of a child is 
Scientific Procedure or Method, the gradual paring 
away process is Inductive, Observational, or Encyclo- 
pedic Generalization. The cut to the centre is Ana- 
lytical Generalization. 

38. It is by this latter method, that Universality 
of Knowledge, of the kind which is possible, may for- 
tunately be acquired at a comparatively early period 
in the development of the career of our particular 
knowledge, and may be, thenceforward, the grand 
weapon to be employed in the conquest of the de- 
tails, outward upon every radius, from the centre of 
knowledge so attained to. The discovery of the 
Multiplication Table, of an Alphabet, and of Numer- 
ical Notation, though they had to be preceded by 
more embryonic stages of development tending to 
produce them, were not themselves the culmination 



28 A THIRD OBJECTION. 

or finality of Science in their several Spheres, but 
the births of those Sciences or Branches of Knowl- 
edge. The discovery of Universology is, in like 
manner, the birth of Science, itself, considered as a con- 
stituted and living whole. The Special Sciences, as 
heretofore studied and developed, have been the 
Limbs and Members of the unformed or as yet un- 
born infant, not therefore mutually recognizing each 
other as corresponding parts of a larger Organisnms. 

39. It may be again objected, that, admitting the 
possibility of the Universal Science, and that a 
shorter method may exist for its discovery than that 
of compassing all possible details, yet, that, at least, 
it must be necessary to be familiar with the known 
details of all the existing Sciences, in order either to 
discover the Unitary Science, or to be competent to 
comprehend it and to judge of it when discovered. 

40. This is still only another form of the same 
objection. The supposed immense accumulation of 
the details of Observational Knowledge is not indis- 
pensable either to the learner or teacher of the new 
Science, and only in a modified sense even to the 
discoverer of it. Universology is an Independent 
Science, which stands upon its own basis, and no 
more needs an extended acquaintance with the par- 
ticulars of other Sciences, except for the greater 
richness of suggestion and illustration, than Geom- 
etry or Chemistry. The Special Sciences, with all 
their details, collectively form, indeed, the Infinite 
Domain within which Universology will find per- 
petually new applications ; but the Elements of the 



THE QUESTION OF FACT. 29 

New Science are more independent of anything ex- 
traneous than those of any other Science, if we except 
'Logic and the Mathematics. 

41. But the 4 question of the possibility of the dis- 
covery of a New Universal Science may as well now 
give place to the question of fact. Such a Science 
claims to exist ; and what is possible will best be 
understood by some exposition of what is. Even 
here we are met by immense difficulties in respect to 
the mere method of presentation. If a lecturer were 
endeavoring to give an idea of America, in a single 
lecture, to the inhabitants of another country entire- 
ly ignorant of this, he would be embarrassed by the 
largeness of the subject. If he dwelt on the immense 
extent of the country, its various climates, its huge 
rivers, lakes and mountains, he would be carrying 
the mind of his hearers away from ah 1 comparison 
with the familiar neighborhood experiences of their 
own home lives ; from that in which, probably, they 
would be most particularly interested. If, on the 
contrary, to overcome this difficulty, he should con- 
form to their habits of thought, and sketch neigh- 
borhood life in America at some point as nearly re- 
sembling their own as might be, he might accomplish 
his last purpose, but he would fail to give any ade- 
quate idea of America in those aspects in which it 
especially differs from all other countries. 

42. The Universe, as the Domain and Subject of a 
New Science, is an infinitely larger field of novelty 
and variety; and it is less easy to condense it into 
a single volume, than it is to treat adequately of 



30 WHAT IS ATTEMPTED. 

America, in a single lecture ; and in respect to the 
method of communicating the requisite knowledge 
of it, the difficulty is of a similar kind. To be too 
general is to fail to interest ; to be too special is to 
fail to teach Universology in its distinctive difference 
from all other Sciences. 

43. In the following Chapters an effort will be 
made to give some idea of the New Science, without, 
so far as it may be avoided, incurring either of these 
causes of failure. It is only, however, by repeated 
presentations and more and more expanded elabora- 
tions of the subject, that any complete exposition of 
it, even in its Elementary Form, can be accomplished. 



CHAPTER II. 

PRIMAEY DISTRIBUTION OF THE UNIVERSE. 

44. The Universe divides primarily into 1. a DO- 
MAIN or NATURE, 2. a DOMAIN OF SCIENCE, and 3. a 
DOMAIN OF ART. These are not different Realms ex- 
isting entirely apart from each other, bnt, are, on the 
contrary, closely inter-blended throughout. They are, 
therefore, only drawn asunder, in part, and enough 
for practical distinction, by an effort of Abstraction, 
in the Mind. 

45. The word-termination -ismus is used to denote 
a Realm or Domain of Being. These Three Domains 
are therefore, 1. THE NATURISMUS, 2. THE SCEENTIS- 
MUS, and 3. THE ARTISMUS, of Being. 

46. There are, likewise, as previously shown (2). 
THREE UNIVERSAL PRINCIPLES, which underlie the 
Universe, and regulate the distribution of ah 1 things. 
These are called, in Universological Technicality, 
UNISM, DUISM, and TEINISM, and are related to the 
numbers ONE, Two, and THREE, respectively, (Latin, 
Units , Duo, Tres, ONE, Two, THREE.) 

47. Unism, Duism and Trinism correspond with, or 
echo to, Nature, Science and Art, respectively, so that 



32 NATURE, SCIENCE, AND ART. 

Nature is Unismal, Science Duismal, and Art Trinismal, 
in character and degree. 

48. But how can it be demonstrated that among 
the thousand similar distributions which are possible, 
Nature, Science and Art are the most appropriate to 
be regarded as the practically Primitive, and All- 
inclusive, Aspects, of the Universe of Being ? 

49. The assumption that this is true will be suf- 
ficiently proven or sustained by the following con- 
siderations : Nature is the Substance or Subject-Matter 
treated of by Science. Science is the Systematized 
Knowledge which the Human Mind attains to, of 
Nature, the Form, in other words, which Nature, as a 
Substance, assumes under the Reflective Action of the 
thinking mind ; and Art is the same primitive Nature or 
Substance, externally or actually reacted upon, sub- 
sequently to reflection, AND RE-IMPRESSED BY Science ; or it 
is the Mental or Ideal Form, reproduced in Nature, from 
and by the Mind. It is, therefore, the result of Mind 
working upon Nature ; or the Progeny begotten of 
Nature, as Feminine, by Science or the Thinking 
Mind, as Masculine or Male. 

50. But all manifestations of Intelligence or of 
Quasi-Intelligence, even those witnessed in Nature, are 
the, at least, apparent, result of Mind, which, therefore, 
when it thus occurs independently of Man, is attri- 
buted to God, and assimilated to our own conscious 
action on Nature, which is Art. All Evolution, Move- 
ment, or On-going in Nature, is such manifestation of 
Qtfasi-Intelligence, and is, therefore, also Art ; or 
may, in other words, be properly embraced in the <\r- 



SUBSTANCE, FORM, AND MOVEMENT. 33 

tremest largeness of meaning which we can assign to the 
word Art. In this sense, Art is equivalent to Move- 
ment, Manifestation, Modification, Modulation, in a 
word, to all Creation and Evolution, in the Universe 
at large. Nature furnishes the Materials or Substance, 
Science BEING, (or ACCORDING WITH), the Form or Law 
impressed upon the Substance, in the Operation or 
Result, or in the Movement and Evolution, which are 
here, by an unusual extension, it is true, of the mean- 
ing of that term, denominated Art. All Art is re- 
presentation^ or a new presentation of Matter in a form 
prescribed by Mind. Art is, therefore, also denom- 
inated Creation. 

51. Nature, Science and Art are, therefore, in the 
extended meanings which are here assigned to them, 
as if we should say, more abstractly, 1. SUBSTANCE, 
2. FORM, and 3. MOVEMENT ; or, still more metaphys- 
ically, 1. The Noumena, 2. The Phenomena, and 3. 
The Compoundness and Coaction of these two in the 
Totality of Being. 

52. But Nature, Science and Art, while echoing to 
or corresponding with Substance, Form and Move- 
ment, are more ostensible and real Departments of 
Being. As here meant, they go back to the Primitive 
or Etymological Meanings of these Words, Substance 
and Form. Substance is from the Latin sub, UNDER, 
and stans, STANDING, (from stare, TO STAND), as it were 
& foundation standing under a house, and as, figura- 
tively, the Substance of Things stands under or under- 
lies the Appearance or Form. Form is the Latin 
Forma, and this Abstract Noun I regard as originally 



34 STOEIES OF THE TEMPLE. 

Fem-ma, from ferre, TO BEAR and UPHOLD, as the 
House is upborne or upheld by its Foundation ; and 
as Form is figuratively upheld and manifested or 
made into Phenomena by Substance or Noumenon. 
Substance-and-Forra then combine to make the To- 
tality and Proceedent Existence of Things ; and so of 
Thing Universal : or of the Universe. 

53. Nature, Science and Art, as Substance, Form 
and Movement, are, therefore, like 1. The Foundation, 
2. The Superstructure, and 3. The Use or Occupancy 
(lapping back upon and including its construction) 
of an Edifice. The Universe is that Edifice, in its 
Integrality, or in the Unity of these Three Consti- 
tuent Aspects, Entities or Terms. The Universe is, 
therefore, primarily and necessarily a Tri-Unity, of 
which Nature, Science and Art are the Three Grand 
Factors, Stages, or Determinate Particulars; which 
was the point to be established. We proceed in 
thought from the Foundation of the Edifice upward 
to the Dome or Apex; as ike Natural or Primitive 
Order of our thoughts on the subject ; which, sub- 
sequently, we reverse, or " invert " in descending. This 
procedure of the thought may be contracted to the 
conception of a mere line, and the successive Stories 
or Stages of the Edifice may be represented to the 
imagination along this line. 

54. As every Line and every Career, that of Uni- 
versal Evolution as well, has, in our ordinary concep- 
tion, a Beginning, a Middle and an End, so, if a Line, 
as the First Type of Procedure or On-Going, be as- 
sumed in Abstract Thought, and be made to occupy 



INTERPUNCT; OR INTERPOSED POINT. 35 

~a 

the Perpendicular, which is the First Normal Posture 
or Position ; and if we proceed, in our thoughts, from 
Below, Upward, which is the First or Normal Drift 
of Direction, or the Natural Order; this Thought-Line 
will have, First, a Foundation or Lowest Point or 
Basis, the point upon which it rests, the Analogue of 
Nature ; and Second, an Upper Portion, the Ferrima 
or Form, the Line per se, the Analogue of Science. 
"We might then add the upper end or superior point 
of the Line as the Third Step, as the Analogue of Art ; 
in accordance with the Axiom, Finis coronat opus (the 
end crowns the work) ; but this Upper End, the Head 
of the Column or Line, is also the Basis of the In- 
verted Procedure, when the thought begins to de- 
scend ; for, analogically, Ideal and Spiritual Founda- 
tions are above. Confining ourselves, on the contrary, 
to the Ascending Drift of Thought, there is, as it 
were, a Finer Interposed Point, a Point of Unition 
and Conjunction between the Basis-Point of the 
Line and the Ferrima ; between Nature and Science ; 
between Foundation and Superstructure ; which In- 
terposed Point may be also taken as the Analogue of 
Life and Movement, and hence also of Art the 
germinating Punctum Vitce or Point of Life ; pivot- 
ally situated, as it were, between the other two stages 
and forms of development. To change the figure 
from Edifice and Line to the Plant or Tree, the Point 
in question is the Germinal Point, within the Seed, as 
the Analogue of Art, or of Vital Movement, within 
the Plant ; and, as it were, between the Seed and 
Hoot, extending downward or beneath the Earth's 



36 BASE, SUPEHINCUMBING, INTEKPUNCT. 

level, the Analogue of the Foundation of the Build- 
ing, and the Plumule or Ascending Sprout, \he Ana- 
logue of the Superstructure. The Punctum Vitce of 
the Edifice is the Altar or Fireplace, the Focus, which 
is the Latin word for Fireplace. This is reached by 
the Doorway or Entrance, which, situated at the 
Earth's level, is externally representative of this in- 
terposed point of Vitality and Movement. The 
whole Figure, compounded of the Point and Line, 
thus vitally and centrally conjoined by an Interposed 
Vital Point, is the Inverted Man-shaped Figure or 
Anthropoidule. (B. O. t. 881.). 

55. Foundation, Super incumbency, and their Copula- 
tion, Interaction, or Interrelation, these Three combined 
in a Totality and repeated in the Product, are, there- 
fore, the Primal and Universal Type of All Being. 
It is this Primitive Distribution which is here gen- 
eralized and formulated under the terms, NATURE, 
SCIENCE, and ART, as the Constituent Aspects or Do- 
mains of Universal Being and Evolution. They are 
not, therefore, merely Facts of Observation, but Es- 
sentially Necessary and Primitive Discriminations. 

56. Nature is Feminine, the Mother Principle, the 
teeming Womb or Matrix of Being. Science, identi- 
fied with Law, with Abstract Thought, with Form, 
with Phenomena, with the Bays of Light, with Re- 
flection, and so with Universal Intelligence or Mind, 
with Man Male, and with God, the Paternal or Im- 
pregnating Principle, is Masculine ; Art, echoing to 
the Sexes in their mutual embrace, Interpenetration, 
Correlative Impregnation, and Conception, and the 



NATUROLOGY; SCIENTOLOGY; ARTOLOGY. 

Renewed Being as Progeny or Product, is Andro- 
gyne. 

57. NATUROLOGY is that Branch or Aspect of Uni- 
versology in which the Universe is cousidered and 
treated, in a preliminary and somewhat inexact way, 
from the Observation of Fads and the Empirical As- 
sumption of Method ; and not from reference to 
any previous demonstration of Governing Principles ; 
in which, in other words, it is considered and treated 
in the merely Observational Spirit, or, what is the 
same thing, in the spirit of the Natural Sciences. 

58. SCIENTOLOGY, is, on the contrary, that Branch 
or Aspect of Univer'sology in which the Universe is 
considered and treated as consecutively and logically 
evolved from the Three Abstract Universal Principles 
above specified (2, 45), related to the Three Primary 
Numbers. It is, in other words, the Logical and 
Mathematical Evolution of Being universally, from 
the Primordial Categories or Basis-Thoughts of 
Being. Scientology is therefore Universology devel- 
oped in the spirit of the Exact Sciences, and is wholly 
new in kind. It is the Core or Centre and the most 
distinctive Department of Universology, that in which 
the discovery of this New Universal Science mainly 
consists ; but it is proportionally less popular, in 
character, and more remote from old and existing 
scientific ideas. 

59. ARTOLOGY is that Branch or Aspect of the 
Science of the Universe in which the somewhat 
popular truths of Naturology and the new and more 
metaphysical truths of Scientology are, as it were, 



38 SCIENTOLOGICAL EXACTIFICATION. 

translated or modulated into each other, or, in other 
words, reconciled and married in the Elaborated and 
Completed Grand Cosmos or Total Universe of 
Being. There is, therefore, in this Department, Com- 
promise, Concession, or, in a word, AUTISTIC MODIFI- 
CATION. (B. O. t. 515.) Art is not so much the Art- 
products, or Objects of Art in themselves, although 
they are representative, but these Art-products in 
the act of being produced ; whence it is Evolution or 
Movement, or, in other words, Creation in Progress 
or Procedure what the Philosophers have technically 
denominated " The Becoming." 

60. Scientology is new, and remote from the popu- 
lar apprehension, alike of the learned and unlearned 
world. Artology, depending, as it does, for one of 
its factors, upon Scientology, is, Consequently, also 
new. Nat-urology, atone, answers to the whole scope 
of the Sciences as they have hitherto been cultivated and 
developed, and furnishes, therefore, the NATURAL Sams 
of the New Science. This, while it is, in a sense, 
popular, and closely related to the Natural S'ia/ce* as 
they are already studied and understood in the 
world, still, is not, in its Universological sense, mervhj 
the Aggregate of those Sciences, as they noiv stand in 
t]& minds of the Learned. It is, on the contrary, the 
whole body of those Sciences as re-cast and re-consti- 
tuted, Universologically, and by a Reflect of Exac tin- 
cation cast from Scientology, (the Sun and Centre of 
Universology), upon this Primitive and naturally In- 
exact Domain. The method, even here, is Analogical) 
and the result is to unify these primitive and fragment- 



INHERENT NECESSITY. 89 

ary Sciences by bringing them under the operation of 
that Identity of Laiv which is demonstrated and ex- 
pressly elaborated in the Scientological Branch of 
Universology. 

61. Naturology, as a Branch of Universology, is, 
therefore, Transcendental, in comparison with the frag- 
mentary state of the Special Sciences, as these have 
been hitherto developed ; but, on the other hand, in 
a general and popular sense, Naturology may be 
held to include also the existing Special Sciences in 
their actual state. 

62. Any particular Domain of the Universe, or of 
any of these Three Primitive Grand Domains (Nature, 
Science, and Art), as, for instance, the Vegetable 
Kingdom, the Animal Kingdom, the Human Body, 
or the Human Mind, segregated and considered as a 
whole, is a Minor Universe ; and may, therefore, or 
indeed must, naturally, be distributed, in the first in- 
stance, into a Naturismus, a Scientismus and an 
Artisrnus, of its own. Hence, there is, by an INHERENT 

and NECESSARY LAW, UNIVERSAL ANALOGY, Or an ECHO 

OF SAMENESS, in respect to the method of distribution, 
between the Entire Universe and any smaller Domain 
within the Universe ; and, mutually, between all such 
smaller Domains. Hence, there should be Identity of 
Distribution, and of Scientific Classification, through- 
out all Domains. The under 'standing of this Universal 
Echo of Principles and consequent Universal Analogy 
makes the Science of Universology. (8.) 

63. Language is one of these smaller Domains 
within the Universe, and is, itself, therefore, a Minia- 



40 THE TWO ORDERS, OR METHODS. 

tnre Universe, in accordance with the Principle of 
Analogy jnst stated, and a Type or Model of the 
Whole Universe. More than this, Language, occu- 
pying an intermediate position between Matter and 
Mind, .between the Physical and the Metaphysical 
Sciences, it is especially well situated to serve (by re- 
lation to its own inherent organization) as an In- 
terpreter between them. Language is, therefore, 
scientifically indicated as the Primary Modelic Sphere 
the Particular Miniature Universe which it is fitting 
to adopt as a point of departure in the larger investi- 
gation of the Entire Universe, and of all its parts. 
The Human Body is another Modelic Sphere to which 
there will be early and frequent occasion to recur, in 
the ulterior development of Universology. 

64. If, in accordance with thes*e premises, we as- 
sume Language as a Minor Universe of Being, and 
treat the distribution of this Domain, Naturismally, 
or in the spirit of the existing Sciences merely, there 
are still two Orders or Methods in which we may ap- 
proach and prosecute the consideration of the sub- 
ject. We may, in the first place, commence, so to 
speak, at the periphery, and proceed towards the cen- 
tre ; we may, in other words, attempt to surround 
and embrace Encyclopedically, the Entire Content or 
Contents of the Language-Domain, and to bring a 
certain degree of System and Harmony into our 
knowledge of it, by an external, non-vital, and super- 
imposed arrangement and classification of its several 
Departments. All the different Languages spoken 
on the planet may thus bo enumerated and classified, 



THE PHONETIC ALPHABET. 41 

in respect to both their Spacic and their Tempic Dis- 
tribution. Oral Speech, Music and Song may be dis- 
criminated as Departments of this Lingual Universe ; 
and so also Grammar, Logic and Rhetoric. The 
Grammar of Language may itself undergo division 
into Etymology, Syntax, etc. ; and the Parts of 
Speech may be distinguished and specified. Ana- 
lysis, and the Phonetic Elements of Speech may be 
designated as something distinct from every other 
Department, or at least Hieroglyphic and Syllabic 
Alphabets devised, and some idea of Words, Syllables 
and Elements be entertained ; and all this may con- 
ceivably exist, without any such Analysis of Element- 
ary Sounds as would supply a proper Phonetic 
Alphabet, which is the true Core or Centre of 
Speech, (even when this Alphabet is itself defective 
and imperfect from the want of a more rigorous and 
ultra-analytical process). All that has now been de- 
scribed belongs then to the Objective Method, or, in 
other words, to the Natural Order of the Naturismal 
or common phase of the Investigation of Language. 
65. But, all of this Procedure may be inverted, 
and, indeed, so soon as the study of Language as- 
sumes a really Scientific Character (of the Naturis- 
mal kind) it is even more natural that it should be in- 
verted. The exigencies of writing, in the effort to 
preserve Language, force that degree of Analysis 
upon the primitive scholars of a nation that they de- 
velop a somewhat imperfect Phonetic Alphabet, but 
still a Phonetic Alphabet, representing the Elements of 
Sound of their particular National Tongue. The 



42 THE SCIENTIFIC LINGUAL HEAD. 

work is empirically accomplished, applies only to the 
single Language, is destitute of radical knowledge 
of the Sound-producing Organismus (the Throat, 
Mouth and Nose) and of many other things essential 
to the Constitution of the Final and Universal Pho- 
netic Alphabet, destined thereafter to arise, at some 
day, as the instrument for expressing with equal cer- 
tainty all existing and even all possible languages.' 

66. Even this imperfect Phonetic Alphabet is, 
nevertheless, a new and wonderful Element in the 
constitution of Language. It becomes the Scientific 
Head or Centre of the Language to which it applies, 
from which, outwardly, there arises that Inverse Or- 
der of investigating and treating the whole Lingual 
Domain which has been adverted to above (64), as the 
Subjective Method or Logical Order of investigation 
and treatment. The Objective Method or Natural 
Order previously sketched (64) rested on OBSERVA- 
TIONAL GENERALIZATIONS (37 ; B. O. t. 1012), which 
furnish such general divisions of Language as its 
Grammar, its Logical Structure, its Musical Struc- 

1 I do not leave out of mind the extraordinary and exceptional 
fact that the Sanscrit Alphabet, perhaps the oldest Alphabet extant, 
is a marvel of scientific accuracy, for anything wrought out in this 
primitive or Naturismal method, and that it is vastly superior, for 
exposition of the true classification of sounds, to any of our more 
modern alphabets ; but yet, radically considered, even the Sanscrit 
alphabet is not adequately scientizcd by reference to the organic 
production of Sounds by the Speech Organ, as demonstrated by 
modern Science, and still less by any knowledge of the analogical 
principles involved in and requiring to be represented in the Final 
Universal Alphabet S. P. A. 



THE VESTIBULE OF LANGUAGE. 43 

fcure, etc. This Logical Order rests, on the contrary, 
on Analytical Generalizations (37; B. O. t. 1012), 
furnishing a handful of Elementary Sounds, repre- 
sented by the Alphabet, but which, in their way, just 
as really and exhaustively contain, in themselves, the 
luhole Language, in all its actuality and possibility, as, 
in its way, the broadest Objective Method could do 
nay, indeed, more really and exhaustively, since Obser- 
vational Generalizations are not susceptible of being 
so perfectly accomplished as the Analytical. 

67. From the Alphabet, as, so to speak, an Inter- 
nal Knot of the Elements of Speech, a Core, a Cen- 
trum, a Focus, or Hub, of the Principles of Language 
represented in Elements, the Structural Constitution 
of the whole Language is then wrought out, in a 
new and inverse sense from that previously consid- 
ered. Syllabaries, Spelling Books, Dictionaries, Vo- 
cabularies and finally Encyclopedias and the Cata- 
loguing of entire Libraries, and, finally, of all Litera- 
ture, are built upon the basis of the Alphabet, which 
serves in turn as their key, and thence as the key, or, 
to change the figure, as the Yestibule to the whole 
Language itself. To go out from the Alphabet as 
from the centre or main Entrance to the Periphery 
of Language in this new sense, is to proceed in the 
Inverse or Logical, and hence not in the Natural, but 
in its opposite, the Scientific Order of investigation 
and treatment. 

68. But in all of this primitive treatment of Lan- 
guage, in both Orders, first, separately, and then, in 
both combined, and reacting upon each other, we are 



44 MONOSPHEROLOGY ; COMPAROLOGY. 

only still in the Naturolw/1/ <f SPEECH. This whole 
Domain of Lingual Procedure is, in other words, the 
Naturismus of the Speech-Universe, or of the Total 
Linguistic Domain. It is also Monospheric, by 
which is meant, that its scope is confined to some 
single or individual Language, or even, it may be, to 
all Languages, each considered singly or individually. 
This whole Compound Method may also be denomi- 
nated Encyclopedic, as distinguished from the True 
Analytical Method which is Scientological. 

69. The Scientology of Language begins, along 
with the Logical Order of the Encyclopedic or Observa- 
tional Method, IN THE ALPHABET, or strictly speaking, 
lack of the Alphabet, as will be shown presently, (79.) 
But in respect to the Alphabet, it begins in that More 
Rigorous Analysis, in that closer" discrimination and 
classification of the Elementary Sounds of Speech 
which is known as " Phonetic Analysis." It passes 
over also from the consideration of the Elements of 
the Single, or Individual Language to the comparison 
of the Elements of different Languages ; and hence, 
from the Monospherology to the Comparology of the 
subject (B. O. t. 403), and hence again, to the founding 
of One Universal and strictly Scientific Alphabet for the 
representation of a'l Languages. 

70. All that has now been mentioned, even the 
Comparology of the Elements of Language (Com- 
parative Etymology), has been reached, at least in a 
primitive and imperfect manner, empirwaRy ; but 
Universology goes farther, and does more than all 
that has hitherto been indicated, in order to obtain 



TRANSCRIPT OF THE UNIVERSE. 45 

its starting points, or, in other words, to lay its foun- 
dation, upon which it then elevates a far more lofty 
edifice. 

71. It has been shown that Language is a Minor 
Universe echoing to or repeating the Grand Uni- 
verse, (63.) It results, therefore, that when we 
distribute radically and rightly the Elementary 
Sounds of the Human Voice, from which Language 
is constructed, we, do, virtually, and by a valid Scien- 
tific Analogy, also distribute the Categories, not merely 
of the Understanding, but of Universal Being, the Ele- 
mentary Entities and Principles, in other words, of 
the Universe itself, more effectively than can be done 
in any other way ; and that we lay the foundations, 
in this manner, at the same time and place, of the 
New Universal Science, and of a NEW SCIENTIFIC 
UNIVERSAL LANGUAGE, which shall be, in its structure, 
the Rectified and Clarified Transcript of the Universe ; 
as Language, in its existing Instinctual and Confused 
Development, has been the blurred and imperfect 
Sketch (Fr. ebauche), of the same Universe. 

72. But to complete, or more properly to even ini- 
tiate, this new order of investigation, the Scientology 
of the Universe and of Speech, we must discover 
the meaning which Nature attaches to each Elementary 
Articulate Sound of the Voice ; for if the Elements of 
Sound are the Analogues or Individual Echoes of 
the Elements of the Universe itself, which are the 
Proto-pragmata and Abstract Principles of which it 
is composed, then it follows that each sound of the 
voice in speech, such as is represented by a Letfcsr of 



46 INHERENT MEANINGS OF SOUNDS. 

the Alphabet, is the Analogue of some Particular 
First Entity or Governing Principle of Universal 
Being ; and that, inversely, that Particular Entity or 
Principle is the true meaning, by Analogy, of the 
given Alphabetic Sound ; and that all such Principles 
must be measured, numerically, and by Exact Echo 
in all senses, by the number and character of the 
Elementary Sounds of the True Universal Alphabet 
of Language. 

73. This then is what Universology begins by dis- 
covering. It is found, and will be progressively 
demonstrated, that Every Alphabetic Sound of the 
Human Voice is inherently laden by Nature herself ivith 
a specific significance or meaning ; that the Aggregate of 
these Meanings is, at the same time, the Aggregate of the 
Fundamental Entities and Principles of the Universe of 
Hatter and Mind ; and, that, hence, a Language rightly 
built up from the combinations of these Sounds must ex- 
actly echo to and represent, from the broadest General- 
izations to the minutest details, the Total Universe of 
Matter and Mind, itself built up in parallel development 

from the Echoing or Corresponding Entities or Principles. 
(81.) 

74. Out of this discovery arises, therefore, logical- 
ly, and as it were inevitably, a New Universal Lan- 
guage, the most wonderful and complete in its structure 
and powers of which it is possible to conceirc, and 
which must serve as the Vernacular of the Unitized 
Humanity or Great Planetary Nation of the Future. 
It is, then, the Philosophy and Linguistic Science 
underlying and intimately involved in this New Lan- 



RE-STATEMENT. 47 

guage throughout, which constitute the Scientology 
of Linguistic ; and the Corresponding Philosophy 
and Science of the Universe at large is the Scientol- 
ogy of Universology. The reaction of the Philosophy 
of the New Scientific Language upon the understanding 
of existing tongues, or upon the previous Science and 
Sciences of Language, icill constitute the Universological 
Aspect of Lingual Naturology (60, 61) ; and the simi- 
lar reaction of Universological Scientology upon the 
existing Sciences, recasting them into the mould of 
its own character, will be the Universologi-al Aspect of 
Naturology at large. Finally, the interblending and 
mutual modification and modulation of the old and 
new materials of Lingual Knowledge and Use will 
constitute the Artology of Speech. (59, 77.) 

75. To restate these points : The Naturology of 
Language is not confined to Grammar or Lexicology 
(the Dictionary), nor to any other particular depart- 
ment of the Science of Language, as now understood ; 
nor to all of them combined ; not even if we include 
Comparative Grammar or Comparative Etymology, 
with all the surprising expansion which has been 
given to that Branch of Science by the German 
School of Philologists. Linguo-Naturology or the 
Naturology of Language includes, on the contrary : 
First, in its ordinary or Non-Universological sense, 
all of these Departments of the Lingual Domain, or 
the whole of Linguistic, in any or every sense in 
which Language has heretofore been studied ; and 
Secondly, in its Universological Aspect, it includes all 
of this Primary Body of Lingual Science as it will 



48 ALWATO. 

be recast from the influence of the new Philology. 
In the same manner, Naturolog} 7 , at large, includes, in 
an ordinary sense, all the existing Sciences in their 
present state ; and, in a Universological Sense, the 
same Body of the Sciences as they will be enlarged 
and reconstituted from Scientology. 

76. Linguo- Scientology or the Scientology of Lan- 
guage is the new and totally distinct department of 
the Science of Language, as above sketched, which 
arises out of the discovery of the Inherent Meanings 
of Sounds, and of the Scientific Law of their combi- 
nations, to constitute, basically, the Unitary and Per- 
fect Language of Mankind. Scientology, at large, 
holds the corresponding relation to the Total Uni- 
verse, and is the Back-lying and Eegulative Abstract 
Science or Exactology of the Universe. 

77. Linguo- Artology or the Artology of Language, 
the resultant of the Interblending of the Naturologj 
and Scientology of Language, will be best illustrated 
by the Final Form of the "World's Vernacular, which 
will be a Single Grand Planetary Language, with the 
New Scientific Lingual Structure as Basis and Gov- 
erning Head of the whole, together with the materials 
of all existing Languages (the Naturismus of Speech) 
sifted, recast and inwrought into this Completed and 
Sublime Lingual Fabric, the dialects of which will 
not be distributed, as now, by the mere accidents of 
locality and race, but by the Departments or Spheres 
of the Totality of Human Knowledge and affairs. 

78. The name of the New Scientific Language is 
ALWATO (pronounced A/tl-icah-to), a word derived 



THE UNIVERSAL ALPHABET. 49 

from the Language itself, and meaning Universal 
Speech, (Al for ALL, and ivato for SPEECH or LAN- 
GUAGE). It is also called, somewhat more technically, 
TIKIWA, (pronounced tee-kee-ivah), a word also wrought 
out from the Language itself, and referring to Unism 
and Duism as the Scientific Bases of Speech. The 
preliminary steps for the exhibition of this new Lan- 
guage occur in this Synopsis, in connection with 
Phonetics. The development of the Language itself 
will be carried forward in subsequent and special 
Treatises, Grammars, Vocabularies, etc. 

79. It was observed above (69), that the Scientol- 
ogy of Language goes even back of the Alphabet for 
its absolute origins. To gain the point of view of 
the proper starting-point of this New Science, we 
must therefore begin with a more radical and thor- 
ough analysis of the Sounds of some particular Lan- 
guage, the English, for instance, as is done in the 
Phonetic Reform initiated by Mr. Pitman ; we must 
then extend this Analysis to the inclusion of the 
Phonetic Elements and of the Alphabetic Signs or 
Letters for the representation of all Languages, thus 
laying the foundation of a Universal Alphabet, along 
with Rapp, Ellis, Lepsius, the English Church Mis- 
sionary Society, Max Miiller and others ; we must 
then go back to the proper Alphabetic Elements, 
analyzing and classifying them, as to their localities 
and the modes of their production in the mouth, and 
their proper pictorial and symbolic representation, 
thus founding a new Science of " Alphaboti; ---," with 
Alexander Melville Bell (in " Bell's Visible Speech ") ; 
3 



IDENTITY OF DISTRIBUTION. 

we must, again, as Universology alone does, go back 
of Mr. Bell, analyzing even liis classification, and re- 
ducing all possible sounds, and their classes and ar- 
rangements to Three Primordial Principles, Unism, 
Duisna and Trinism, respectively illustrated by the 
Three (not Four) seats of Sound in the mouth, the 
Middle-Mouth, the Back-Mouth and the Front-Mouth 
respectively. 

80. Reascending thence through the Classes of 
Sounds to the Individual Sounds of the Reconstructed 
Universal Alphabet, we must then add the crowning 
discovery which Universology, in this Lingual appli- 
cation of it, also alone makes, namely : That the same 
Principles of Distribution by which the Elements of 
the Human Voice are distributed, and by which a 
True Universal Alphabet is constituted, have, in the 
necessary operations of Nature, distributed all the 
higher or more elaborate or less elementary Depart- 
ments of Language, and all the details of these, 
thereby constituting Language itself, so that every 
tiling within this ivhole Domain of Being is nothing 
r/.sT limn continuous Echo and Re-echo of the Facts and 
Principles of the Alphabet itself. 

81. And, finally, it appears that, inasmuch as Lan- 
guage is an Epitome of the Total Universe, and is itself 
H Representative Minor Universe, the Elements of 
Language, the Sounds and Letters of the Universal 
Speech Alphabet, must be and are, by a valid and le- 
gitimate Scientific Analogy, identical with the Ele- 
ments of Universal Thought and Being and, there- 
fore, with the Universal Logical and the Universal 



CONSTITUTION OF THE UNIYEESE. 51 

Ontological Alphabets respectively ; that the Inherent 
Meanings of these Universal Alphabetic Sounds are 
identically these Universal Elements of Being ; and 
that the Universe, itself, is built up from the same, in 
a precisely parallel evolution to that by which a New 
Scientific Universal Language is evolved from its 
own Alphabetic Elements. (73.) 



CHAPTER III. 

FURTHER DISTRIBUTION OF THE UNIVERSE. THE ELE- 
MENTARY, AND, THE ELABORATE. LANGUAGE, AS AN 
EPITOME OF THE UNIVERSE, DISTRIBUTED. 

82. We have next to distinguish the Elementary 
and the Elaborate Departments of Being. The 
Elementary Sphere is well illustrated in Language, 
where the results of the Phonetic Analysis of Speech 
are already familiarly known as " The Elements " of 
Speech, or of Language. This phrase then suggests 
all the remaining and more compound aspect of Lan- 
guage as something to be contrasted with the Ele- 
ments ; and it is this opposite and derivative De- 
partment of this Total Domain which is meant by 
the Elaborate Department of Language. Technically, 
the Elements of any Domain of Being are the Ele- 
mentismus, and the remaining and contrasted De- 
partment is the Elaborismus of that Domain as of 
Language, for instance, or of any other subordinate 
Domain, or of the entire Universe itself. Finally, 
the Science of the Elements of any given Domain is 
the Elementology of that Domain ; and the Science of 
its Elaborate; or derivative Aspect or Do; mrl incut is 
theElaborology of that Doiunin. The AVnuLE is T final. 



THE ELEMENTARY, AND THE ELABORATE. 53 

83. Although the Elementisrnus and the Elaboris- 
mus are very Distinct or " Discrete ' Degrees of 
'Being, there is, nevertheless, an Echo of Analogy be- 
tween them. The Elenientisnius of the Universe 
consists of Proto-pragmata or Primary Realities, as 
Entity or Thing, Relation, Matter, Space, etc., and of 
Principles or Primary Laws, as Unism, Duism, etc. 
These Elementary Distributions then reappear in the 
Elaborated Universe, not as mere Abstractions, which 
they are in their Elementary Aspect, but as embodied 
in, and constituting corresponding Elaborate Domains ; 
but, then, in conjunction witli other Elements, while yet 
each Element occurs in such preponderance, in 
some particular instance of The Elaborate, as to be 
characteristic, and governing, in thctt particular given 
Domain. By Echo of Analogy, each Class of Sounds, 
and each Particular Sound occurring in the Alphabet 
of Speech, answers to, and is answered to by some 
Whole Department in the Elaborate or General Consti- 
tution of Language, in which Department the same 
Principle (represented by the Particular Elementary 
Sound) recurs, not so purely and abstractly, but yet 
in a governing or characteristic degree. This ab- 
struse and difficult idea will be rendered readily com- 
prehensible by what follows. (85.) 

84. It is thus that the Absolutoid and Abstractoid 
Elementismus of Being echoes or reappears by Ana- 
logy within the Kelatoicl and Concretoid Elaboris- 
mus ; the Plan of Nature being to organize some part 
of her Domains as the somewhat exclusive residence of 
each Fundameutal Abstract Principle ; or as the some- 



54 INEXPUGXABILITT, ETC. 

wlmt Independent Obj edification of every Primary and 
Necessary Aspect of Being somewhat so, it is said, 
because, by another Principle of Universology called 
THE INEXPUGNABILITY o? PRIME ELEMENTS (B. O. 
t. 226), Principles and Primary Aspects, in part ex- 
cluded, are still always present in every part of the 
Elaborate World, only in a subordinate or minor de- 
gree. There is MERE PREPONDERANCE (B. O. t. 526) 
of the Major or Governing Principle, and SUBDOMI- 
NANCE (B. O. t. 524) of the Minor or Subordinate 
Principle, in the given instance or domain. 

85. The reappearance of Elementary ED titles, Prin- 
ciples, or Domains, subsequently, as Elaborated Do- 
mains, is illustrated as follows : The Yowel-Sounds 
are an Elemental Domain of Speech or Language ; 
and the Consonant-Sounds are another such Domain.. 
But, then, Entire Languages occur in which the Vowel- 
Element predominates, and which it characterizes, as, 
for example, the Italian ; and other entire languages 
in which the Consonant-Element predominates, and 
which, it characterizes, as, for example, the German. 
These Individual Languages are then, Elaborated or 
Actual Domains of Language at large, and repeat, in 
their oirn stnu-hirr, the Two Elementary Domains of 
the Alphabet of Language, (namely the Vowels and 
the Consonants), by which these languages are re- 
spectively characterized. But no Language can ex- 
ist wholly without the Vowel-Element, nor wholly 
without the Consonant-Element ; and this fact illus- 
trates what is meant by THE INEXPUGNABILITY ( 

of PRIME ELEMENTS. The Italian 



ITALIAN AND GERMAN. 

Language merely preponderates in Vowels, and the 
German in Consonants, and this illustrates what 
meant by MERE PREPONDERANCE. There is, in other 
words, a subordinate (but also Subdominant) propor- 
tion of Consonant-Sounds in Italian, notwithstanding 
its prevailing Yowel Character, and so vice versa, of 
the German ; and this is what is meant by SUBDOMI- 

NANCE. 

86. Reasoning inversely, it may be said that the 
Italian language, renders, on analysis, the Vowel- 
Elemenfc in Preponderance, and the Consonant-Element 
in SuMominance, and that, contrariwise, the German 
language yields the Consonant-Element in Prepon- 
derance and the Vowel-Element in Subdominanoe. 

87. It is the Aggregate of the Elementary Domains 
of Being (or of any given Domain) which constitutes 
the Elernentismus. It is the Aggregate of the Ela- 
borate Domains which constitutes the Elaborismus. 
Phonetics and Alphabetics pertain to the Elementis- 
mus of Language. The Yowels and Consonants are 
Elementary Departments, or Special Domains with- 
in the Domain of Phonetics, or within the Alphabet. 
The Alphabet of Vowels and Consonants (with their 
interspaces of Silence) are, indeed, virtually the whole 
of the Elementismus of Language. Every thing else 
in Language, Grammar, Dictionary, Rhetoric, Logic, 
the Musical Expansion of Language, the History, 
Local Distribution and Etymological and Gramma- 
tical Comparison of different languages, are collect- 
ively the Elaborismus of the Universal Language- 
Domain or of Language at large ; all of which is 



56 SOUNDS AND SIGNS. 

built up from the Universal Alphabet, or rests upon 
it, as Elementisinus, as a house rests upon its foun- 
dation, ov as the parts of a house are correlated with 
its vestibule or main entrance ; as a wheel depends 
upon its hub or centre ; or as any peripheric expan- 
sion upon its basis, centrum, core or pivot. 

88. Vow el- Sounds and Consonant- Sounds must be 
carefully distinguished from the Letters or Signs, writ- 
ten or printed, by which these Sounds of the Alpha- 
bet are signified or represented and they are very 
apt to be confounded with them. Sounds, Yowel or 
Consonant, are what we make* with our mouths and 
Jiear with our ears; and are precisely the same 
whether we know what they mean, and the letters by 
which they should be written or printed, or whether 
we know neither what they mean, "nor by what letters 
to write or print them as when we listen to the 
speaking of an unknown language. 

89. Letters are, on the contrary, what we see with 
the eye, when we read, and make with the hand, when 
we write, and represent by types, when we print. They 
are, indeed, used to signify sounds, but they are not 
themselves sounds, and may even be falsely used, so 
as to misrepresent the sounds, instead of truly re- 
presenting them, as, for example, when people spell 
inaccurately (with reference to whatsoever standard 
of correctness). 

90. In different languages, the same Sound is, now, 
in the deficiency of any accepted and practical Uni- 
versal Alphabet, frequently represented by quite dif- 
ferent letters ; so that, in learning a new language, we 



VOWELS AND CONSONANTS. . 57 

have often to learn new Values, in sound, for the let- 
ters with the native values of which (English, for ex- 
ample) we are already familiar. (For instance a is, 
in French, pronounced not a, but ah ; i is pronounced 
not i, but ee, etc.) For Universal purposes we have, 
therefore, first, to agree in what way we will repre- 
sent (print or write) the Sounds of the Alphabet, be- 
fore we can be sure that we and the people of other 
countries shall be thinking and talking of the same 
Sounds, even when we may be using the same letters. 

91. Vowel-Sounds are sounds ivhich are made by a 
continuous flow of the sounding breath through the mouth 
(and sometimes through the nose also), or, in other words, 
WITH THE MOUTH OPEN ; as when we say i (ee), Ah ! 
Oh ! Consonant-Sounds are Cuts, Breaks or Limits 
made by the voice, ivhich ive put upon the sounding 
breath, as that of the k in ling or in o (a) Jc. To ana- 
lyze speech into its elements is to learn to utter, sepa- 
rately, just the sounds which are contained in the 
words, without regard to the way in ivhich the ivords are 
commonly spelled ; as if we were to call o k' oak, omit- 
ting the a which is not sounded, 1 This is also called 
Spelling by Sound. It is of the utmost importance 
to become perfectly familiar with analyzing or spelling 
by sound, in order to understand, without confusion, 
whatever is written or said about Sounds. (App. D, 
p. 190.) 

92. The Yowel-Sounds, even of all the languages 

1 The name we give to k is kay ; but this includes a vowel-sound 
(uy). Practice enables one to explode the Consonants without the 
aid of any appreciable amount of vowel-soimd. The name is not 
the sound ; or rather it is something- more than the sound. 



THE SKELETON ALPHABET. 

of the world, are very few, although, as in the case of 
colors, they may be made numerous by attention to 
minor or intermediate shades of sound. The Three 
Pivotal or Leading Yowel-Sounds are 1. a, which is, 
for the purposes of Universology to be pronounced 
ah, or like a in far ; 2, i, to be pronounced ee, or like 
i in machfne ; and 3, u, to be carefully and uniform- 
ly pronounced like oo, or as some people pronounce 
u in rule (rool). Between a and i, there is e, to be 
pronounced like a, or like e in obey ; and between i 
and u there is o, with its ordinary pronunciation. 
Two Yowels, pronounced closely, or with no inter- 
mission, are called a Diphthong. Au (ah, oo) is the 
leading diphthong. This leading diphthong will be 
used as a short method of denoting all the vowels col- 
lectively ; so that, to say au, is, as if we should say, 
all the voicels. More strictly, au (ah-oo) fails to in- 
clude the Middle-Mouth Yowels i (ee) and e (a) ; if 
they are also explicitly meant, the Triphthong iau 
(ee-ah-oo) is requisite. 

93. The following Table exhibits the Natural Al- 
phabet with the proper Ordinary Degree of Minute- 
ness in the discrimination of the Sounds ; accom- 
panied by the Headings and Side-Titles which de- 
scribe the Specific Characters of the different Classes 
of Sounds; so as to ln'iHile a] im.lerxtandt. 
of their Inherent Relations f>> l/ie Pi-'nim-rij Enl'ii. 
and Laics of Deiim. Apart from minor shades or 
with slightly important additions, this simple Alpha- 
bet, primarily serving for the English language, is ade- 
quate to the representation of all existing languages, 



ORDER OF SOUNDS. 

and also of Alwato ; or, in a word, of all possible human 
speech. Marked or modified types will be elsewhere 
introduced for the intermediate Sounds, down to any 
requisite degree of fineness in the shades of sound. 
Such is the simple character of The Universal Li 
Alphabet. This Skeleton Alphabet as it may be call- 
ed by analogy with a skeleton regiment in the army, 
which has its Pivots or officers and its ground-plan 
complete, to be subsequently filled in, up to its entire 
complement, with subalterns and privates though 
characterized, in a general sense, as English, is so 
only because the basis-distribution of 'sounds is the 
same for English as for all languages ; hence the 
adjective, English, may be omitted or parenthesized. 
The Nasalization (97) is needed at this day even for 
English as we have almost daily need for the trans- 
literation of French words containing this sound. 

94. The different Classes of Sounds are introduced, 
in the Table, in the order in which they will be sub- 
sequently considered ; the Vowels first, the S 
Consonants next, etc. There are three bastard or less 
perfect vowels, not hitherto mentioned, represented 
by Italics (000), namely a, u, o, pronounced 1. as a in 
mare or ai in a?'r, or like a in at prolonged ; 2. as 
u in cz(t, cwrd ; and 3. as aiv in <m*ful or o in or (short 
in not.) The eight vowels of the Vowel-Scale, (in the 
following Table) are, therefore, pronounced, (in the 
order of their accompanying numbers), as follows : 

i e a a u oou 

eei (in feet) ; a in fate ; ai in air ; ah in ah ' ; u in um ; a in ell ; o : oo. 

The diphthongs retain the exact values of the united 
* vowels. (The ai will occur for a.) 



GO TABULATION OF THE ALPHABET. 

TABLE No. 1. 

THE BASIC OR SKELETON UNIVERSAL (AND ENGLISH) PHO- 
NETIC ALPHABET. 

2. Back-mouth. 1. Middle-mouth. 3. Front-mouth 

(Throat) (Tongue-tip-aiid-teetli) (Lips) 

Class No. 1. THE VOWELS. 



Diphthongs. 

JL 


6. 

(0) 


5. 4. 3. 
(ff.) 'A (rt) 


2. 

e 


i. 
i 


7. 8. 
O El 


ai 


-10 




181 9 




0311 

^ 










AU 12 





,<?s JV0. 2. THE SOLID (OK TUBE) CONSONANTS. 

Stntoid, SingvMd, (Abstract, k (n or tsli) t tli p 
or Simple, Inorgan- { 

icoid. (Concrete, g 1 (j or dz3a) d dli 9 1> 



Motoid, Pluraloid, (Abstract, * sh B f 

or Compound, Or- < 
ganicoid. / Concrete, zli z v 



JVb. 0. THE LIQUIDS OK VOWEL-LIKE CONSONANTS. 
Statoid Nasal jajj BD 

Motoid, B r 



. 4. Tni: AMBIGU'S on COALESCENTS. 
h y 

(Diacritical Mai-k - n ) (The Nasalization.} 

-- - - -'- - 

' Hard as in /yivr. 

2 th as in thy ; compare with ih in //n^li. 



SUPPLEMENTARY SOUNDS. 61 

95. This Alphabet is the General Basis, not com- 
pleted in details (93), of an English-Adapted and 
Universal Phonetic Alphabet. Its most appropriate 
name is The Sheldon (English Phonetic) Alphabet. 
There are two additional Back-Mouth Consonant- 
Sounds, occurring where the stars are placed in the 
Table, (Class No. 2), namely, 1. the ch (or Hi) as in 
the German nacA, and 2. the heavy correspond- 
ing sound gh, which occurs in Gaelic and Dutch 
(the old English as in throu(/A, thorn/7?, etc.) and is 
still extant in Scotch ; sounds which are very primi- 
tive, but which do not abound in the general range 
of Languages. These go to augment this Basic 
Alphabet, when instead of adaptation to the English 
merely, it is to serve, also, as the Basis of the Universal 
or International Phonetic Alphabet. There are also 
two Yowel-Sounds 6 and ii (the French eu and ), 
and two others e and i, (the French open e and Rus- 
sian or Sclavic i, which should be added for the same 
purpose. If then we discard $ and j as compound 
sounds (99), the number of Sounds to be reckoned 
as belonging to the Skeleton Universal Phonetic 
Alphabet is 36, the Skeleton English Phonetic AJ- 
phabet being, in this way, reduced to 30 sounds ; 
but it will be found practically more convenient to 
retain the and j, (as if they icere simple), and 
so to reckon this English Alphabet as containing 32 
Sounds. It may be observed, in passing, that the 
Theoretic number of a full Universal Alphabet is 64 
sounds ; and that 32 is the half of that number. 

96. None of these (six additional exceptional) 



62 NASALIZATION DEFINED. 

Sounds are, however, so practically fundamental as the 
30 (or, including and,/, the 32) sounds which occur in 
the English Language, as shown in the preceding 
Alphabetical list ; (although the th and dh, occurring 
in English, are also rare sounds with reference to 
the general range of languages.) Modifications and 
Intermediate Shades, especially of the Vowel-Sounds, 
require additional letters, as previously stated, or the 
marking of some of the letters here used, (93, 000) to 
print, phonetically and satisfactorily, even the English, 
and still additional ones to print all the numerous 
languages of the earth. The details of this extensive 
and intricate subject belong to other works. (See 
especially The Vocabulary to the " Basic Outline of 
Universology," words, Psychology, Theology, Uni- 
versology and Tikiwa ; and " The Alphabet of the 
Universe," and " The Universal Alphabet.") What 
is presented here is simply a Platform or Common 
Foundation of A UNIVERSAL ALPHABET, from 
which modifications and adaptations, for Special lan- 
guages, and for various degrees of Phonetic nicety 
may take their departure ; in a word the Skeleton of 
a Universal Alphabet, as explained above. 

97. The Nasalization is a mere tinge of the Nasal 
Consonant quality (Nose-sound or Twang) impressed 
xm pure Vowel-Sounds. Some languages have the 
whole series of vowels so affected or in other words 
a complete series of nasalized vowels, as the Choc- 
taw, for instance. The French, has four vowels of 
this order, usually represented by the French letter- 
combinations an, in, on and un. It simplifies the 



AMBIGUITIES AVOIDED. 

consideration and representation of this exceptional 
class of vowel-sounds very much, however, to treat 
the Consonant- tinge so impressed on the vowels in 
so far as a distinct sound as to denote it by a sepa- 
rate sign which may then be affixed to any vowel. 
(The sign adopted is a small n at the top, thus a n , *, 
o n , u n ). There is also an Etymological advantage in 
this method (for which also we have the authority of 
the Sanscrit Alphabet), inasmuch as the Nasal Yowels 
have originated by the absorption of Nasal Conso- 
nants into the otherwise pure vowels. The Nasaliza- 

j. 

tion is placed in this Alphabet along with the Coales- 
cents ; while yet it is not a letter, and is not numbered 
in the Alphabetic Estimate. It is merely a Diacrit- 
ical Sign, in the nature, more of the Accent-Marks, 
and may be applied to any vowel. (See Introduction 
"Andrews' and Bachelor's French Instructor.") (000.) 

98. The numbers attached to the Vowel-Letters in 
the Alphabetic Table represent the order in which 
the Yowels and Diphthongs are generally made to 
follow each other in a scale or series ; although, for 
different purposes, there are various other arrange- 
ments or orders. The Consonant-Orders, variously 
adopted, are still more numerous, but need not be 
specified here. 

99. It is a common Phonetic idea to represent, 
each single sound by a single letter ; but, practically, 
this is not done in existing Alphabets, and need not 
be insisted upon even for our present purpose, pro- 
vided no ambiguities are permitted in respect to the 
sounds which arc meant no matter how the certain- 



64 COMPOUND EUEMENTS. 

fcy is attained (000.) Accordingly, th, dh, sh, zh and ny, 
are two-letter-combinations, each of which represents 
a single sound ; and tsli and dzh represent two sounds 
each, or are the equivalents of t, sh and d, zJt. These 
combinations are however so close, and behave so 
nearly, in various ways, like simple sounds, that it is 
convenient to admit them into the Alphabet, and to 
treat them as such. They may be compared to 
Cyanogen and other Compound Elements in Chemis- 
try. Th and dh are used for the two sounds of th in 
thigh and thy, (dhy) ; zh is the French j, or the Eng- 
lish z in azure. The ng is a single sound of the nasal 
group, the g having no value as such, as appears 
when this combination takes a true (" hard ") (/-sound 
after it ; so, for example, the two words .singer and 
finger are phonetically represented (in this Alphabet) 
by singer undjingger (sing-er, fing-ger). 

100. The Yowel-Signs o, it, a, having no other dis- 
tinction from o, u, a, than that of being italicized (94), 
they should be changed to small capitals if the body 
of the word in which they occur is already italic, 
thus brod, for broad, etc. It has been thought im- 
portant to avoid by such means the introduction of 
any new letters or types. Observe that the English 
long i (in pme) is really a diphthong equal to ai (ah, 
ee), very closely pronounced ; the two sounds squeezed 
as it were together ; and that the English u (long) is 
also, in a similar way, a diphthong, equal to ee, oo or 
yoo, as in wnion. 

101. Of the Solid (or true) Consonant Sounds, 
those which are printed in the Table in a Light Line 



ABSTEACTOIDS AND CONC3ETOID8. 6,J 

type tlie series ending at the lips in p, and the series 
ending at the lips in/ are Light or Thin, and hence 
signify that which is ABSTRACT (or " The Abstract "), 
as, for example, a Point without extension ; a Line 
without thickness ; a Law ; a relation of two num- 
bers as thought of in the mind ; and the like ; or the 
Analogues of such Abstract Things. They do not 
therefore, primarily, represent Heal or Concrete Ob- 
jects or Things. 

102. Those sounds, on the contrary, which couple 
with these, and are printed in Heavy or Black-Faced 
Types the series ending at the lips in !>, and the 
series ending at the lips in v signify that which is 
CONCRETE (or " The Concrete "), that is to say, Eeal 
Objects or Things, Mineral, Vegetable or Animal ; 
things which have bulk, weight and substancive value ; 
and the analogues of these objects even in purely Ideal 
Spheres, as, for example, ivithin the mind itself. 

103. This distinction between these two sub-classes 
of consonant-sounds (Thin and Thick or Abstract-oid 
and Concret-oid) has been virtually seized upon for 
a practical purpose by Isaac Pitman, the inventor of 
Steno-Phonography or Phonographic Short -Hand. 
He has represented the Abstract, more strictly the 
Abstractoid sub-class of solid consonant-sounds by 
certain single Light strokes of the pen, and the cor- 
responding Concrete or Concretoid Class, by precisely 
the same strokes, with the mere difference that the 
strokes are, in this latter case, made Heavy. These 
are two sub-classes of sounds, within which each 
Two Sounds produced at the same seat of sound and 



66 PAIRING 0? SOUNDS. 

taken, one from the Thin or Abstractoid, and one 
from the Thick or Concretoid Variety, make a couple, 
as it were Male and Female, and so nearly resemble 
each other, that if the sounds of one of these sub- 
classes alone be taken and used for those of both, 
the words so spelled are not, for the most part, un- 
intelligible. A little awkwardness only ensues from 
this change, as if, for example, a woman were set to do 
a man's work ; thus, if instead of "M.a,s(s)a,(tsh)uset(t)8 s 
we were to pronounce Ma.sajuzerf , the result would 
be nearly the same on the ear. If, indeed, the pro- 
nunciation be done deftly and lightly but few people 
will notice the difference. 

104. The 7^-sound and the hard sound of g fas in 
r/ive) are such a pair of sounds ; the t and the d; and 
the p and the b ; and the th (in i high) and the ill (in 
thy) ; and the tsh and the j ; and the sh and the zli ; 
and the s and the z ; and the / and the v, are also 
such pairs of the Solid Consonant-Sounds ; the first 
of each pair being Abstractoid (or Masculoid), and 
the second or remaining one of each pair (relatively 
soft) being Concretoid (or Feminoid.) 

105. It is probably only a small proportion of Eng- 
lish speaking persons who practically recognize the 
fact that there are two different sounds of th, one as 
in ^//igh (thin, light, hard, abstract), and one as in 
li.y (thick, heavy, soft, concrete) ; and still less do 
they recognize that there is, between these sounds in 
f//igh and thy, precisely the same kind and degree of 
difference which there is, between t and d in tie and 

The twoness of the letters first obscures to the 



STENO-PHONOGRAPHY. 67 

mind the fact that only one sound is represented in 
any given case where they are employed ; and then 
the sameness of the letters addressed to the eye, although 
the sound varies, obscures still farther the difference of 
sound addressed to the ear ; 

Segnius irritant animos demissa per aurem 

Quam quse sunt oculis subjecta fidelibus. HORACE. 1 

106. The art of Beading as hitherto taught among 
us, has, in ways similar to this, by in a word the 
barbarous imperfections of our Alphabet and Or- 
thography, greatly fostered the bad habit of hearing 
u'ith the eyes, so that as a people our ears have been 
obfuscated and deadened until w r e are nearly incapa- 
ble of learning the living languages of other nations. 

107. The following Table exhibits the part in ques- 
tion of Mr. Pitman's Steno-Phonographic Alphabet. 
I have placed my own namings for the distinct 
classes of sounds, over and opposite to them, for the 
sake of preserving unity of system in the present 
work. 

TABLE No. 2. 

ABSTRACT FROM MR. PITMAN'S STEXO-PHONOGRAPHIC 

ALPHABET. 
Sack-Mouth. Middle-Mouth. Front-Mouth. 

Statoid or Abstract, __ k / 9 t ( tli \ p 

Cardinoid. (Concrete, _ g / j | d ( dh \ b 

Motoid or ( Abstract, J sh ) s ^ f 

Oi'dinoid. (Concrete, J za ) z ^ v 



1 Things communicated through the ear affect the mind less 
vividly than those which are subjected to the faithful eyes. 



CHAPTER IV. 

INHERENT MEANINGS OF THE ELEMENTS OF LANGUAGE. 

108. The present chapter will contain a Tabulated 
condensed statement of the Inherent Meanings of each 
of the 32 (or, including - n , the 33) sounds of the 
Skeleton or Abridged (Basic) Alphabet, which is at 
the same time the Basis of the English-adapted 
Phonetic Alphabet, and, with a few additions, that of 
the Universal Phonetic Alphabet, applicable alike to 
all the Instinctual or Old-Style Languages and to 
Alwato, the New Scientific Universal Language. 

109. To cover more completely the usual range of 
Yowel and Consonant-Sounds occurring in the va- 
rious languages, it will be requisite elsewhere, to add 
the six other sounds above specified, ch, gh, 6, ii, e 
and i (95). The Special Meanings of these six 
sounds are, however, mere shades of Meaning of 
related sounds which are herein given, and are, there- 
fore, omitted from this elementary exhibit. The Al- 
phabet so augmented may then be regarded as the 
common or usual International Alphabet. All othor 
less prominent and intermediate varieties of Sounds 



VOWEL-MEANINGS. G9 

will be treated as Extra or Exceptional, and all Alpha- 
bets which include any of them as Specialized or 
Adapted Alphabets. 

TABLE No. 3. 

INHERENT MEANINGS OF THE ALPHABETIC SOUNDS. 

I. 

Of the Vowels and Diphthongs ; the Specially Soft, Concessive, or 

Homogeneous Sounds. 

1. Of the Vo iv els. 

I, (ee), LENGTH ; Centering Continuity, Persistency, 
BEING ; Ens, Entity, or Thing ; somewhat Inde- 
terminately or vaguely conceived of. I, POINT, 

as End. (000.) 

E, (a), BREADTH ; Sideness, Collateral! ty, Relativity ; 
Adjunct or Wing, BELATION, Law ; indetermi- 
nately or vaguely conceived of. E, LINE, as Edge. 

A, (ft in mrrre), THINTH (thinness) ; Flatness, Subsid- 
ence, Decline, Level, Supersurface, Attenua- 
tion, Etheriality ; the 2 nd or Finer Form of 
Matter; indeterminately or vaguely conceived of. 
SURFACE, as Flat Edge or Thin Side of Solid. 

A, (ah), THICKTH (thickness) ; Up-and-down-ness, Ac- 
cumulation, Substance, (goods, wealth) ; Rich- 
ness, Goodness, Exuberance; MATTER, or the 1 st 
Form of Matter, (gross, palpable, tangible) ; in- 
determinately or vaguely conceived of. SOLID. 

U, (uh), TIME ; Flux, Current ; On-going; Tempora- 
iV/Vv?, Ordinary Events, Sublunary Transactions; 
indeterminately or vaguely conceived of. FLUID. 



70 DIPHTHONG-MEANINGS. 

0, (aw), SPACE ; Expanse (up and around), the Empy- 
rean, the Firmament ; Spiritualities, CAEDINABY 
Events, Transcendental Affairs ; indeterminately 
or vaguely conceived <f. SOLID-ofcZ. 

0, FttONT ; Light, Presentation, Brilliancy (as of the 

face or countenance) ; View, Aspect, Prospect ; 
Clearness, Demonstration, Scientific Insight, 
Prevision, Theory ; Idea, Ideology, Idealism, 
A priori, somewhat indeterminate. CRYSTAL- 
INE. 

U, (oo), BACK ; Shade, Retiracy, Obscurity, (as of the 
posterior and inferior portions of the body) ; 
Occultness, Turbidity, Dubiosity ; Obser- 
vational, Empirical Knowledge, Imperfect 
Science ; Practice as contrasted with Theory ; 
Experientialism as against Idealism, A pos- 
teriori; indeterminately conceived of. COLLOID. 

2. Of the D iphthong s. 

lu, (ee-oo), INTERPENETSATION ; Transit, Crossing, 
Twirling, Copulation; indeterminately or vaguely 
conceived of. GERM. 

01, (aw-ee\ MASCULISM ; Super-incumbency and Em- 

brace, (as of the Sky resting upon and em- 
bracing the Earth) ; Canopy, Over-shadowing ; 
indeterminately conceived of. IMPREGNA- 
TION. 

Ai, (ah-ee), FEMINISM ; Sub-recumbency and Passivity 
(or Reaction as Passion and Production, as 
of the Mother Earth fecundated by the Light, 



THE STATO-ABSTRACTOIDS. 71 

Moistures and Magnetisms from the Heaven 
or Sky) ; Ground, Platform, Footstool ; vaguely 
and indeterminately conceived of. PROLIFI- 
CATION. 

An, (ah-oo), HOMOGENEITY, INFINITY, UNLBIITEDNESS ; 
Interblending, Obliteration of Differences, 
Proto-plasmal Incipiency, Quasi-inarticidateness ; 
vaguely and indeterminately conceived of. Inde- 
terminateness or lack of Limits or Sounds, and 
consequent Vagueness, are the grand characteristic 
of locality or Vowel-Sounds. THE UNLIM- 
ITED (112.) 

II. 

Of the Consonants ; Rigorous, Limitative, Differentiative or Het&ro- 

genizing Sounds, (true Articulations or little-jointings 

Lat. articulus, A LITTLE JOINT.) 

1. Of the Solids. 

a. 

Of the Abstractoid Solids. 

a. 

Of the Statoid (or Simple) Abstractoid Solids. 

K, Simple or Single Ofrhess or FROMNESS ; Apartness, 
Division, DIFFERENTIATION ; Abstract or Pure 
Simple DUISM. 

T, Simple or Single ATNESS ; Togetherness, Unition, 
INTEGRATION ; Abstract or Pure Simple UNISM. 

P, Simple or Single FROM-AND-ATNESS ; The higher 
or Compound Integration of Apartness and 
Togetherness ; of Division and Unition ; or of 
Differentiation and Integration ; Hinge-wise- 
ness ; the Cardination (Latin, cardo, A HINGE) or 



72 THE MOTO-ABSTRACT01DS. 

hinging, in the one relation, of the two wings 
or opposite aspects of the relation ; Cuneisin, 
(wedge-ism) ; Abstract or Pure Simple TEINISM. 

Th, PIVOT ; Interpunct or Interpoint ; (th and dh are 
obscure in meaning or difficult of apprehen- 
sion, and need not receive particular attention 
in the first instance). 

C or Tsh (= t, sh), Atom, Monad, Centered or Pivotal 
Object in an "Abstract Schema or plan ; and as 
substitute for kh, CEASIS ; a mashing or break- 
ing together as of broken lines. Q aud j are 
compound sounds admitted into the Alphabet 
on the same footing as Cyanogen in Chemistry 
(98.) 

ft- - 
Of the Motoid (or Compound) Abstractoid Solid*. 

Sh, Compound or Pluraloid FEOMNESS ; Dispersion, 
Diffusion, Divergency ; Abstractoid Compound 
Apartness, Ramification, or Branchiness ; Ab- 
stract or Pure Compound DUISM. 

S, Compound or Pluraloid ATNESS ; Collection, Concen- 
tration, Convergency, Abstractoid Compound 
Togetherness, dumpiness, or Unition ; Ab- 
stract or Pure Compound UNISM. 

P, Compound or Pluraloid FROM-AND-ATNESS ; the 
Compound or Pluraloid higher Integration of 
Fromness and Atness, of Dispersion and Col- 
lection, etc. ; Winnowing, Working, Finishing ; 
Omni- variant Activity ; Abstract or Pure Coni- 
tmd Ti;i?,isj. 



THE STATO-CONCRETOIDS. 73 

b. 

Of the Concretoid Solids. 

a. 
Of the Statoid of (Simple) Concretoid Solids, 

G, (hard as in </ive) TRUNK ; Process, Existence or 
Forth-putting (cf. for, sense, Fr. pousser, TO 
GEOW UP) ; Tail or Trail and Trunk all that 
is contrasted with the Head ; Stalk, Staff, 
Stem, any Pro-cess, Procedure or Proceeding ; 
Shaft-like or Concrete Continuation ; as the 
" wake ' : of a vessel ; Bottom, Seat, Ground ; 
the EARTH as Fundamentum beneath and up- 
holding the Sky or Heaven ; FORCE ; Primal 
or Producing Force, Upheaval ; a posteriori 
ORIGIN or source. 

D, HEAD ; Bulb or Knob, End, Top ; Concrete Object 
or Thing ; Superincumbent Weight, as of the 
Head on the Shoulders, of the Sky or Heaven 
on the Earth, etc. ; Zteac?-weight, Deadness, 

Inertia, KESISTANCE ; Reaction, Permanency, 
as of Eternal Principles ; a priori Origin. 

B, HEAD-AND-TRUNK ; the entire Body ; Body, Cada- 
ver, Cadaver-like Organismus (called Inor- 
ganic) ; ACTION or BLOW, including Impact or 
Primal -Force and Resistance. The Inorganic 
World or Cosmos as contrasted with the Or- 
ganic or Yital ; the Inorganismus or Mineral 
World ; Earth-and-Sky or Heaven (GAUB 
from g to b.) 

Dh, INTER-KNOB ; Head-centre, Hub ; The Turn-stile 

3 



74 THE MOTO-CONCRETOIDS. 

or standard with Arms Stabiliological ; (see 
Th ; B. O. Index.) 

J, ( = d, zh), Bunch, Clod; Centered or Pivotal Object 
in a Concrete Schema or Congeriated Ar- 
rangement; and, as Substitute for gh, Con- 
crete Crassis or Mash of Substance or Sub- 
stances ; Earthy and Atmospheric Conjunc- 
tion ; Earth in respect to its surface, soil, 
weather, and mixtures or composts generally ; 
The Earth as the abode or residence of Man. 

ft. 

Of the Motoid or (Simple) Concretoid Solids. 

Zh, TEEE or PLANT ; Yegetism ; Concretoid Branch- 
ing ; Dispersive Force, Disruption. 

Z, THE ANIMAL ; Animism Concretoid Gathering 
and Centering, a girding up to contain the 
life ; the Cub, or Beast, including Man. 

V, THE-PLANT-AND-ANIMAL transcended ; True Yitism ; 
Human Biology, " Mind." The Organic World 
as contrasted with the Inorganic ; the Organis- 
mus (ZHAUV from zh to v.) 

2. The Liquids Confluent. 

a. 

Statoid Extensional. 
M, BIGNESS Magnitude, Muchness, y >?.v/v, OUTNESS. 

N, LITTLENESS Minitude, Not-muchness, minn*, IN- 
NESS. (M Affirmative.*, N Negative.) 



THE LIQUIDS AND AMBIGU'S. 75 

Ng, MEAN POSITION Neutrality, Indifference, Equal- 
ity ; neither Much nor Little, Equation, neither 
Out nor In. 

b. 

Mbtoid Professional. 

L, SLOWNESS Littleness of Movement, Gentleness, 
Sweetness, Softness, Lull. 

R, RAPIDITY Muchness of Movement, Violence, 
Velocity, Roughness, Rudeness, Rigor. 

3. The Ambigu' s or Coalescents. 

H, ATOMIC DIFFERENCE, Etherial, Breath-like ; 
Spirit ; Infinite Attenuation, Human-spirit-like 
Being. 

Y, RADIATING CENTEALITY as of a Star ; Focus and 
its Radiations, Spiritual Pivotism or Centre of 
Luminosity or Intelligence and of Heat or 
Love ; Godhood, The Soul. Spiritual Vital 
Centre of any Object, as of the Universe or of 
the Individual. 

W, CAEDINATED SEQUENTIALLY as of an animal's 
tracks in a Pathway or Trail ; Reciprocal Side- 
wise Inter-communication, as of companions 
walking, (waddling, wagging, waggling, walk- 
ing) and in conversation ; Intercourse, Conver- 
sation, LANGUAGE. 

-n, (The Nasalization, or Nasal Twang), Incompre- 
hensibility, Mystery, The Ineffable ; Je ne sais 
quoi. 



CHAPTER V. 

JUSTIFICATION OF THE ASSIGNMENT (AS MADE IN THE 
LAST TWO PRECEDING CHAPTERS) OF THE INHERENT 
MEANINGS OF THE ELEMENTS OF LANGUAGE. 

110. The Vowels and Eaclt Class of Consonant-Sounds 
represent, as shown in what precedes, a Primitive 
Logical or Noinological Aspect, and hence, in this 
sense, a LAW, or First Necessary Condition, of Being ; 
which is then true, also, in greater speciality, of each 
Individual Sound. 

111. The Yowels represent Proto-plasmal Being, 
the (Jollective Undifferentiated Materials or Ingredients 
of Being, with, at most, preliminary or incipient as- 
pects, only, of Differentiation and Organization. This 
Domain is therefore collectively the Homogeneity of 
Being, and, in its Universal Aspect, it is Kant's Real- 
ity, or SOMETHING, or " The Unlimited " or "Infinite." 
The Interspaces of Silence in Speech represent Kant's 
Negation. They are the Analogue of Blank Space, 
7te.ro, or NOTHING. 

112. The Consonants are Breaks and Limits in 
Vocality, and represent, therefore, Kant's Limitation 
which is Heterogeneit ij . The Thin or Abstractoid 



NOVEL NAMES OF SOUND-CLASSES. 77 



Consonants represent strictly, " The Limiting," to 
per as, and the Thick or Concretoicl Consonants, " The 
Limited," (B. O. a. 20-25, t. 204, 467.) The Liquids 
represent Inter-blended or Generalized Limitation, the 
return from The Heterogeneous towards The Homo- 
geneous, by the mingling and expunging of the 
sharper Lines of Differentiation. The Anabigu's or 
Coalescents represent those still finer Essences of 
Being which are Spiritually Vital, and which border, 
transitionally, upon The Unlimited or Infinite (the 
Vowels), on the one hand, and upon Limitation or 
The Finite (the Consonants), on the other hand. 

113. The Alphabet is distributed, it will have been 
observed (Chapter III.), into Classes of Sounds 
bearing titles some of which are new, the propriety 
of which will appear, however, in some instances, . 
immediately, and, in other instances, upon further 
consideration. Solids is a term of this novel 
character. It has not heretofore been employed 
in classifying Sounds ; but the term Liquids is of 
long and well established usage, and it implies 
Solids, for the counterparting and hitherto unnamed 
class. Abstract and Concrete (more strictly Abstract oid 
and Concretoid) are new in this application for those 
two great Classes of Consonant-Sounds which have 
been heretofore very variously named as Thin and 
Thick, as Sharp and Dill, as Light and Heavy, as 
Tenues and Medice, as Surds and Sonants, as Whispered 
and Spoken, as Hard and Soft Cheeks. 1 The new 



Max Miiller. 



78 GROUNDS FOE ASSIGNING MEANINGS. 

terms Abstracts and Concretes or Abstracttids and Gon- 
cretoids will be found specially appropriate as directly 
indicating the Grand Fundamental Distinction in 
' Ontology between " The Abstract " and " The Con- 
crete' with which these Sounds are, by inherent 
analogy, in strict accord, and which they will be used 
throughout the Structure of the New Universal 
Scientific Language to represent. The remaining 
unusual terms, Statoid, and Motoid, Singuloid, and 
Pluraloid, Inorganicoid and Organicoid, Cardinoid and 
Ordinoid, involve so much of detail that it will not 
be appropriate to explain them here. They do, how- 
ever, in part, explain themselves. 

114. To exhibit in detail all the grounds upon 
which these Particular Meanings are assigned, as in- 
herent, to these several Sounds of the Alphabet, would 
require a Volume as large, perhaps, as the whole of 
this Synopsis. For want of space, the statement of 
these reasons must be very greatly condensed here. 
They are partly Analogical, partly Analytical, partly 
Synthetical, and partly Cumulative or fieflectiu . 

115. The Analogical proof is that which results 
from such considerations as were presented in a 
preceding chapter;' from the fact, in other words, 
that, Language being a Minor Universe, or an 
Epitome of the Universe, in its Gknerals, it should, 
also, conform in its own Distribution to the Distribu- 
tion of the Universe itself down to the minutest de- 
tails; and hence that the Elements of /Speech should, I?/ 
a strict A PRIORI reasoning, answer, item for item, to the 
Onioloqical Elements of the Universe at large. (Ch. III.) 



ANALOGICAL AND ANALYTICAL ROOTS. 79 

116. The Proofs are Analytical, when, having ascer- 
tained that a given Class of Sounds corresponds with 
a given Cosinical Realm or General Category of 
Thought and Being, as, for instance, the Thin Solid 
Consonant-Sounds with The Abstract, and the Thick 
Solids with The Concrete, we then analyze one of 
these Cosmical Realms into its Constituents, and, at 
the same time, analyze the corresponding Class of 
Sounds into its Components, and assign these In- 
dividual Component Sounds to the corresponding 
several parts of the Cosmical Realm in question. It 
is thus again that The Abstract itself being found to 
be sometimes Simple or Single (as a One Line, or 
One Point, etc.) and sometimes Compound or Pluri- 
form (as that which is composed of many points or 
many lines), we seek for a similar difference in Sub- 
Classes of the corresponding Class of Sounds, and 
find it as between the Statoids or Single " Hard 
Cheeks " or Explodents, the Jc, t,p, which are made by 
a single effort of the voice, on the one hand, and, on 
the other, the Motoids or " Frictionals" 1 (or Compound 
" Hard Cheeks ") sh, s } f, which involve a mixed vari- 
ety of the -vibrations of the voice. The Simple Ab- 
stract is reduced, by further Analysis, to Division, 
Differentiation or DUISM, on the one hand, to Unition, 
Integration or UNISM, on the other hand, and to the 
Hinge-wise-ness Half Separative and Half Unifcive 
the Cardinism (Lat. cardo, A HINGE) between Division 
and Unition, which is the related TRLNISM of these 



1 Prof. Elsberg. 



80 THE VESTIBULE OF LANGUAGE. 

two. These Three Fundamental Varieties of Tl-.e 
Simple or Unimorplnc Abstract, Division, Unition, and 
the Hinying of these Tivo v.pon each other, are then 
found to be answered to or represented by the Three 
Particular Sounds of this Class k, t, and p, respec- 
tively. The Pluriinorphic Abstract distributes into 
similar Particulars represented by sh, s, and f. The 
Concrete undergoes also Analogical Distributions 
throughout, terminating on the Sounds which repre- 
sent the Three Kingdoms, Mineral, Vegetable and 
Animal, respectively, (b, zh, z, 000.) 

117. The Proofs are Synthetical, when they are de- 
rived from a comparison of the Parts and Shapings 
of the Mouth in the production of the Sounds, and 
from the Effects on the Ear, or from the character of 
the Sounds themselves as made and heard ; and when 
by this method of examination (the production and 
the audition of the Sounds), indications are discov- 
ered of real alliances with corresponding ideas, or of 
a Natural Fitness in the Sounds to express or to ex- 
cite given ideas not merely nor mainly by an ex- 
ternal and obvious imitation, the bow-wow theory, but 
more truly, by an interior and occulfc symbolism or 
enactment of the corresponding ideas. This peculiar- 
ity of sounds is illustrated in the following instances : 
Let a skilled Phonetician, with some elocution- 
ary power, utter and prolong and exaggerate a little 
the trill of the consonant-sound r, and no one will 
fail to detect in the rapid vibrations of the point of the 
tongue, and in their effect upon the ear, an exact re- 
semblance to the whirr and buzz of a circular saw or 



CUMULATIVE OK KEFLECTIYE PROOFS. 81 

other roughened wheel in rapid rotation. It is in ac- 
cordance with this quality in the r, that it is fixed scien- 
tifically as the Analogue of Rapidity, or of the plus- 
quantum of motion or velocity. On the contrary, let the 
same elocutionist render the real value of the sound /, 
and it will be found to be the opposite of the r in qual- 
ity or character, and to be the striking imitation of all 
gentle movements, or of the minus-quantum of motion 
or velocity. By similar methods and close observa- 
tions of the mechanical production of the sounds by 
the organs of speech, and of their suggestive effects 
upon the ear, it has been found practicable to deter- 
mine empirically and with proximate accuracy, in 
confirmation of the pure theory, the Primitive or Or- 
ganic Meaning of each Articulate Sound. It is the 
difficulty of this kind of proof, however, that it re- 
quires viva voce illustration, to be rendered obvious 
and demonstrative, and that it cannot, therefore, be 
made wholly available by mere description. In im- 
mediate connection with this subject stand the splen- 
did experiments and discoveries of Helmholtz on 
Sound and Yoice, which, exhaustively pursued, will 
conduct to a complete mechanical exposition of the 
reasons of the echoing character between oral and 
musical sounds, and, finally, of these last, and so of 
both, with corresponding mental and objective states. 
118. The proof is Cumulative or Reflective, when it 
arises from the weU-worJdng of the theory in practice ; 
by the constant accumulative mass, therefore, of con- 
firmations reflected or cast back upon the theory by 
the practical application of it in the infinitely ex- 



82 ETYMOLOGICAL CONFIRMATIONS. 

tended and varied system of word-building winch is 
characteristic of Alwato. This test will in every 
particular delight the thorough student of the sub- 
ject, and the guidance supplied by this new percep- 
tion of the identity of Sound and Sense will come to 
be regarded by him as the most perfect and exhaust- 
ively comprehensive of scientific discoveries, instru- 
ments, and methods. 

119. As part of this latter species of proof, there 
is also an immense current of etymological confirma- 
tions, of the instinctual or spontaneous order, recur- 
ring throughout the Hindo-European family of lan- 
guages, and which it would carry us too far to 
attempt to illustrate extensively here. Plato, in his 
Phsedo, furnishes some examples from the Greek. 
The following instances from the English of the 
forceful and vigorous nature of the sound r, and of 
the gentle sweetness of the I must suffice at this 
point. It is, however, a discovery of no little im- 
portance, in this connection, that by the Principle of 
Universology called TERMINAL CONVERSION INTO OP- 
POSITES (B. O. t. 83), there is a strong tendency in 
words to go over into the directly opposite meauhnj from 
that which is primitively inherent in, or native to, 
them. This occurrence is indicated, in the following 
Lists, by the Heading : 8ubdominance of the Opposite 
These lists contain a nearly exhaustive 



showing of the root-words of the English language 
which In'fjin with the letter-sounds T and /, together 
with some few others (where these sounds occur in 
tlio middle or at the end of the root.) 



DOMINANT MEANINGS OF R. 83 

1. 

The Letter-Sound R. 
a. 

DOMINANT MEANING : Discontinuity, or Solution of 
the Continuity, by the application of Force, which, re- 
peated or continued, is RAPIDITY of Movement ; whence, 
as Special Classes of Meaning 1. BREAK, 2. ROUGHNESS 
(brokenness of Surface), 3. TURN or Curvature (the 
continued repetition of breaks), 4. BEAT (the Simple 
Active application of Force), and 5. to GRAB or seize 
(the application of Force eitJier to accelerate or to arrest 
Motion.) 

1. BrEAK, (b)reak (to break out with Moisture), 
rack, racking (pain), rock (a broken fragment), ruck, 
rift, raft, rupture, riff-raff (broken stuff), rut, route (the 
breaking up of the enemy's position) ; raze, razure 
(destruction) ; rash (out-breaking, violent), rush, 
rave, rage, row ; to rear, (to break ground or break 
up his gait as a horse) ; (w)rig, (wriggle) ; rag (a 
thing broken or torn), ridge (the break at the top) ; 
ravine (a break in the ground), to rive, ray (an angle, 
or break of light), rad-ius ; radix, root, (where the 
plant is broken off when it is pulled ; compare with 
branch, the thing broken off), romp (a " break 
down "), rump (the break of the body) ; rumple, 
rumble, roar (breaking noise), rummage, rampart, 
rampage, run (" to break and run "), rAeum (flux), 
ruin (Lat. ruo to rusn) ; race ; current, course ; raid, 
rail, rip ; ramus (a branch.) Even rest is the break 
off of Motion ; so, contrariwise, rise, raise, and rouse 
are breaks from the quiet state. 



84 SUBDOMINANT MEANINGS OF R. 

2. ^?OUGH (and strong) a broken surface ruck-ed 
ruff, ruffle, i ipple, raffle (to rudely jostle together) ; 
rug, rugged, rude, (e)rude, raw, raucity (hoarseness, 
roughness of the throat), ?'ugose, rugate, wrinkled, 
rasp, rodent (gnawing), rat (a gnawer and noise- 
maker), rust (cor- rod-ing), rattle ; rank, rancor, rub. 

3. TurN (continuous breaking of the direction or 
course), round, run die, ring, rinse (to swash the 
water around), roil, roll, rollick, wrap. 

4. BEAT, rap, rarn, rain, (patter, compare, for sense, 
to pat and to leat.) 

5. GrAB (to seize), rob, rape, ravish (soize with 
violence), rapacity, ravage ; creep, ramp, ?-apid 
(clawing along) ; rake, reap (to gather in) ; wrapped, 
rapt (snatched away, as in a trance) ; rhapsody, rap- 
ture, rope (a binder or holder) ; rich (having gather- 
ed in) ; compare for sense, the relation of the Saxon 
ric, meaning -dom or domain, Lat. reg-o TO REIGN, 
with rich, and at the same time Ger. graf, a noble 
of a particular order with Ger. greifen (to seize) and 
Eng. grab. The rich man is, in primitive sense, the 
grand grab, seizer, or conqueror. 

b. 

Subdominance of the Opposite Meanings of R. 

1. STrETCH, (not break owing to the tenacity of tic 
material to which the force is applied) strain, straight, 
Lat. rect-us (STRAIGHT), rectitude ; rigor (what is 
drawn tight), ?*egular, rule, reach, ?-ight, rate (of 
movement from strain or effort) ; ratio, reason, read, 
reel (drawing out, continuing). 



DOMINANT MEANINGS OF L. 85 

2. RUB, (to make smooth, not-rough ; to un- 
roughen ; as to skin means to remove the shin, not to 
put it on, as it should mean by analogy with to dress.) 

2. 
The Letter-Sound L. 

a. 

DOMINANT MEANINGS : Continuity, from lack of any 
sufficiency of Force to produce Rupture or Breakage, 
whence Lentitude or Stoivness (the Antithet of Rapidity ; 
see R.) The Special Classes of Meaning are, 1. NOT- 
BROKEN-NESS, 2. NOT-ROUGH-NESS (Unbrokenness of 
Surface), 3. NOT-ROUND-NESS } 4. NOT-GRABBED (or seized) 
i. e. not-forcefully held ; not subject to much static force. 

1. NOT-BROKEN-NESS, lasting (continuous), /eisure 
(time not broken in upon), ?ist (a continued string- 
like exhibit), level, ?awn unbroken surface, (level 
means not canted or inclined, not diverted, bent or 
broken from a primary simple position) ; foathe (to put 
far away), ?oth (keeping far off), /oaf, a ?oaf, a division ; 
lobby (a waiting dalliance or delay-ance room), ?ate 
(post-poned), to ?eave (put off), ?iberty (freed condi- 
tion, enlarged, extended), Zife (continuity of being), 
?ava, ?ane ; Zurch, /ength, ?ate. 

2. NOT-ROUGH-NESS, (not-brokenness of surface 
whence smoothness, g?abrousness), fabricatal, lubri- 
city, /umbricus (a slippery worm), ?ampry, ?iver ; s?id- 
ing, g 7 iding, s/ippery ; s?ow (smoothness or gent?eness 
of motion), luxation (a loosing), luxury (smooth 
soft-f/attering condition) ; Zusciousness (softness and 
sweetness to the taste) ; /iniment, faring, (a soft- 



86 DOMINANT MEANINGS OF L. 

inner surface), Lafc. Zingua (the tongue), whence Zan- 
guage, from its glabrous or sZippery character ; lick, 
Zap, lecher ; ?ee (calm shelter) ; like (smooth or even 
with), Zeef (kind, fond), love (gently affecting), as Zief ; 
leer (to look flatteringly), Zeman (a sweet-heart.) 

3. NOT-EOUND-NESS (not continuously diverted or 
broken), whence Zong (the opposite idea to roundness), 
to Zong for (to be drawn out in a direct Zine towards an 
object, by one's desires) ; Zank, /ink, Zean, line, Zane, 
loon, Zeap, Zanguish, Zanguid, leisure (time prolonged), 
Zymph, Zath, Zathe (thinness and extension), Zatus 
(Lat. for broad or extended) and Zatus a side (the 
f/ank or thin part) ; Zead, Zode, Zoin (the thin extended 
part.) 

4. NOT-GKABBED (or held), Zax (let go Zoose), Zaugh 
(to relax the features) ; Zoose, Zose, Zoss, to Zeave, a 
Zeaf (something folded out), Zet (permit to go), Zeft, 
Zoud, Zease, Zot, Zicense ; Ziquid, Ziquor (what is Zet to 
flow) ; Zout, Zubber, sZuggard, Zummox, ?ob?olly-boy, 
Zuck (what happens without constraint) ; Zazy ; Zack, 
Zace (having Zacunaa or Zacking places), *s?ack, sZow, 
Zower, Zag, Zay, Zie, Zodge, Zatent, Zurk, Zure, Zair, Zinger ; 
Fr. Zit (a bed), Zitter, Zand (the flat surface) ; Zow 
(sagged down from Zaxity), Zisten (cf. to Zie Zow) ; Zake 
(a low place, a " sink-hole "), Zagoon (stagnant water), 
Zedge, the Zap (a fold) ; Zance, Zaunch, Ziinge (Zet drive), 
Zunch (a free irregular meal) ; Ziberty, (freedom, per- 
mission, Zet go), /iber (the bark, what sttps off ; a book 
tho Zeaves of which fall asunder or are free) ; Zinib, 
Zobe ; Zung, Zobstcr, Zug, Zuggage, Zoad, Zip (what hangs 
or dangles, what is Zoosely attached) ; Zunip ; Zapse, 



SUBDOMINANT MEANINGS OF L. 87 

Lat. /abor (to slide and go down) whence /abor as that 
which fatigues, relaxes, overcomes ; ?atch (what is lei, 
to fall), /atches (faults, things which fail or fall away 
from the obligation) ; louse, Wizard (a glider.) 

b. 
Sitbdominance of the Opposite Meanings of L. 

1. To BEAT or strike ; 2. To GRAB, fasten or hold. 

1. To BEAT or strike ; to Zick, to /amn (let fly at and 
hit), a ?amb, a young animal arrived at the killing or 
knocking-down age) ; Zamina (anything beaten flat), 
Ger. Watt, a feaf, a f'at thing (Eng. bZade) ; Lat. fax 
and famen, Eng. light (Lat. faceo, to shine to 
stream or beam out and strike or fall upon), lucid, 
luminous, ?ook ; Hit (up-heave), Ger. ?uft (the air, 
what is above) ; foft, ?evity, tightness. 

2. To GKAB (or fasten), a ?igue (a binding, Lat. ligo, 
TO BIND, the use of a line ; Fr. ?ier, TO TIE) ; a lock 
(as of the hair ; what is first left free to flow, whence 
it curies in upon itself or fastens together, Lat. pfico, 
to fold), ?ock (a fastener) this opposite idea result- 
ing from that of first leaving free.) 

120. In respect to the scientific probability that 
Sounds should comport their own meaning, there are 
two schools of opinion among philologists, on the 
subject. Socrates, Plato, Heyse and Max Muller re- 
present a class of scholars who have persisted in be- 
lieving in this inherent natural alliance between 
sound and sense, in advance of any great positive 
ability, on their part, to establish the theory. There 



88 DE. LAEDNEE ; PROF. WHITNEY. 

is, however, in tliis, as in all things, an adverse class 
of able but innately conservative thinkers who have 
always great capacity for pronouncing dogmatically 
as to what cannot be true or can never be accomplished ; 
and sometimes it occurs that their croaking proph- 
ecies of impossibility are refuted almost before 
they are uttered, by the actual accomplishment. An 
illustration occurs in what is popularly attributed to 
Dr. Lardner in respect to the impossibility of navi- 
gating the ocean by steam. Of the same character 
will be found to be such utterances upon the subject 
now under consideration as the following ex cathedra 
announcement by the learned Professor Whitney, of 
Yale : " That some degree of such subjective correspond- 
ence, felt more distinctly in certain cases, less so in 
others, may have sometimes suggested to a root 
proposer, by a subtle and hardly definable analogy, one 
particular complex of Sounds rather than another, as. 
the representative of an idea for which he was seek- 
ing expression, need not be absolutely denied. Only, in 
admitting it, and seeking for traces of its influence, 
we must beware of approximating in any degree to 
that U'ildest and most absurd of the many vagaries re- 
specting language, the doctrine of the natural and in- 
herent significance of articulate sounds." 1 

1 " Language and the Study of Language," by Win. Dwight 
Whitney, Professor of Sanscrit and Instructor in Modern Lan- 
guages, in Yale College, p. 430. This last expression, " the inher- 
ent significance of articulate sounds," seems probably to have 
been quoted from previous publications of my own. The italics, 
in the above extract, have been supplied by myself, to exhibit both 
the admissions and the assumptions of this dictum. S. P. A. 



THE COUNTER-VERDICT. 89 

Despite of this verdict of conservative science, 
the truth of the subject will rapidly vindicate itself 
with the progress of the development of the new 
language. In the following chapter a few prelim- 
inary specimens of word-building by the new prin- 
ciple will be exhibited. It is only with the expansion 
of the subject, however, far beyond what the limited 
nature of this little work will permit, that the over- 
whelming force of the demonstration will fully ap- 
pear. It is a mere basis which we can, at the most, 
hope, herein, to establish. 



CHAPTER VI. 

DISCRIMINATION OF THE POSITIVE AND THE NEGATIVE ; 
THE CHAOTIC AND THE OEDEELY ; THE HOMOGENEOUS 
AND THE HETEEOGENEOUS, WITH OTHEE FUNDAMENTAL 
ONTOLOGICAL DIFFEEENCES ; AND OF THE COEEESPOND- 
ING LINGUAL AND ALPHABETICAL CLASSIFICATIONS. 

121. Although Nature Science and Art have been 
presented and hitherto insisted upon as the leading 
distribution, practically, of the whole Universe of Af- 
fairs, still there are other distributions which are in 
a sense more primitive, and to which we must now 
give a portion of our attention. Metaphysically, the 
Fundamental distribution of the Universe of Concep- 
tion is into, 1. SOMETHING or REALITY, 2. NOTHING or 
Non-Reality, or Negation, and 3. LIMITATION, which 
last is properly Articulation, or the Hinging Line, or 
the Joint, between the Something and the Nothing. 
Kant's Three Categories of Quality or of the Quali- 
tative Constituency of Being are, accordingly, 1. 
Rwlity, 2. Negation, and 3. Lint if of ion. 

122. In the corresponding Qualitative Constituency 
of that Special Universe called Language (which we 
are now treating as the epitome of the Great Uni- 



CONSTITUENCY OF UNIVERSE AND SPEECH. 91 

verse), 1. THE SOMETHING or Reality is SOUND or the 
Intoned Breath, 2. THE NOTHING or Negation is 
SILENCE, or the Intervening Spaces, or Silences, be- 
tween Discourses, Sentences, Words, Syllables, and 
Sounds, and 3. LIMITATION is ARTICULATION, or the 
breaking up of the homogeneous or continuous 
sounding breath into special or differentiated partic- 
ular Sounds, while, still, these Sounds are held to- 
gether in Discourse ; and, so, being, at the same time, 
both separated and united, and, hence, cardinated or 
bearing a hinge-wise relationship to each other, they 
are denominated Articulate, or Articulated Sounds ; 
the word, "Articulated 3 being derived from the 
Latin articulus, A LITTLE JOINT or HINGE. 

123. In a similar or correspondential manner, in the 
Outer Material Universe, the diffused Ether which in- 
fills Space echoes to and represents the mere Abstract 
or Metaphysical Something or Reality of Being ; the 
Blank' Space itself holds the same relation to the 
Metaphysical Nothing ; and the Mathematical Posit- 
ings and Divisions of Space, and the Bodies organ- 
ized from the Ether in the Space in subordination to 
the mathematical points, lines and surfaces limiting 
or articulating them, as the planets or other objects 
in nature, correspond collectively to the Metaphysical 
Category of Limitation ; (" The Limiting" and " The 
Limited," B.O. a. 20, t. 204); so that there is CORRES- 
PONDENCE or ECHO between the constitution of Language 
and that of the Material Universe and that, again, of the 
Abstract Metaphysical Domain of Pure Thought, re- 
spectively. 



92 "REALITY" AND "LIMITATION' IN SPEECH. 

Accordingly, the Silences of Speech are repre- 
sented on the printed page of any book by " Blanl;*" 
or by what the printers call " Spaces " the identical 
two terms ( J ilank and space) which are applied to the 
Nothing, or Negative Aspect, of the Material Uni- 
verse Blank Space, itself. 

124. Dismissing this back-lying and lowest dis- 
crimination ; dismissing, in better terms, the Nothing- 
Element of Speech, the Silence or Silences, which last 
correspond to the Interstices of Space in the Consti- 
tution of Matter ; and turning our attention to what 
remains, or rather to what results from the Some- 
thing-Element in conjunction with its Negative Base ; 
to the Utterance, in other words, or Phonos of Lan- 
guage ; this, then, undergoes a primary division which 
echoes, in a higher or concrete sense, to the remaining 
one of these metaphysical differences, that between 1. 
Reality, and 2. Limitation. The " Reality " of Lan- 
guage, or, what is the same thing, the Substance-like 
Element of Speech is, then, Vocality, or, in other words, 
the Complex or Aggregate of the Vowel-Sounds ; and 
the "Limitation" or Articulation of Speech, the 
Morphic or Form-like Element, is the complex 
or aggregate of the Consonant-Sounds whence it 
happens that the Consonants are habitually denomi- 
nated Articulations, in a more special sense than that 
in which the term, Articulate, is applied, generically, 
to Speech or Language at large. 

125. But, intermediate to the prior distribution of 
Speech into Sound and Silence-, and the subsequent 
distribution into Vocality and Articulation, there is 



."THE INFINITE" AND "THE ABSOLUTE." 93 

another (less important) division or distribution to 
be noticed. - This concerns the difference between 
the so-called Inarticulate Sounds made by animals, 
and in part also by the human voice, as in sneezing, 
coughing, and the like, and True Articulate Speech. 
By Inarticulate is here meant, however, Indeterminate 
Articulation, or articulation of a lower grade, in the 
same manner as by the term Inorganic we do not 
mean that which has no kind or degree of organiza- 
tion, but that which is relatively without organization. 
Inarticulate sounds may be taken to correspond with 
meteors, meteoric dust, and the like, which have the 
same amorphous and anomalous relation to the regu- 
larly constituted planetary bodies and other stih 1 
more highly organized objects which these inarticu- 
late sounds hold to language as articulate speech. 
This Indeterminate Kegion is the Analogue of the 
" Primitive Chaos," of the poetical conception. 

126. Assuming, now, the diphthong au (ah-oo), as 
representative of the vowels at large, the whole 
Vowel-Scale (92), which it is, with sufficient ac- 
curacy for ordinary uses, the termination -io (ee-o) 
to mean Realm or Domain and -ia (ee-ah) to denote a 
Principle, we have the Alwato word au,io (ah-oo-ee-o) 
to denote the realm or domain of Unlimited or Infinite 
KEALITY Unlimited or Infinite, because there is no such 
element of sound appearing therein as denotes Limi- 
tation, which it is the special function of the Conso- 
nants to do. Au,io means, therefore, The Infinite 
Reality, or Simply " THE INFINITE." It is, still, how- 
ever, The Infinite, (Illimited or Unlimited) in a Sen- 



94 "THE INFINITE'' AND "THE FINITE. 



or Comprehensible sense, such as is Relative, or 
Related to our Comprehension or Capacity of Under- 
standing. Hence it is The Ordinary or Non-tran- 
scendental Infinite. If we, then, add the Nasalization, 
(97, 153, 156) as the sign of Incomprehensibility, we have 
au n io, meaning The Absolutely Infinite or Transcen- 
dental Beality, rationally inferred, but incomprehen- 
sible, or, in simple terms, " THE ABSOLUTE." In this 
latter coupling, the meanings are as follows : 

1. Au,io, " The Infinite " (The Unlimited ; The Homogeneous.) 

2. Au n io, "The Absolute" (The Incomprehensible, "The Un- 

knowable.") 

The termination -ski (skee) means science or lore 
(German -lehre, 24.) Auski means, therefore, Phil- 
osophy in the general or ordinary sense (Empiri- 
cal), and au n ski means, specifically, Transcendental 
(or Cardinary) Philosophy, (purely Rational.) 

127. We may, in the next place, assume the Con- 
sonants ng, k, v, 1, as the appropriate representative 
group of those Sounds (including one of each Con- 
sonant Class) to denote the Consonants at large, or 
all the Consonants, as au was chosen to denote the 
Vowels (126.) Aided in utterance by the au, (the Con- 
sonants so require the Yowels), and (if preferred) by a 
prosthetic e, we have ngkauvlio or engkauvlio (eng- 
kah-oo-vlee-o) to mean " THE FINITE," or The Lim- 
itary (the function of the Consonants being Limita- 
tion). Coupled in this sense we have : 

1. Au,io, '' The Infinite " (Relative, Common, or Ordinari/.} 

2. Engkauvlio, "The Finite" (Eiigkiiuvlski, Echosophy, B. 0. t. 

13 and c. J3 do.) 



THE UNCONDITIONED AND THE CONDITIONED. 95 

128. Sir William Hamilton has, with great subtle- 
ty, perceived The Infinite and The Absolute to be 
the two species of a genus, which he calls The Un- 
conditioned. This last, The Unconditioned, should 
embrace, therefore, in its representation, both the 
pure or unnasalized Yowels and the Nasal Yowels. 
Hence its appropriate naming is au,i,au n ,io (ah-oo-ee- 
ah-oo n -ee-o.) To this the proper and full antithet 
is engkau,i,au n vlio (f.ngkah-oo-ee-ah-oo n -vlee-o) 
meaning The Conditioned, including enkauvlio, The 
Ordinary, and engkau n vlio, The Transcendental 
Finite. Some of these terms may seem somewhat 
awkward to the neophyte ; but the ideas themselves 
are of the most subtle and embarrassing, and natural 
language then exactly echoes this embarrassment. As 
we descend to more feasible domains the words will 
become correspondingly feasible. (The i at the mid- 
dle of these compound terms means and.) It will 
appear, elsewhere, that Shau,io (shah-oo-ee-o), 
is the more usual naming for The Conditioned, 
Aushio (ah-oosh-ee-o) for the Unconditioned ; Sau,io 
(sah-oo-ee-o) for The Finite (The Collected and In- 
cluded), and Ausio (ah-oos-ee-o) for The Infinite, 
(The Excluded Unlimited.) ( .) 

129. Intermediate between these two, The Unlim- 
ited " Reality " (The Yowels), and The " Limitation," 
(Consonants), there is a still more subtle Spiritual 
Region, the RATIONAL-BEING-DOMAIN, (the God-Spirits- 
Humanity-domain), The Theandric Domain, or Thean- 
drismus ; which is represented by the Ambigu's or 
Coalescents (Half Yowels, half Consonants ; h, y, 



9G -10 AND -SKI COMPARED. 

w, n .) This is named Hwau n io (lioo-ah-oo n -ee-o). 
Swedenborg may be mentioned as a representative 
name in connection with this subtlest of all possible 
domains of human investigation. 

130. We return now, from this embarrassing pre- 
amble of all philosophical distribution, to the more 
feasible and pleasing arena. Assuming au,io for 
the Common Infinite, or merely Unlimited, the Simple 
Undefined Domain (which is to be primarily subject- 
ed to distribution), it subdivides into the following 
Eleven (or with the Collective au, Twelve) depart- 
ments, (guarding the termination -ski for Science.) 

TABLE No. 4. 

a. Elementary. 

I,io, (ee-ee-o), The Ens- or Being-Do- Iski, (ee-skee), Ontology (not-trans- 

main. cendental.) 

E,io, (a-ee-o), The Relation-Domain. Eski (a-ski, Nomology "Logic" 

Eski, Hegel.) (000.) 

b. Elaborate. 

04, io, (a(ir)-ee-o), Etheriality-domain. ^Iski, (a(ir)-skee), Etherialogy ; the 

Science of the Second Form of Mat- 
ter, (B. O. t. 63). 

A,io, (ah-ee-o), Matgriality-domain. Aski, (ah-skee) MATERIAXOQY ; the 

Science of the First Form of Matler, 
(B. O. t. 03) ; Indeterminate or Phi- 
losophoicl NATUROLOGY. 

7",io, (uh-ee-o), Time-domain. "Con- fski, (uh-skee), TEMPOROLOGT.) 
tinuity" Container of Co-Sequen- 
ces. 

O,io (aw-cc-o), Space-domain. Soli- Cteki, (;iw-skee), SPA-CE-OLOGY.) 
clarity Container of Co-exi^ten- 



O,io, (o, ee-o), Form-, or Idea-Domain. Oski,(o-skc('),l!i<li>fluite MORPHOLOGY, 
, Vision, Ken.) Ideoloyy ; Iiidt'tcnninate or Phiios- 

SCIEN'IV )L( )( ; V Sri I:NTI> 
t. Pluto, O\vcu.; 



RE-STATEMENT. 



97 



U, io, (oo-ee-o), Movernent-tlomairi. 
(Practice, Experience, Feeling.) 



Uski, (oo-skee), MOTOLOGY, Pracfical- 
ogy, Indeterminate or Philosophoid 
ARTOLOGY ; (PRACTICAL PHILOS- 
OPHY.) 



Iu,io, (ee-oo-ee-o), Harmony-, or Con- 
j un ction-domatn. 

6>i,io,(aw-ee-ee-o), Super-incumbency- 
domain. 

Ai,io, (ah-ee-ee-o), Sub-recumbency- 
domain. 



luski, (ec-oo-skee), Harmoniology. 
Oiski, (aw-ee-skee), SUPEKNOLOSY. 

Aiski, INFEKNOLOGY, Ihrndamentalr 
ogy. 



131. We may, now, restate, in abstract, the lead- 
ing portions of the preceding distribution, as follows. 
(Bead from below upward in this more formal Tabu- 
lation.) (B. O. c. 3-6, t. 15.) 



TABLE No. 5. 



ELABOEISMUS. 

3. Uski, (oo-ski), AKTO-PHILOSOPHY, (B. O. In- 
dex), 

(AETISMAL.) 



Aouski, (ah-o-oo-ski), Ela- 
borology, of the Indeter- 
minate or Philosophic 
Domain.) 



Ieeld,(ee-a-i?kee). ELEMEN- 
TOLOGY; The Recondite 



2. Oski, (o-skes), SCIENTO-PHILOSOPHY, (B. O. 
Index), 

(SCIENTISMAL.) 

1. Aski, (ah-skee), NATURO-METAPHYSICS, "PHIL- 
OSOPHY " in the Most Ordinary and General 
Sense. 

(NATUEISMAL.) 

ELEMENTTSMUS. 



/ 
' (< 



8 ' IskL ( ee - skee )> ONTOLOGY; (The Things.) 



132. This same Domain is again re-stated, in a 
modified but more practical way, in the following 
Table. (Read still from below upward.) 



98 PHILOSOPHY, SCIENCE, RELIGION. 

TABLE No. 6. 

3. Iu,ia, (ee-oo-ee-ali), RELIGION. 

(Ecstatic, Vital, Cuhninative, Harmonic.) 
(Cf. Gr. en WELL, and Gr. ending -ia, The Essence of all Good.) 

2. Oski, (o-skee), SCIENCE, in the High Idealistic 

Sense. SCIENTO-PHILOSOPHY. (B. O. Index.) 

(Pure Theoretical, Guiding, Governing.) 

1. Auski, (ah-oo-skee), PHILOSOPHY. 

(Metaphysical, and Practical, as Basis.) 

Two Grand Leading SUB-SCIENCES. 

2. I,iaski, (ee-ee-ah-skee), COMPAEOLOGY, (Science 
of the Identity of Principle as occurring in different 
Spheres or Domains.) 

1. I,ioski, (ee-ee-o-skee), MONOSPHEROLOGY (Sci- 
ences of the Single Sphere or of Single Spheres.) 

(These two also culminate in luski the Science 
of Religion as Harmonic Reconciliation.) 

133. Among the sets of correlative terms employed 
in General Science, two of the most important, while 
yet of the most vaguely comprehended, are the terms 
Homogeneous and Heterogeneous. The first of these is 
derived from two Greek words, liomolos, SAME or 
SIMILAE, and genos, KIND or SORT, and the second from 
heteros, OTHER, and genos. Etyinologically, there- 
fore, Homogeneous means or THE SAME KIND, and 
Heterogeneous, OF DIFFERENT KIND or KINDS ; but the 
etymological meaning of scientific terms frequently 
gives a very inadequate idea of their actual meaning 
as they are practically applied. 



HOMOGENISM AND HETEROGESISM. 99 



134. Nothing whatsoever is, throughout, of one and 
the same kind to that absolute degree that no dif- 
ferences can be discovered in its various parts ; and 
nothing is, on the other hand, so composed of dif- 
ferences that no common ground of sameness or simi- 
larity can be found to exist between the parts. But, 
relatively, or in Preponderance, some objects are 
Uniform, that is to say they are nearly uniform in 
their composition and in all their parts, as Water or 
the Air, for instance ; and other objects are highly 
complex, as, for instance, the Human Body, or an 
Edifice, the Mind of Man, Human Society (with all 
its manifold interests) and the like. It is this dif- 
ference between objects as Simple or Uniform, and 
as Complex or Multiform, especially in respect to 
the Substances of which they are composed, which is 
intended, in Science, by the terms Homogeneous and 
Heterogeneous. The terms U/idi/ferentiated and Dif- 
ferentiated have similar meanings, but may perhaps 

tend to apply rather to Forms than to Substances. 

135. Even the same word may be differently used 
to mean at one time, the Homogeneous Aspect of an 
object, and at another time, the Heterogeneous As- 
pect. For instance, if we speak of Earth as a sub- 
stance, as when we say Earth, Air, fire and Water, 
we assign to it a Homogeneous character, leaving it 
unlimited (or nearly so), even in our thoughts, in re- 
spect to shape or form, or the lines of difference, be- 
tween its Component Parts ; but if we speak of Earth 
or the Earth, meaning the planet which has that name, 
we have before the mind a heterogenized or highly dif- 



100 THE HOMOGENEOUS AND THE GDKEIIAL. 



ferentiated object, with definite shape or external limits, 
and with distinctive differences of the parts. So,- in 
another sphere, if we speak of Mind in general, we 
mean mind as a uniform and unlimited ideal Substance, 
and, therefore, as Homogeneous ; but if we speak of 
The Human Mind, or of the mind of a particular indi- 
vidual, we mean, as it were, a determinate and highly 
differentiated object, a Complicated Organismus, and 
as such, something Heterogeneous in kind. 

136. The diffused Universal ether which, theoreti- 
cally at least, fills all space, may be taken as the 
Type of what is signified by THE HOMOGENEOUS 
technically THE HOMOGENISMUS ; as the typical re- 
presentative, in other words, of all objects or parts 
of Nature which are homogeneous in character. A 
planet, with its freightage of "minerals, vegetables 
and animals, our world, the earth, for example, the 
limited Cosmos, enucleated from its matrix of dif- 
fused and attenuated matter is, on the other hand, 
the Type of what is meant by THE HETEROGENEOUS 

-technically THE HETEROGENISMUS ; as the typical 
representation, in other words, of all objects or parts 
of Nature which are heterogenized in character. 

137. The Homogenisnius of the General Cosmos in- 
cludes TheProto-pragmata, Bdmj, Matter, Tune, S} 'ace, 
etc., and easily lapses into the idea of general diffusive- 
ness and Liquidity, winch belong, however, really to the 
Generabismus, defined in the next subsequent paragraph 
(138.) These Liquidities are, primarily, the Great 
Ocean of Ether, then, the Atmosphere as repeating it, 
then, Water and all Fluids, and finally, all Plasm; is. 



MLAU.IO AND MLAUSKI. J01 

Emulsions and the like ; and the Analogues of all these 
in other more special spheres, as in the human mind, 
for instance. The Heterogenismus subdivides, on the 
contrary, into the Inorganic "World (the Inorganismus) 
and the Organic World (the Organism us) ; or into The 
Mineral World, on the one hand, and The Vegetable 
and The Animal Kingdoms, on the other hand. (140.) 
138. The Universal Homogenisrnus Al,au,io is 
(par excellence) THE INFINITE ; and Time (*/,io), Space 
(o,io), etc., are Special Infinities ; but The Horno- 
geneoiis, with any less extensional affix than al-, lies 
nearer to The Conditioned or Limited. It is a tech- 
nicality of the Sciences, or of what is Positive, though 
diffused, and, hence, it is closely allied with the idea 
of Generality. This latter (Generality) is, however, 
wholly within the Limitary, and is named, there- 
fore, from the Consonants ; but from that class of 
them which is most confluent or least distinctifying. 
These are analogous with the Liquidities described 
in the preceding paragraph (137) and are specifically 
the " Liquids." These are adapted especially to the 
naming of all Being the type of which is Liquidity. 
The combination ml is then chosen (a leading sound 
taken from each Class of Liquids) to serve with au to 
supply the name for Generality. Mlau,io, is, therefore, 
The General Domain (technically the Generajisnms), 
and Mlauski, is Generalogy (The Indeterminate As- 
pect of things, broadly extended and interblended, the 
lines of discrimination partially obliterated.) Auguste 
Comte functionates in this department of Positivity 
which he calls Natural Philosophy. 



t 

102 KAUVIO. 

189. The Counterparting term is kauvio, The Spe- 
cial, (technically The Specialismus ; or the Domain of 
Special and Exact Limitation, or Discriminations, or 
of Speciality. The Particular Sciences are called 
Specialities and their Professors Specialists.) Kauvski 
is Specialogy. It is within this that Spencer begins 
his distribution of the Sciences into 1. THE AB- 
STRACT, 2. THE CONCRETE, and 3. THE ABSTRACT-CON- 
CRETE Sciences. Shaupski is Abstractologij (Logic 
and Mathematics), s3ta!*ski is Concretology, and 
mblaufiski, Abstract-Concreiolor/y. This last term is 
nearly unpronounceable in itself, but it implies in its 
Composition these Special Sciences 1, Mlauski Chem- 
istry (in a Special Aspect named Jauski, Monadol- 
ogy), 2. Blauski Mechanics, and 3. Fauski Physics 
of which three it is sgmewhat arbitrarily composed. 1 

1 The awkwardness of the word in such instances is not the fault 
of the new language (Alwato), but one of its chief cxaUcnces, for it 
reveals by the incongruity of the Sounds so brought together the 
corresponding incongruity in the classification of the subjects them- 
selves. Yet, there may be reason and convenience (in some very 
general aspects of Classification) which would furnish names es- 
sentially uneuphonious. The words may still serve as a visible 
notation for things too heterogeueously allied to comport any 
better single naming ; or, the effort to pronounce such words may 
serve as a vocal gymnastic; or, finally, their very incongruity may 
serve as the most effective criticism on a classification which would 
demand such namings, as a lingual vote, so to speak, against it, 
and perhaps as a means of banishing it from popular acceptance. 
But if it be desirous to retain the particular class, other and more 
euphonious designations can always be devised by changing the 
principle of Comminution: thus Shauso-zlianbski is a literal Al- 
\vas.> translation for Abstract-Concretology. (S;v, also, other works.) 



BO,IO AND VO,IO. 103 

140. ZhaubsM distributes into the proper Sciences 
of the three kingdoms. Without tracing the details 
it may be said that b meaning body apart from the 
specific idea of life (109) bau,io (bah-oo-ee-o) is 
the Alwaso term for Inorganismus (the mineral and 
planetary world), and v, meaning living body, vau,io 
(vah-oo-ee-d) is the Alwaso term for Organismus (or 
Living World.) Treated of, however, in respect to 
their more presentative aspect, these terms modulate 
more properly in the simple and euphonious single 
vowel o. Thus bo,io is the Inorganic Cosmos, and 
vo,io the Organic World culminating in, and spe- 
cially signifying man, mind- vision mind. (Zhauv-io is 
more strictly The Organismus entire.) This last, vo,io, 
(or zhauvio) then subdivides into (or has, as subordi- 
nate) zJio t io The Vegetable Kingdom and zo 9 io, The Ani- 
mal Kingdom, the two Grand Branches of the Organic 
World, respectively. (The termination -so converts 
them into Adjectives, thus ; bo,io t so, RELATING TO THE 
INOKGANIC WORLD, and Vb,io,so RELATING TO THE OR- 
GANIC WORLD, zho,io,so RELATING TO THE VEGETABLE 
KINGDOM, and vo 9 io,so, RELATING TO THE HIGHER ANI- 
MAL KINGDOM, etc.) 

141. Objects which are homogeneous or of the 
same constitution throughout, are the materials or 
stiffs out of which heterogenized or differentiated ob- 
jects are composed ; whether as an outlying ocean of 
such substances not yet constructed into specific ob- 
jects ; or as the interstitial confluent materials which 
permeate and so infill the more specifically differen- 
tiated parts of objects ; or as, in fine, the plasmas, 



104 VOWEL AND CONSONANT CHARACTERS. 

emulsions, and fluidities contained in the vessels of 
the more highly organized beings ; the Horaoge- 
nismus and the Generalismus being readily con- 
fluent with each other, as Liquid Sounds readily 
decline into Yowels. Homogeneous things are, 
therefore, greatly identified with SUBSTANCE, or the 
" Reality ' of the Metaphysicians, the element of 
Form (or " Limitation ") figuring, in respect to them, 
only in a subordinate way. The appropriateness of 
the " Real " or Pure Vowel-Sounds, the soft, mushy, 
concessive element of language, for their representa- 
tion is, therefore, very obvious. (91, 111, 143.) 

142. Heterogeneous or heterogenized objects, and 
the heterogenized parts of objects have, on the con- 
trary, the element of FORM or Shape, or the " Limi- 
tation " of th.e Metaphysicians, predominant or ruling 
in them ; and Substance is subordinated. They are, 
therefore, appropriately represented by the Conso- 
nant-Sounds ; for, while the Yowels are homogeneous 
in character, the Consonants are heterogeneous, or 
heterogenizing or limitative of the Vowel or Substan- 
tive element. 

143. The actual cavities and interstices of struc- 
tures, as of a planet (caves, etc.) or of the human 
body, as relative vacuums, are the analogue of Noth- 
ing, or the " Negation ' of the Metaphysicians, con- 
jointly with the outlying and surrounding space (123). 
This Nothingness is closely allied with Generalization 
which carried to the ultimation exhausts all Particu- 
larity and ceases to be, except as the metaphysical 
echo (of the " Realist ") to the Heal World; and 



. EXTENSION AND CAEEEES. 105 

Generalization is, in turn, allied (141) with Liquid- 
ity. The Liquids are of two kinds, 1. Static and 
Nasal, m, n, ng, (Nose-Sounds, resonant), and 2. Mo tic 
and Oral or Flowing, I and r. The Nasal Liquidity 
(m, n, ng) Static and resonant, has for its Analogue 
in Nature, the Great Reservoirs of Fluidity, with 
their glassy or mirror-like surface or Reflexion (Mind- 
wise) in Calm, and The Resonance of Ocean-Caves 
in Activity, and so Expanse or EXTENSION ; and The 
Flowing Liquidity (I, r) is analogous with Cur- 
rents or Streams, and so with Orbital and other 
CAREERS. (It is the Bastard Vowels u and o, for Time 
and Space, which counterpart the Heal Yowels and 
correspond with "Negation.") 

144. Homogeneous objects or substances are 
named by Substantive Substantives non-pluralizable, 
or such as have no proper plurals, as air, mud, pitch, 
gold, metal, liquid, etc. If plural forms occur in re- 
spect to such nouns, they denote not so much dif- 
ferent individual objects as different kinds of the same 
object. Liquids means, for instance, different varieties 
of liquid, and not merely different masses of the same 
liquid. Heterogenized objects are, on the contrary, 
pluraliza'ble, or have true plurals, as horses, houses, men. 

145. The Incorporated Homogenismi of the Cosmos 
have been recently discriminated with some accuracy, 
by Hugh Doherty, in a work, called " Organic Phil- 
osophy," Volume First, " Epicosmology," and have 
been furnished with a seriated list of names ; Geo- 
sphere (earthy) Atmosphere (aerial), Thaflatosphere 
(watery), etc. 



CHAPTER VIL 

METHOD AND ILLUSTRATIONS OF ALWATONI WORD- 
BUILDING. 

146. The Ultimate Elements of Speecli (or, other- 
wise, the Primitive Elements, according to the order in 
which we consider the subject) are, practically, as 
results from all that has been shown, the Vowel and 
Consonant-Sounds, represented by the Alphabet of 
Signs or Letters. These correspond with the so- 
called Ultimate Elements of Organized Substance 
(Chemical.) But, the proper Working Elements of 
Language are different from these and correspond 
with the so-called Proximate Elements of an Organ- 
ized Object, the human body, for instance. These 
are the Two-letter (or Bi-Uteral) Root-words, which are 
produced by compounding one consonant with one vowel- 
sound, as BI, (bee), BE, (ba),BA, (bah), or, inversely, one 
voivel with one consonant-sound, as IB, EB, AB, etc. 

147. To make the primitive combinations of the Vow- 
el and Consonant-sounds into these Two-Letter-Root- 
words, seizing the appropriate meaning of the r<>t- 

ll r ord so formed as logically derived from the mean- 



AN EXPLANATION. 107 

ings of the prior elements (those of the separate Yowel 
and the separate Consonant-sound involved in each 
such combination), is a work of skill, tasking the 
keenest insight of the expert Phonetician-and-Univer- 
sologist, and demanding, perhaps, a specific faculty for 
the quick perception and the profound appreciation of 
analogies ; as, in the case of Chemistry, it must be 
the professional chemist who deals with ultimate (or 
primitive) analysis and synthesis. The meanings of 
the Two-Letter-Roots are best, then, for ordinary 
purposes, stated dogmatically and accepted on au- 
thority the way being always open for recurring to 
the deeper analysis by all those who take pleasure 
in doing so, or by those whose mental constitution 
or state demands the more absolute demonstration. 
148. To illustrate : the h-sound denotes breath-like- 
being, spirit, and o denotes presentation; b denotes head- 
and-trunk (or bulb-and-shaft), and o presentation ; and 
m denotes muchness and outness, and a (ah) denotes sub- 
stance. Now it may require the mental tact us erudi- 
tus, and a large and clear oversight of the whole 
field of analogy, to derive, with scientific confidence, 
the meaning man or humanity from the combination 
of h and o into ho ; or that of body from that of b 
and o into bo ; or that of mass (or matrix) from that 
of in and a into ma. It will be better, therefore, 
practically, for ordinary works of instruction in the 
new language not to go so far back towards the 
beginning-point of the verbal creation, but to assume 
as known, after the fact shall have been established 



108 AN ILLUSTRATION. 

by the more occult philosophy, that ho means man, 
that bo means body, ma mass, etc. 

149. But from this point onward and outward the 
process of Word-Building becomes simple and delight- 
ful. Taking our departure from the Two-Letter-Roots 
as a basis, of which there are nearly two thousand 
more than the number of actual root-words now 
extant in the whole Indo-European family of lan- 
guages (including those of five, six, and even seven 
sounds) the compounding of these, as syllables, 
into longer words, with corresponding compound 
meanings, is a process which will be instinctually and 
easily acquired by the common, and even by the 
wholly uneducated mind. This process corresponds 
with the Confection of Proximate Elements, as of the 
albumen of the egg, the starch of the flour, and the 
sugar, by the cook, in the domestic economy of the 
kitchen ; not necessarily demanding any previous 
chemical education. 

150. To illustrate : the meanings of ho,bo, and ma, 
being known, or accepted on authority for man or 
humanity, body, and mass, respectively, it requires no 
special genius or learning to combine them into 
hobo, for the human body, hoboma, for the mass or 
bulk of the human body ; homa for human mass, society, 
or folks, (as we say the masses, for the people), honiabo, 
for the body of society, etc. It is in this manner that 
(not a few thousands of words, all that we have now 
in any existing language) but milhons on millions of 
words will be spontaneously formed, so simple in 
their structure as to be self-defining, dispensing with 



TWO CONSTITUENCIES OF ALWATO. 

the necessity (so far as they are concerned) of any 
dictionary, and serving the most complex and varied 
necessities of the human mind. Another department 
of the new language ivill, however, be derived from the 
materials now extant in existing languages ; a more 
arbitrary department, for the definitions in lohich 
the services of the dictionary will still be required. 
Even the forms of the words and sentences, and, sub- 
stantially, the whole of the leading existing lan- 
guages, and hence, their literature intact, may be 
thus preserved and imbedded in the matrix of the 
New Scientific Universal language ; and the acquisi- 
tion of these Special tongues will be, at the same time, 
immensely facilitated by the knowledge of the phil- 
osophy which underlies and has produced them. 
Alwato will then stand, centrally, like a Rotunda in the 
midst of a huge Speech Temple the Entire Lingual 
Structure of the Planet with an internal, direct, and 
convenient passage-way conducting to the heart and 
centre of each of the Old-style or Instinctual Lan- 
guages or forms of speech ; so that while it may seem 
to replace them all, and ultimately to dispense with 
them, it will truly conserve them all ; and will more 
than compensate for the partial obsolescence it may 
bring, in the coming ages, upon the extant literature 
of a single tongue, the English, for instance, by the im- 
mense facility it will offer for the mastery of that which 
will then be the ancient literature of all tongues. 

151. The remainder of this chapter will be devoted 
to a very abridged exhibit or slight sample of the two 
methods of the Composition of the Vocal Elements 



110 i (EE) BEING. 

into Significant Words, in accordance with the prin- 
ciples of Alwato ; which may be called 

A TABULATED SYNOPSIS 

OF 

ALWATON1 OB ALWASO WOKD-BUILDING. 

I. 

Ultimate (or Primitive) Synthesis from the Alphabetic 
Sounds and their Meanings, up to the Two- Letter 

Hoots. 

1. 

Alphabetic Sounds and their Meanings, selected from 
TABLE No. 3, CHAPTER IV., (with some license and 
enlargement of Statement), as- Elements of Sound 
charged with Elementary Meanings. 

a. Sele-cted Vowels and Diphthongs. 

I (ee), BEING (Entity); Centre or Core (of Being); 
Continuance, PEOTENSION, Persistence or holding 
on (since anything in order to be must continue 
through Time) ; Stretch towards a centre or 
given point ; INTENSITY, Intention ; INTUITION or 
gazing on ; a stretching of the vision towards ; 
the Affection and Competency for immediate 
and essential or absolute knowledge. 1 

1 It will be a natural first impression with the student of Alwato 
that every word of the new language should have a single uniform 
and invariable meaning, so that all possibility of ambiguity should 
be at once and for ever excluded. But, such is by no means the 
case Indeed, in respect to Elementary or Root-Words, just the 



E (A) RELATION. Ill 

E (a), RELATION ; Siding ; that which is accessory or 
adjunct (applied or added to the centre) ; 
iving-like, ancillary, or coefficient ; The Affec- 
tion and Competency for relative and exact 
or scientific knowledge, and discursive rea- 
soning. 

A (ah), SUBSTANCE; thickness, richness, goodness; 
THE GOOD. 

7(uh), TIME ; Flow, Flux, On-going ; Stream or Cur- 
rent ; Vaguely PEOTENSIYE and Experiential. 

(aw), SPACE ; Expanse, Out-and-In-going ; EXTEN- 

SIONAL. 

O, PRESENTATION; View, Theory; Idea ; Aspect or 
Prospect ; THE TRUE, The Lucid, or Luminous. 



opposite phenomenon occurs. These words are charged with such 
an immense quantity of meaning, or, in other words, with such an 
aggregate of different but related meanings, that they can only be 
defined by accumulating a crowd of words from the Old-style or In- 
stinctual Languages. The specializing division of this aggregate 
meaning is then indicated by some new or additional element, and 
the more special meaning by still another additional element, and 
so on, until, in the end, the, exclusion of Ambiguity is attained to 
to the estremest practicable degree, and the minutest specific dif- 
ferences indicated. For example, i signifying all the various as- 
pects of Being undifferentiated, mi signifies Affirmative Being, ni 
Negative Being (Inness to the Vanishing Centre, In ; nor, neither), 
li Perpetual or Continuous, Level or Similar Being, ri Temporary, In- 
terrupted, or Broken Being ; (reflected, turned back), bi Concrete In- 
organic Being, vi Concrete Organic Being, Life, etc. The Combina- 
tions of the Syllabic Root- Words so formed then combine to repre- 
sent still more specific meanings. The transcript of Nature is in 
this way far more perfect than if the new language contained only 
words of exact specification. 



112 SELECTED CONSONANTS. 

U (oo), MOVEMENT; Actuality, Practice, (Art); Per- 
spective; THE BEAUTIFUL; Shaded; Blended. 

lu (ew), Copulation, Conjunction, Marriage. 

Oi, Superincumbency, Overshadowing, Masculinity. 

Ai, Ground, Lap, Bosom, Matrix, Femininity. ( .) 

Au (ah-oo), having the general force of the Yowels ; 
Mixed or Undifferentiated KEALITY ; The 
HOMOGENEOUS ; but Elaborate. (92, .) 

le, ELEMENTISM (Including i and e), The Substrate of 
Abstract Principles (131, 132.) 

lau, The Aggregate of Elenientism and Elaborism. 

b. Selected Consonants. 

K, OrF-ness, Froni-ness, Apartness, DIFFERENTIATION; 
Division. 

T, AT-ness, Conjoint-ness, Primitive or Simple INTE- 
GRATION. 

P, HiNGE-wise-ness, CARDINALITY; higher, compound, 
or double-acting INTEGRATION ; bi-compound 
Condition ; (the sound is made at the lips.) 

G, FORCE, active energy ; projectivity ; PROCEEDUEE, 
PROCESS, TRUNK. 

D, EESISTANCE, SOLIDITY, OBJECT, Counter-presenta- 
tion ; Reaction, " that which is given ; ' : the 
Somewhat ; HEAD, KNOB, LUMP, ROTUNDITY. 

B, CONFLICT, or Co-aptation ; Blow (force-with-reac- 
tion) ; BODY, the embodiment, in form, of 
direct and reactionary forces ; knocking to- 
gether, BUILDING, STRUCTURE. (Cf. Fr. I"'/ . 

TO BEAT, lath', TO BUILD, latin tent, A BUILDING, 

SHIP, etc.) 



AMBIGU'S, NASALIZATION, ETC. 113 

c. Ambigtfs. 

H, BEEATH-like Being ; Halitus, SPIEIT ; Attenuated 
and Diffusive Essence. 

Y, Personal PIYOTALITY ; Spiritual Centricity ; Kadiat- 
ing Centre ; Godhood, or eminent personality. 

W, MUTUAL SIDE-INCLININGS, as of the two sides of the 
body in walking, or of two companions walk- 
ing and talking with each other ; ivee-icali or 
see-saw, as the flapping of wings, or of the 
battens of a double door, or of the lips in talk- 
ing ; Mutuality, Reciprocity, Intercourse, Conver- 
sation, (Lat. con, WITH ; and verier e, TO TUKN) ; 
LANGUAGE. 

n , (the Nasalization, 97), Incomprehensibility, Con- 
fusion, blending Inde terrain ateness ; je ne sais 
quoi ; the twang in the nose of the religious 
enthusiast, striving for unity with the Absolute 
(and the Infinite.) 

2. 

Primary Combinations of Ultimate, or Primitive, Ele- 
ments (Alphabetic Sounds), into Secondary, Proximate, 
or WonE-iSG-Ekments Tivo- Letter- Roots. 



-io, (as a termination ; i being and o presentation 

display], meaning -dom, realm, or domain, (pro- 
nounced ee-o.) 

-ia, (as termination; i being and a substance), meaning 
-ism, -ness, -ity ; the Principle or substance of 
the being of an object, (pronounced ee-ah.) 



114 TERMINATIONS. 

Ki, (k, o^-ness, _par-itivness, and i, "being, meaning the 
paftncss or partitiveness of I icing, and, especially, 
or (the Preposition ; pronounced kee.) 

Ti, (t, a/-ness, conjointness, and i, being), meaning AT 
(the Preposition ; pronounced tee.) 

Ku, (k, o^-ness, and u, proceedence or movement), mean- 
ing FROM (the Preposition ; pronounced koo.) 

Tu, (t, a-ness, and u, proceedence, meaning TO (the 
Preposition ; pronounced too.) 

Ho, (h, Spiritual Centre punctum vitce, and o, pres- 
ence), meaning MAN. 

Bo, (b, embodiment, and o, presence), meaning bod)/, 

Ma, (m, muchness, owfness, and a, substance), meaning 
Mass, Outer or Gros Matter; (pronounced man.) 

Na, (n, littleness, inness, and a, substance), meaning In- 
ner or Choice Mass or Substance, MIND ; (pro- 
nounced nah.) (Cf. Gr. nous, Mind.) 

-so, (as a termination ; s, collection, compression, smootJt- 
ness, and o presence), Adjective Termination, 
meaning of like' quality as, -ous, definitively 
like, (Fr. -eux, euse.) 

-sho, (as a termination ; sh dispersivcness, diffusion, 
roughness, and o presence), Adjective Ending, 
meaning crudely like, approximately like, -isJi,- oid. 

-to, (as a termination ; t, a^-ness and o, presence), the 
most general Substantive-ending, meaning 
thing, any object or idea whatsoever. 

-ski, (as a termination; s, definite collection, cn-ordi tui- 
tion, k cuts, lines, divisions, and i, bein.'j], mean- 



: ' REALMIC ' TERMINATION, -TO. 115 

ing Science, -logy, -ology, -lore, Ger. -lehre; (pro- 
nounced skee) ; -skiso, -ological. 

-li, (as a termination ; 1, continuity, level, equality t and 
i, being) Adverbial Ending, Eng. -ly. 

-ni, (as a termination ; n, in, and i, being), meaning IN 
(the Preposition ; pronounced nee.) 

n. 

Proximate or Ordinary Synthesis, (generally) of the 
Two-Letter-Roots into Words. 

Au,io, (pronounced ah-oo-ee-o), the realm or domain 
of ORDINARY "BEALITY," or of the Subject- 
matter of Being, capable of being " differen- 
tiated" or "limited," but as yet Unlimited or 
Infinite ; assumed, however, as comprehensible, 
or capable of being known by the subsequent 
insertion of thought-lines ; THE COMPREHENSIBLE 
BEALITY, or Beality in an Ordinary or Non- 
transcendental sense. The HOMOGENEOUS, The 
HOMOGENISMUS ; Empirical Reality ; " The Un- 
limited." (B. O. a. 20, t. 204.) 

Au n io, (pr. ah-oo n -ee-o), The Incomprehensible 
(Beality) ; " The Unknowable." CARDINARY, 
Transcendental, or Rational Beality or Being 

I 3 io (pr. ee-ee-o), The Central (Being), " The Abso- 
lute," in an ordinary sense, as in speaking of 
an absolute worldly ruler ; or, philosophically, 
BEING as Centered in Objects, as Contrasted 
with Rational or Intelligent Being (I n io.) 



116 DOMAINS OF BEING. 

I n io, (pr. ee"-ee-o), " The Absolute ' in the high 
philosophic or transcendental sense ; The L 
of Swedenborg ; the Pure Universal Ego, the 
Ego in itself, The Self-Centred Intelligence of 
Fichte ; as contrasted with Objective Being 



E,io, (pr. a-ee-o), " The Relative" or Related, in the 
Ordinary sense ; The Collateral Environment ; 
What stands re-late /, or at the Sides. 

E n io, (pr. a n -ee-o), " The Relative," in the high phil- 
osophic, transcendental, or Cardinary sense ; 
The Existere of Swedenborg. 

A,io, (pr. ah-ee-o), The Real or Substantial (Mate- 

rial), in an ordinary sense. 
A n io, (pr. ah n -ee-o), " The Real" or " The Ground" 

(of Being), in the high Cardinary sense of the 

Transcendental Metaphysicians. 

Ngkauflio, (pr. ngkah-oof-lee-o), " The Limiting," 
" to peras" (B. O. a. 20, t. 204. ) 

Nggauvlio, (pr. nggah-oov-lee-o), " The Limited," 
(B. O. a. 20, t. 204.) 

Ngkauvlio, (pr. ngkah-oov-lee-o), THE HETEROGENIS- 
MUS, the Limit-and-the-Thiug-limited ; The 
Limitary, a term which may be employed 
to signify combinedly " The Limiting ' 
and "The Limited;" and, hence, the whole 
scope of the Consonants, the Limitary Ele- 
ments, in Speech, and as Antithet for au,io, 
" The Unlimited." 



SAMPLE WORD-BUILDING. 117 

Al, (pr. ahl), All, Universal, Entire. The Universe (cf. 
Ger. das All, THE ALL, used for The Universe. 

Wa, (pr. wah), interchange of substance, or of some- 
what, or whatsoever ; What (Fr. quoi) ; Boot of 
all words meaning (Spiritual) Intercourse, or 
Communication, LANGUAGE, UTTERANCE, SPEECH. 

(-to, (as termination), Thing, object, in the most gen- 
eral sense.) 

Aiwa, (pr. ahl-wah) , universal (spiritual) communica- 
tion or interchange. 

ALWATO, (pr. ahl-wah-to), universal speech-thing ; the 
name of THIS NEW SCIENTIFIC UNIVERSAL LAN- 
GUAGE. 

(-so, (Adjective termination), meaning -ous.) 

(-11, (pr. lee), (Adverbial termination), meaning -ly.) 

Alwaso, (adj.), relating to Alwato ; having the quality 
or character of Alwato. 

(Alwali, (pr. ahl-wah-lee), after the usage of Alwato.) 

(-ni, (pr. nee), (as termination) meaning (the Preposi- 
tion) IN.) 

Alwatoni, (pr. ahl-wah-to-nee), meaning in Alwato, 
(as we say anglice, meaning in English, or in 
the method of the English language.) 

Alau,io, (pr. ahl-ah-oo-ee-o), " The Infinite," assumed 
as Comprehensible ; the Universal, Undifferen- 
tiated, or as yet Unexplored " Knowable." The 
Universal Unlimited, (Ordinary, not Transcen- 
dental.) 

Alau n io, (pr. ahl-ah-oo n -ee-o), The Incomprehensible 
Infinite ; " The Infinite ' in the Cardiuary, 
Transcendental, or Incomprehensible sense. 



118 SAMPLE WOKD-BUILDING. 

Go, TEUNK ; train, track, trail, tail ; elongated Process, 

pathway, or orbit, as of a planet. 
Do, HEAD ; knob, lump, clod ; any roundish object or 

body ; a planet or anj 7 of its analogues. 
Bo, anthropomorphic (or man-shaped) BODY ; head- 

and-trunk, somewhat undiscriminated (as in 

the sepia or cuttle-fish), and without, or, 

rather, irrespective of Vitality. 

Zho, a vegetable Object ; a tree or plant. 

Zq, an animal ; animal (adj.), etc. 

Vo, an organic or living body, more than vegetable or 
animal, being both ; humanoid body ; human 
attribution ; Sight, Mind ; (the Mind's Eye.) 

Bodo, the head of the body. 

Bogo, the trunk of the body. 

Bobo, THE BODY, including Head and Trunk fully 

discriminated ; the complete man-like body, 

but not distinctively living. 
Vobo, the living body specifically. 

Zhodo, a vegetable head, as a cabbage or lettuce 

head. 

Zhogo, a vegetable trunk or stalk. 
Zhobo, a vegetable trunk-and-head ; the stalk and 

plume or clumpy part conjoined. 

Zhovo, the inflorescence of the plant, specially vital. 
Zodo, an animal's head. 
Zogo, an animal's trunk. 



SAMPLE WOKD-BUILDING. 119 

i 

Zobo, an animal carcass. 
Zovo, the living animal body. 

Zodoso, pertaining to or resembling an animal's head. 
Zogoso, pertaining to the trunk of an animal's body. 
Zoboso, pertaining to the animal carcass. 
Zovoso, relating to the live animal body. 
Zovoli, in the manner of a living animal body. 

Ho, human. 

Ho,io, (ho-ee-o), the Human Sphere or Realm. 

Hobo, the Human Body. 

Hoboma, the mass of the human body ; (ma, mass.) 

Hobogo, the trunk of the human body ; the torso. 

Hoboclo, the head of the human body. 

Hobobo, the embodiment of the human body, as an 

organically constituted whole. 

Masa, (mah-sah), mass, collection; (sa, collection.) 
Homa, or homasa, Society, The human mass(es.) 
Homabo, the body of human society. 
Sama,io, (sah-mah-ee-o), a collection or assemblage 

of objects. 

Hobosamaio, a collection of human bodies. 
Hoboso, (adj.) relating to the human body. 
Hoboni, (adv.), within the human body. 

152. It will be appropriate to conclude this chapter 
with some notice of Diacritical Marks, as a sort of 
Secondary Alphabet, or of accessory means for modi- 
fying, further discriminating, and, as it were, multi- 
plying the Sounds and their Meanings of the Basic 
Alphabetic Signs the proper Alphabet. 



120 DIACRITICAL MARKS. 

The most familiar instance of a Diacritical 
Mark is the Accent (not the so-called French Accent 
Marks but) as meant and used in English, as the sign of 
a predominant or increased stress of the voice upon a 
particular syllable of a word ; as present (the Verb), 
and present (the Noun or Adjective). The same 
Accent Mark is retained, in the same sense, in Al- 

wato. 

i 

153. The Nasalization-sign ( n ) has been already no- 
ticed and described as merely a Diacritical Mark (93, 
97.) This sound (the Nasalization) which abounds in 
French, Polish, Sanscrit, and many other languages, 
offers, ordinarily, a great stumbling-block to English- 
speaking people, but one which even a slight explana- 
tion will tend greatly to remove. It is confounded 
with the English Throat-Nose^Consonant- Sound ng, 
to which it is related, but from which it very de- 
cidedly differs. The English ng-sound is a true 
Consonant-sound, that is to say, the parts of the 
mouth where it is made completely close upon each 
other, hindering entirely the passage of the sound- 
ing-breath through the channel of the mouth, and giv- 
ing it no other exit than through the nose. Of this 
any one will convince himself by putting the finger 
deep into the mouth, and then saying ki?^ / he will 
feel the back part of the tongue rising at the end of 
the word and pressing the finger very closely, striving 
to close that passage-way. But the French Nasal 
sounds are mere Yowels with a tinge of Nasalization 
or of Nose-sound upon them ; that is to say, they 
are produced with the piiwtjc-w~n/ of the month 



DIACRITICAL MARKS CONTINUED. 121 

completely open, a portion of the sounding breath 
merely being at the same time thrown through the 
nose. In the utterance of the French an (ah n ), the 
organs of the throat and mouth are as completely 
open as in pronouncing a (ah), and the slight n- 
quality which is heard with the vowel comes of the 
surplus of sounding breath thrown at the same in- 
stant into the nasal passages, or into the head and 
nose. The French un (uh n ) is merely a slight grunt, 
often heard in English, not as a recognized part of lan- 
guage, but as a sort of involuntary interjection. For 
a full account of these Nasalized Vowel-Sounds, as 
they occur in French, see Andrews' and Batchelor's 
"French Instructor," Introduction, p. 47; and " The 
Key " to the same. 1 

154. The Vowel-Scale of Eight Vowels, Table No. 1, 
(94) leaves the Length, Stress, and Peculiar Ictus of 
which those sounds are susceptible to be determined, 
as may be necessary, by Additional Marks (called 
Diacritical.) These are mostly such as are already 
of familiar use in English for similar purposes ; 
namely the " Long Mark " (a), the "Short Mark" 
(a), and the "Accent Mark " ('), already noticed (151.) 
The so-called Grave-Accent (a) is used to mark 
" Stopped Vowels," or such as are both Short and 
characterized by Ictus, or a sudden and abrupt style 
of utterance, as i, e, a, in pit, pet, pat, etc. These 
words are, therefore, represented, Alwali, thus : pit, 
pet, pat ; while peet, pate, pare, are printed as pit, 

1 New York : D. Appleton & Co. 
6 



122 DIACRITICAL MARKS CONTINUED. 

pet, par, etc. Some details of this subject will have 
to be omitted here. Vowels Unmarked are to bo 
understood as of the medium and ordinary length 
and character, or, as Undiacriticised, but susceptible 
of being rendered definite by the addition of the 
marks like Un vocalized Phonography. 

155. The hyphen (-) is only retained for casual pur- 
poses, as, chiefly, for connecting the parts of a word, 
when occurring at the end of a line and at the com- 
mencement of the next line. In the real composition 
of words it is dispensed with, and the following im- 
proved system is adopted. Commas, Semicolons and 
Colons the bulk, as it were, of the Ordinary System 
of Punctuation as it has heretofore occurred between 
words only, and then " spaced out," as the printers 
say, or with openings between the words are used, 
also, Alwali, in the body of the ivords theTnsdves, but 
without spaces / to mark the divisions of Syllables in 
any way liable to undue coalescence, and to indi- 
cate the composition of the words, generally. Thus, 
i,ki,ia is a different word in composition and meaning 
from ik,i,ia ; and the English word potjtook is so pre- 
vented from being pronounced pojhook. If it is not a 
mere separation of Sounds and Syllables, but a Com- 
pound Word, which is to be indicated, the semicolon 
is substituted for the comma ; as in English Ave might 
print thunderstorm or house ; carpenter (instead of tlnni- 
der-storm, house-carpenter) ; and in the case of still 
more complex combinations the colon is introduced ; 
as if in journey man:house;carpenter, where the n'*f of 
the voice is something greater after the first word, 



DIACBITICAL MARKS CONTINUED. 123 

than between the last two. In other respects the Or- 
dinary System of Punctuation remains unchanged 
except by a few additions which need not be speci- 
fied here. This endo-lexic (within the word) punc- 
tuation is not rigorously prescribed ; but may be 
employed somewhat ad libitum, according to the 
views or purposes of the author ; as, in a preceding 
paragraph sama,io employs the comma, but in hobo- 
samaio it is dispensed with. (000.) 

156. The small raised letter n , used to denote the 
Nasalization (97) is of a style of types called techni- 
cally, among printers, " Superior ' letters or types. 
A still more extended use is made, diacritically and 
Alwali, of this variety of types, solving many of the 
most difficult problems, met by Lepsius and others, 
in the attempt to arrange a Romanized Ethnical or 
International Alphabet. The "Superior" h is used 
to express the slight Aspiration which accompanies 
at times nearly every consonant in the Sanscritic 
family of Languages, as k h , g h ,t h ,etc. The "Superior" 
vowels are used to express " Glides ' or Indistinct 
Yow T el-Sounds ; the " Superior ' y (or the cognate 
vowel i) is used after a back or middle-mouth Con- 
sonant, to soften it, and so to constitute what is 
culled The Palatal Consonants, as Span. anJ'o, or au*o 
(for ano, A YEAR), ITr. family or famiy (for famitte, 
FAMILY), etc. The Sanscritic " Cerebrals," The Se- 
mitic " Gutturalizations," the Zulu " Clucks," and 
some other of the rare phenomena of speech are 
provided for by Special notations, for which see 
" The Universal Alphabet." 



CHAPTER VIII. 

CONTINUED EXPOSITION OF THE PRINCIPLES AND METHOD 
OF ALWASO WOKD-BUILDING. 

157. In order to a further expansion of the results of 
what has been previously shown, it will be requisite, 
now, in part to recall, and in part to state anew, certain 
preliminary considerations : 1. The Diphthong^ au, 
(pronounced ah-oo) may be adjoined to each Conso- 
nant-Sound, as a Yowel-stem such as is necessary to a 
full exhibit of the Consonant value (92, 94, 109, 126.) 
This has been already done, in a preliminary man- 
ner. 2. It must be known that each Consonant- 
Sound has, first a Direct Value or Meaning (such 
mainly as has been shown in the preceding Tables), and, 
then, an Inverse, Counter-, or Reflected Value or Mean- 
ing according as the Consonant precedes or follows 
the Vowel-Stem. Thus, auk is the Inversion or 
Counter-presentation of kau. The Consonant has, in 
other words, a Final Volne, which is the opposite of 
its Initial Value. 3. It is to be observed that each 
Root-word which has in it the Diphthong au (ah-oo) 
or iau (ee-ah-oo), that is to say, a* representing lie 
whole Voir.-t-Sculf, is, consequently, a Fasciculated or 



FASCICULATED ROOT-WORDS. 125 

Bundle-Root- Word, which breaks up by Analysis 
into a Series of Eleven (or including the au, Tiveln 1 , 
and including iau, Thirteen) Single or Special Boot- 
Words, one for, and containing, each single Vowel 
and Diphthong, so represented. To illustrate : 

Auski, (ah-oo-skee), is Philosophy in a very ex- 
tended but yet in an Ordinary or Non-Transcendental 
Sense ; and 

Au n ski, (ah-oo n -ski), is Cardinary or Transcen- 
dental Philosophy ; the Absolute or Pure-Reason- 
Variety of Knowledge. 

157. Auski, (ah-oo-skee), then divides into : 

Iski, (ee-skee), Ordinary Ontology (The Science of 
Things.) 

Eski, (a-skee), Ordinary Eelatology (The Science of 
Relations between Things.) 

Aski, (a(ir)-skee), Etherialogy (The Science of 
Ethers, Aromas, Auras, and the Analogously tenuous 
Realities in the Universe.) 

Aski, (ah-skee), Mdterioid SUBSTAN-CE-OLOGY (but 
PhilosopJioid, or Indeterminately Considered) Ordinary 
Metaphysics or Philosophy ; NATURO-METAPHYSIC, o5? 
Indeterminate NATUROLOGY ; (The Philosophy of 
the Mere Inert Grossness.) 

7ski, (tth-skee), Temporalogy, the Science of Sufilif- 
nary Eventualities ; of Transitory, Passing-away, or 
Currental Conditions ; Mortalities, etc. 

Oski, (aw-skee), Spa-ce-ology, The Science of Ce- 
lestialities, SPIRITUALITIES, of Spheral and Firmtt- 
mental Permanencies, or Perpetuities, Immortalities, 
etc. 



126 ORDINARY PHILOSOPHIES. 

Oski, (o-skee), Ideo-Morphology ; Science of Ideas 
as Types of things ; of the Platonic " Ideas ; ' of 
Type-Forms, in Science Richard Owen ; SCIENTO- 
PHILOSOPHY, Indeterminate SCIENTOLOGY, based 
on the Abstract T} 7 pical Representation of Principles 
and Laws ; Pure Scientific Theory. 

Uski, (oo-skee), Actualogy ; Science of the Practical, 
or of Real Activities ; Practical Philosophy; ARTO- 
PHILOSOPHY ; Indeterminate ARTOLOGY. 

luski, (ee-oo-skee), Conjuncturology, Eventuology, 
Transitology ; Science of Conjunctures (Lat. con, 
WITH ; and jungere,TQ JOIN), of Epochs, Climacterics, 
Transitions, Critical, Transitional, or Supreme Events ; 
of Births and Deaths ; of Marriages, Copulations, 
Reconciliations and Alliances ; of Inosculations, Im- 
pregnations and Reproductions, universally. 

Oiski, (aw-ee-skee), Super(n)ology; Science of Over- 
shadowings, Canopies, Coverings, Protections ; of 
Divine Efflux and Spiritual Generative Eorce ; of 
Male Potentialities, etc. 

Aiski, (ah-ee-skee), Infer(n)ology ; Science of Suc- 
cumbencies ; Bases, Grounds ; Receptivities-aiid-Re- 
actions ; Concubinisnis, Conceptions, Pregnancies 
and Prolifications ; of all Earth-and-womb-like Ca- 
pacities and Potencies ; of Female Qualifications and 
Attributes, etc. 

Auski, (ah-oo-skee), PHILOSOPHY in the sense so 
general as to include all the preceding so-called 
Sciences or Branches of Theory and Knowledge ; 
The Vague or Inexact Aspect of Human Knowledge, 
generally; although, at i (ee), and o, The 



CARDINAEY PHILOSOPHIES. 127 

nafe approximates the Determinate, or Eckosophic, (The 
Articulateness of the Consonants ; as These Two Vowel- 
Sounds are, among the Yowels, the nearest approxi- 
mations to the Consonants, and so generate the Weak 
Consonant-Sounds y and w). Indeed, in the i (ee), 
as THING in se (or per se) is the Natural Basis of all 
Reality, and hence of all Determinateness, and in the 
o, as MANIFESTATION IN IDEA, Presentation, or Re- 
presentation, is the Natural Basis of all Lucidity of 
Exposition, and hence of Science itself in its highest 
expression ; or more properly of the Philosophy of 
Science, or of, in a word, SCIENTO-PHILOSOPHY. 

158. Finally, Au n ski, (ah-oo n -skee), then subdivides, 
in like manner, into I n ski, E n ski, A n ski, etc., which re- 
peat the same Grand Departments of Philosophy as 
in the subdivisions of auski (ah-oo-skee), with the sole 
difference that they pass over from the Empirical 
or Ordinary to the purely Rational, Oar dinar y, 
or Transcendental regions of Thinking. It will 
* suffice to give some idea of the whereabouts of these 
subtle departments of Thought, to suggest that Fichte 
modulates in I n ski ] the Doctrine of Pure Transcen- 
dental INTELLIGENCE ; Hegel in that of E n ski, the Doc- 
trine of Pure Transcendental THOUGHT-RELATION(S) 
(Dialectics) ; Schelling in that of Ie n ski, (a seeking to 
Unite The Thing and the Relation, the Subject 
and the Object in a common Ground) ; The Her- 
metics, Mystics, and Magi in A"s\d ; the Great bulk 



1 When a Science is abstruse and subtle, note the corresponding 
difficulty in the pronunciation of the word which names it, AlwalL 



128 ORDINARY AND CARDIXARY. 

of the more Ordinary Transcendental Philosophers 
in A n ski ; the Experientialists in 7"ski, Tho Idealists 
in 0"ski, Plato in O n ski, Charles Fourier (Transcen- 
dental Practical Philosopher) in U n ski, etc. To 
Kant may be assigned the whole range of Au n ski, or 
Transcendental Philosophy. The i (ee) and o, pass- 
ing, by merely more stress or pressure (a squeezing 
process), into y and w, Schelling (ie n ye n ) was the 
only German Transcendentalist who went so far 
towards Mysticism as to affiliate with Jacob Boahme, 
and Plato by the similar tendency of his Yowel (o) 
to become w (o-au=wau) holds a corresponding re- 
lationship to Swedenborg, the great Theandrologist 
and Pneumatologist, or the Prince of Theological and 
Spiritual Science mixed with Mysticism; (Modulating 
in ?6'au,?/au,^au, or, in a word, in Hwau n io.) 

159. Is it any wonder that a staunch Echosophist like 
Herbert Spencer, (modulating in shaup and zhaub, or 
pf and bv) has but little comprehension of, and finds 
nothing to admire in Hegel, for example, (in e 11 ), whose 
range of thought was so different from his own ; or that 
Auguste Comte (in mlau) should feel so little sym- 
pathy for the Metaphysicians, even those to whom he 
was so greatly indebted. It will be the sublime of- 
fice of Universology to interpret all these conflicting 
systems of Thought to each other ; reconciling and co- 
ordinating them all in a Higher Complex Unity ; and 
in effecting this GRAND EECONCILIATION Alwato will 
serve as one of the most effective Instruments. (For 
the letter-references not explained above shaup, 
zhanb, mlau see 138, 139, and Chapter 



FASCICULATED ROOT-WORDS. 129 

160. The subjoined list of Alwaso words consists of 
Fasciculated (or Bundle-) Boot- Words, (each dissolv- 
able into Twelve, according to the preceding model.) 
They are given in their Plural Forms, the Singulars 
being readily inferred, by rejecting the Signs of 
Plurality. These signs are -s (sometimes -z), or' 
when requisite, to facilitate the utterance -es (or -ez), 
as in English. Whether as bundled or dissolved, as 
singular or plural, these very primitive words do not 
figure so much as Actual Single words of the Alwaso 
language (although they occur in this way), as they 
do, as Abstract Hoots (as in the Sanscrit), capable of 
being converted into any Part of Speech, by Special 
Affix or Suffix, or by the Context merely ; and capable 
of entering, with infinite variability, into the composi- 
tion of the less elementary or more elaborate words. 

Fasciculated (or Bundle-) Hoot-words arise, then, 
of the following orders : 

Aus, (ah-oos), ORDINARY. Idealities, (Unlimited, Inde- 
terminate), Proto-pragmata or First Entities (i, Being, 
e, Relation, o, Space, etc.), Sensuously realized. 

Au n s, (ah-oo n s), CARDINARY (or Transcendental) 
Realities the same as aus, but rationalized or enter- 
tained in the Reason. 

(Aus, Integral Entities, Wholes ; aus, Fractional 
Entities, Parts ; aas or aus Equalities ; aus or aus 
Inequalities ; Odd Things, Odd-like properties, 
actions, etc. Observe that au,ia (ah-oo-ee-ah) Or- 
dinariness and au n ia (ah-oo n -ee-ah) Cardinariness 
hold an echoing relationship to Ordinal Numbers and 
Cardinal Numbers, respectively, in the Mathematics ; 



130 BUNDLE-EOOT-WORDS. 

I 

that aii,ia, (ali-66-ee-ali), Wholeness (of Reality), and 
au,ia (ah-bb-ee-ah) Partness (of the Bealify), have 
similar correspondences, respectively, with Integral 
and Fractional Numbers ; and that Inequality and 
Equality in mere Length of Vowel-Sounds echoes in 
like manner to the difference between Odd and Even 
Numbers. It is at this point that the Analogy between the 
Elements of Speech and Elementary Mathematical Dis- 
criminations begins to occur. It is barely noted here 
for reference, explanation, and expansion elsewhere.) 

Kaus (kah-oos), kauts (kah-oots), or kautos (kah- 
oo-tos), Single or Simple abstractoid liniar PARTINGS 
or Parts. (Cf. Eng. Cats, Cuttings.) 

Taus, (tah-oos), Single or Simple abstract point- 
like UNITINGS, as of any two different Attributes or 
Qualities in the Constitution of the (ideal abstract) 
Thing or Object; togethernesses, wholenesses, Things. 
(Cf. French tout, ALL.) 

Paus, (pah-oos), Single or Simple abstractoid liniar- 
PARTiNGS-a?icZ-point-like-UNiTiNGS ; single HINGINGS 
viewed from the Flanges to the Bivet-and-joint ; or 
Single Triangulations viewed from the Legs to the 
Apexes (or Apices) of the Angles ; Converging or 
diminishing Conicities ; Comings or bringings to a 
Point, whence POSITINGS, pointings. (Puts, Puttings.) 

T, k, and p hold the relation to each other of as 1. 
Centre, Absolute POINT (the t) ; 2. Cut and hence LINE 
(the k) ; and 3. Relative POINT, Index, Pointer, the 
Diminishing End of a cone, a?r/, <ltuj<jci' or other 
pointed object, hinging of Point and Line Quality. 



BUNDLE -BOOT-WORDS. 131 



Auks, (ah-ooks), single or simple abstractoid liniar 
Counter-PARTiNGS. (Cf. Eng. a?r&-ward for Fr. gauche.) 

Auts, (ah-oots), single or simple abstractoid Coun- 
ter-pointings or WHOLENESSES ; Othernesses. (Cf. Fr. 
autre, OTHER ; Eng. out.) 

Aups, (ah-oops), single or simple abstractoid liniar- 
Counter - PARTINGS - and - point - like- UNITINGS ; hence 
single abstractoid Counter-HiSGiSGS, viewed from 
Rivet-and-joint to the Flanges ; single Counter-Trian- 
gulations viewed from the Apexes (or Apices) to the 
Legs of the Angles ; diverging or diminishing Coni- 
cities ; goings or carryings outward and apart from 
a point or angle, whence Openings, Overtnesses, Pub- 
lishings, etc. (Cf. Eng. open ; Gr. ops, THE EYE.) 

(Thaus, (thah-oos), decussation-points, (abstractoid) 
cross-roads "carrefours" pivots, etc. Auths, other 
or correlated pivots. Qaus, (ga-oos), radiating cen- 
tres, foci ; auges, (ah-oo9-es), other or correlated 
radiating centres or foci.) 

Gaus, (gah-oos), single or simple concretoid liniar 
(or shaft-like) De-par^-ings, Pro-cesses, or PROCEED- 
INGS (forth-goings) ; Elongated or Trunk -like Move- 
ments or Objects. (Cf. Eng. go.) 

Daus, (dah-oos), single or simple concretoid or head- 
like Togethernesses, Wholenesses, or THINGS. Roundish, 
knobby, clod-like conceptions. (Cf. Ger. ding, THING.) 

Baus, (bah-oos), single or simple concretoid De- 
partings- (Trunk-like Elongations-) AND-Head-like ' 
Knobs or Endings ; Anthropoid or Man-shaped BO- 
DIES, or analogous conceptions. (Cf. Eng. Body.) 



132 BUNDLE-ROOT-WORDS. 

* 

Augz, (ah-oogz), single or simple concretoid liniar 
(or shaft-like) Counter-Proceedings. (Cf. Lat. ago, 
TO DEIVE.) 

Audz, (ali-oodz), single or simple concretoid (or 
head-like) objects or conceptions ; Other or Counter- 
posited Objects. (Cf. Eng. aids, at, add; Lat. ad.) 

Aubz, (ah-oobz), single or simple concretoid Coun- 
ter-Processes- (or Proceedings-) AND-Knobs-or-head- 
like-Endings ; Man-shaped bodies inverted ; or 
similar conceptions ; Dead or Cast-off Bodies, 
Corpses, Carcasses. (Cf. obsequies ; Lat. ob, AGAINST. ) 

(For dhaus, (dhah-oos), audhz (ah-oodhz), jaus 
(jah-oos), and auj,es (ah-ooj-es) cf. Thaus, etc., above. 

Shaus, (shah-oos), pluraloid or multiform abstract- 
oid liniar Partings, Dis-partings, Apartnesses, or Parts; 
Ramifications, De-liniations, Distributions, Diffusive- 
nesses, Unconditioned states. (Cf. Eng. shoo /) 

Saus, (sah-oos), pluraloid or multiform abstractoid 
punctate (or point-like) Unitings ; Collections, As- 
semblages, Groupings, Finitings, etc, (Cf. Ger. sam- 
meln, TO GATHER.) 

Faus, (fah-oos), pluraloid or multiform abstractoid 
Liniar-Partings-and-Punctate- Unitings (fan-like ex- 
pansions, the spider-web, etc.) ; Delineations and Dis- 
tributions of Groups and Series ; Schemata of Co-ex- 
istences and Sequences, (Classifications and Doings); 
Actualities, Practicalities. (Cf. Lat. /ac-ere, TO DO.) 

Aush,es, (ah-oosh-es), pluraloid or multiform ab- 
stractoid liniar Counter-partings ; Conditionings, etc. 



BUNDLE-EOOT-WORDS. 133 

Aus,es, (ali-oos-es), the related Counter-pointings ; 
Outnesses or Exclusions of the Unincluded or Un- 
(con)fin(it)ed Points, or Entities. (Cf. Ger. aits, OUT.) 

Auf,es, (ah-oof-es), pluraloid or multiform abstrac- 
toid liniar Coiinter-partings-A.'RD-Coiinter-pointinfjs ; 
Counter-classifications-AND-Performances or Doings ; 
Counter-feits ; correlated Counter- Schemata; Theoretic 
EXPANSIONS, Theories. (Cf. Eng. off.) 

Zhaus, (zhah-oos), pluraloid or multiform concre- 
toid liniar (or linioid) Partings, Dis-partings, Apart- 
nesses, or Parts ; Upward and Outward Ramifications 
or Brandlings in Real Being ; The Plumate or Super- 
terranean Tree-or-Plant-like Orders of Existence ; 
Arborifications, Vegetable or Vegetoid Entities ; 
Growths, Developments. (Cf. Fr. jeter, TO THROW.) 

Zaus, (zah-oos), pluraloid or multiform concretoid 
punctoid (knobby, or head-like) Unitings ; Organic 
Collections, Clumps, Buncllings, Collections or Con- 
geries of Organs, as in the Animal economy ; Living, 
Animal, or Animoid Organs ; Apparatus, Systems, and 
Organoid Existence, generally. (Cf. Eng. 2o,ology.) 

Vans, (vah-oos), pluraloid or multiform concretoid 
Liniar-Partings-and-Punctoid- (or -Knobby)- Gatherings- 
or -Collections, (pluraloid trunk-and-head-like ob- 
jects ; t fibrillated-and-ganglionic) ; Organic or Living 
Entities or Orders of Existence, Vegetable-A.ND- Animal ; 
and their Analogues in Being Universally. (Cf. 
Lat. vi,isi, LITE.) 

Auzh,es, (ah-oo-zn-es), pluraloid or multiform con- 
cretoid liniar Counter-partings ; Branchings downward; 



134 BUNDLE-ROOT-WOUDS. 

Roots, or Root-like Objects, Conceptions, Entities or 
Conditions ; Radicatious, or Counter- Vegetisms. 

Auz,es, (ah-ooz-es), pluraloid or multiform concre- 
toid punctoid (or knob-like) Counter-pointings (con- 
trasted objects) ; EMBRYOS, and Embryotic Orders of 
Existence ; (Counter- Animisms ; Incipiencies of Ani- 
mal Life, as the Roots are so of Vegetable life.) 

Auv,es, (ah-oov-es), pluraloid or multiform concret- 
oid Counter- Organismi ; Counter- Adaptations to Or- 
ganic Life ; Accessories, Adjunctive Attributes, 
POSSESSIONS, (cf. Fr. av-oir, TO HAVE.) 

Mlaus, Generalizations. 

1. Static, Direct. 

Maus, (mah-oos), Exteriors, Outnesses, Large- 
nesses, Generaloid partings, dis-partings or ex-fe??sions ; 
outstretchings of the Omnidirectionally, of the All- 
around-ness, Space-n'ise. (Cf. Ger. mauer, WALLS.) 

Naus, (nah-oos), Interiors, Innesses, Smallnesses ; 
Contraction of the Omnidirectionally. (Cf. Gr. nous, 
MIND.) 

Aungz, (ah-oongz), Indifferences, Neutralities, 
neither-out-nor-in-nesses ; neither-great-nor-small- 
nesses ; moderate-nesses ; Generaloid Equations. 

2. Static, Inverse. 

Aumz, (ah-oomz), Counter- Exteriors, (what stands 
over against the outside), ENVIRONMENTS, Embracings, 
Encirclings, Surroundings. (Cf. Ger. um, AROUND.) 

Aunz, (ah-oonz), Counter-Interiors, (what stands 
over against and is so related to the inmost of 
things), Propria, INHERENT Properties; (differing from 



BUNDLE-ROOT- WORDS. 135 

auvz which are adjunct properties, or acquisitions) ; the 
Essential Unity of any Being, (cf. Lat. ?m-us ; Eng. one 
and own, etc.) Ngaus, (ngah-oos), Counter-Indifferences, 
(hardly pronounceable and hardly definable.) 

3. Temple, Direct. 

Laus, (lah-oos), Longnesses, Longings, Patiences, 
Continuities; Outstretchings of the Unidirectionality, 
(of the On-going-ness, Time-ivise), Generaloid Unities 
of the Length- wise Dimension (cf. Eng. Long, Longing.) 

Raus, (rah-oos), Shortnesses, Breakages, Fractious- 
nesses, Withholdings, (breakings off, and backnesses) ; 
Interruptions or " Solutions of the Continuity ; " Re- 
versings of the Uni-directionality, (of the On-going- 
ness, Time-wise) ; Returns, Generaloid Disunitions of 
the Length-wise Dimension, (cf. ri-, re-, BACK.) 

4. Temple, Inverse. 

Aulz, (ah-oolz), Counter-Continuities, Counter-out- 
goings, relaxations, retardations, oldnesses, CESSA- 
TIONS, lowerings, Deaths, (cf. Eng. loiv, (s)low 9 old, etc.) 

Aurz, (ah-oorz), Counter-break-offs or Counter-stop- 
pages, i. e. pro-cedencies ; ORIGINS, arisings, births, 
beginnings, (cf. Lat. or-ior, TO ARISE; orido, AN ORIGIN, 
contracted into ordo, AN ORDER or PROCEEDURE.) 

Whaus Spiritual Attenuations. 

Haiis, (hah-oos), Breaths, Halitus, Spiritual Dif- 
fusions. (Cf. Ger. haucJi, BREATH.) 

Yaus, (yah-oos), Spiritual /oci or Centers ; radiating 
Points; Personalities ; Gods, Men, etc. (Cf. Span, yo, I.) 

Wans, (wah-oos), Mutualities, Interchanges, etc. 
(cf. Wato, Speech-thing, Language.) 



CHAPTER IX. 

SPECIAL CONSIDERATION OF THE ABSTRACT AND THE 

CONCRETE. 

161. After the preceding Grand Distributions of 
Universal Being (into the Unlimited and The Limi- 
tary, The General and The Special, etc.), none re- 
mains of more intrinsic importance than that already 
alluded to, and partially employed as a basis of 
Classification, into THE ABSTRACT and THE CONCRETE 
(94, 139.) Herbert Spencer, not seizing on the more 
subtle Plnlosoplioid bases of distribution, to which 
hardly anything else than the Analysis of the Alpha- 
bet could have conducted us, commences, indeed, his 
Classification of the Sciences, at this point, making, 
his first Threefold Division into, 1. THE ABSTRACT, 
2. THE CONCRETE, and 3. THE ABSTRACT-CONCRETE, 
(or Mixed). 1 By adopting the termination -o-logy, wo 
may conveniently convert these designations into 
Abstradology, Concrdolocjy and Abstract-Concretology 

1 " The Classification of the Sciences, to which are added reasons 
for dissenting from the Philosophy of M. Comte," by Herbert 
Spencer a Pamphlet. 



THE ABSTRACT AND THE CONCEETE DEFINED. 137 

(as a transition to the proper Alwaso terms ending in 
-ski.) By Abstract-Concrete, Spencer means to say 
Mixed or Undifferentiated into either completely Ab- 
stract or completely Concrete, embracing all that is 
neither wholly Abstract nor wholly Concrete, (Mik- 
tonology B. O. Index, word Mikton.) 

162. But what is the meaning of the terms Abstract 
and Concrete? Few persons have a very definite 
conception of this very fundamental Scientific dis- 
crimination. Only recentl} 7 a gentleman who had 
spent his life-time in Scientific pursuits was heard ask- 
ing for an accurate definition of these two terms. The 
common reader need not, therefore, dread to confess a 
certain obscurity which may rest in his thought on 
this subject, and to seek by a little close thinking to 
remove it. 

163. Etymologically, Abstract, from the Latin words 
abs FROM, and tractus DRAWN, means draion asunder or 
completely separated, and so, as it were, rendered thin, 
but, also, transparent or dear ; and Concrete, from the 
Latin con WITH, and cresco TO GROW, means grown to- 
gether, solidified, or closely compacted, and so make thick, 
heavy, dense, impervious to the light ; liJce solid or actual 
material Things, contrasted with mere ideas or thoughts, 
which are Abstract. Such is what is directly meant or 
implied by the words. So, to abstract, mentally, is to 
separate completely some one attribute of a subject, as 
the color, for example, in order to consider it sepa- 
rately. But all of this does not give a sufficiently true 
and distinct idea of the meaning of Abstract and 
Concrete, or of " The Abstract " and " The Concrete," 

6 



138 ABSTRACTISMUS AND CONCHETISMUS. 

spoken of as great Departments or Domains of 
Being ; two halves, as it were, of the Universe ex- 
cept that plasmal and imperfectly characterized 
Mikton which is not wholly separated into either. 
Further statement and illustration will render this 
difficult matter distinctly comprehensible. 

164. The Concrete includes all Sensibly or Naturally 
REAL Things; every Mineral, including the planets as the 
great Mineral Bodies, every Vegetable, every Animal, 
including Man, as to his body, or all that is present 
of him to the senses ; in fine, the whole Sensibly 
Real World. It may then be asked with some sur- 
prise : where is there room for another equal half of 
the Universe, The Abstract ? To this the answer is 
that The Abstract is wholly confined to what is, from 
this Natural Sensuous point of view, A PURE NOTHING. 
Hence, from this Outer and Material Standing-Point, it 
is merely Negative ; although, as we shall find, the view 
is reversed FROM ITS OWN STANDING-POINT, and The Ab- 
stract is, then, THE MORE POSITIVE WORLD ; and the 
World of Outer Sensible Appearances is NEGATIVE to it. 

165. Space and Time are Abstractions, and are, in a 
sense, mere Nothings. A Point is defined, in Geom- 
etry, to be Position, without Length, Breadth, or 
Thickness ; a Line to be Length without Breadth or 
Thickness ; and a Surface to be Length and Breadth 
without Thickness. All of these are, therefore, Ab- 
stract ; and that which has Materiality, and so Sub- 
stance, or a Real Yalue, is the only Concrete. Even 
the Geometrical Solid, though it has a ghostly kind of 
thickness, being yet destitute of Substance (as a pie- 



ELEMENTS OF FORM AND NUMBER. 139 

nuni or filling-in of its depth or holding-capacity), is 
also Abstract. 

166. That which has neither Length, Breadth, nor 
Thickness is, obviously, from the Sensible or Natural 
Point of View, a Pure Nothing ; so of the Line which 
has Length merely ; so of the Surface, and so of the 
Geometrical Solid, even. These are all Pure Nothings, 
the mere Cut-up of the still more Negative or Noth- 
ing-like Pure Space, in which they, as well as the 
Concrete "World, are situated. Or, rather, they may 
be merely Conceptions, in the Mind, of Positings and 
Limitations which have no Real Existence in Actual 
Space even ; but which are put there, by the Mind, as a 
means of Measuring and so of thinking (or thinging) 
other things. All these Primary Elements of Form 
are Abstract, and, in a sense, very unreal ; but, on the 
other hand, if all Points, Lines, and Surfaces were re- 
moved, or ihought-away-from the Universe, nothing 
would remain before the mind ; or, if the process 
were even partially effected, nothing but The SUB- 
STANCE of Things would remain ; for the Things them- 
selves must have Form, in order to remain Things ; 
and Form consists of precisely these Abstract Points, Lines 
and Surfaces, which, when analyzed, are Nothings ; 
except for the Keason or the Mind's eye, within us. 

167. So in respect to Number ; A Unit is not a real 
object, not anything Concrete or sensibly real ; not a 
mineral, a vegetable or an animal; though it may 
represent any of these. So of any number of Units. 
A Sum is only an aggregation of Units, or of Pure 
Nothings ; except to the reason. Number is there- 



140 THOUGHT-LINES AND -SURFACES. 

fore, as well as Form, an Abstract Domain. A 
repeats a Point, a Sum of Units repeats an Aggregation 
of Points ; both of these may be representative of an 
Aggregation of Things, as of Stars, for instance, in the 
Heavens ; but the moment we make this Real appli- 
cation of them, we have gone over from the Abstract 
to the Concrete Domain. 

168. Between any two Units in a Sum, between the 
separate Units in the Number Two, for instance, there 
is an almost imperceptible Thought-line, which con- 
nects them together, and makes them into a Sum. This 
Thought-line repeats the Geometrical Line as reaching 
from one Point to another in Space. If three Units 
are held in the mind connectedly, and at the same 
time, they are necessarily in the same Thought-plane ; 
that is to say, there is a filmy -surface in the mind's 
perception, in which the three points lie, of which we 
are ordinarily unconscious, but which can be brought out 
by Close Reflection; as the picture upon a daguer- 
reotype plate is developed by a chemical process. 
Through the existence of these very Attenuated or Ab- 
stract Thought-lines, and Thought- Surf aces, intervening 
among the Units of Number, there is an exact Echo of 
Likeness (hitherto occult), between The Elements, or 
Least and Lowest Components, of Number and the 
known Elements of Form. It is here that an exact 
Analogy between The Two Grand Departments of the 
Mathematics the Geometrical, and the Abstract (the 
Calculus) takes origin, a n Analogy which Universology, 
in its Scientological or Ejcact Branch, dcvelopes into (in 
immense new science of Symbolic Morphology, and Deter- 



THOUGHT-POINTS. 141 

minate Correspondences. Abstract PRINCIPLES, as Ori- 
gins, repeat Points; and LAWS, inherent in Being, cor- 
respond in like manner with Lines. Logic, in the 
grand sense, as the Science of Laws and Principles, is 
thus also swept into the same circle of Correspondences 
or Analogies. Spencer reckons Logic and The Mathe- 
matics as the only Abstract Sciences. Univer- 
sological Scientology is a Third ; and remains to be 
demonstrated to the Scientific world. LAWS and 
PRINCIPLES, are, then, another special variety of Ab- 
stractions. 

169. It will be a first step towards comprehending 
these mysteries of Abstraction, and one of the least 
difficult ones, to realize that a Unit ; not any thing 
whatsoever, (as an apple, or a block) ; but a purely 
Abstract Unit of Number, is a Thought-Point, in the 
mind ; nothing more and nothing less than that. It 
is not (necessarily), even in imagination, posited ox put 
at any particular place in External Space, but it is 
nevertheless posited as a point of thought, rationally, 
or before the mind's eye ; in, as it were, an Internal 
Thought-Space, or "in the Mind." These exceeding 
subtleties or refinements of Speculation on the Echoes 
or Correspondences of what happens in different 
Spheres of Being ; as, here, bettueen Number and Form 
in their very Elements ; loom up, in the higher depart- 
ments of Universology, into great importance. The 
subject is only introduced here, incidentally, to aid 
in furnishing an idea of Abstractness or The Abstract; 
which extends to and covers the whole field of those 
concei^tions which are so fiiic that they only exist Bz- 



142 NEGATISM BECOME POSITIVE. 

fore the, Mind, or in the Scope of the Reason ; but which 
externally, and as things to be seen by the natural 
eye, or heard, snielled, tasted, or handled, are Pure 
Nothings. 

170. And yet these same Abstract Ideas, as Units, 
Points, Lines, Surfaces, and those finer Thought- 
Lines and Thought- Surf aces, intervening among Units 
(or Thought-Points), are, from the High Scientific, or 
Abstract (also called the Logical) Point of View, more 
POSITIVE and EEAL Things, than Kocks, Trees and 
Animal Bodies ; somewhat as superheated steam, or 
gas, which bursts a solid encasement of rock or iron 
(though in another sense far finer and feebler than 
it) is, in this encasement, more Positive or Potent 
than the Bock or Iron itself. Or, as for a better il- 
lustration the Diamond-Point which cuts the Glass, 
though a mere point (and hence, theoretically, as it 
were, a Nothing) is stronger and wore Positive, more 
a Real Something, than the more massive Glass itself. 
Or, again, The Thin and Vanishing Edge of any Cut- 
ting instrument, though a Mere Edge, that is to say, 
a mere Line, (as nearly as any thing Concrete, for the 
knife is still Concrete, can be the imitation of an Ab- 
stract thing such as a Line is, geometrically consid- 
ered), is Positive to the wood, or meat, or other Concrete 
Object, which it cuts ; and the Concrete Object is, as 
it were, Negative, or a mere Nothing before it. Such 
or similar is the relation between the Ken or K aness 
(the acumen) of the Intellect, or those Clean-cut Dis- 
criminations which represent it, (as Point*, Linen, Prin- 
ciples, Definitions, Laws and Relations), and the Gross 



WHY THE ABSTRACT IS THE SCIENTIFIC. 143 

Outer Substances and Objects to which we subse- 
quently apply them. So it is, also, that Points and 
Lines which are really the Domain of the Science 
of Geometry, the leading (relatively " Concrete ") 
branch of Mathematics and Units or Thought-Points, 
the Subject-Matter or Domain of Arithmetic (or the 
Calculus), another (and the more Abstract) branch of 
Mathematics; that the Mathematics, in fine, are or 
belong to The Scientifically Positive or Governing 
Domain of Being ivliich is "The Abstract ; " as against 
the whole world of Sensibly Real Things, which are 
The Concrete. This happens while, at the same time, 
this whole Abstract Domain of Being is, from the Na- 
tural, Real, or Materialistic Point of View, no Being 
at all ; a mere congeries of Pure Nothings ; a Set of 
Ideal Positings (Puttings of Points) and Cuts of mere 
External Yacant Space, or still more subtly, of 
Thought-Space ; or of still other Pure Nothings. 

171. But why is this Nothing-Realm, The Abstract, 
assumed, as in the last preceding paragraph, to be 
more cognate or closely allied with Science, than the 
Real World of Objective or Concrete Things ? It is 
because the outer Real World is Nature ; or has the 
same alliance with Nature which the Abstract World 
has with Science ; and because Nature is Spon- 
taneous and utterly (or, at least, seemingly so) 
Irregular. There are, for example, positively no 
Straightnesses or Straight Lines in Nature. The near- 
est approach to Straightness in her domain is, per- 
haps, in the Edges of Crystals ; but even these suf- 
ficiently magnified, or, at any rate, when tested by 



144 NATURE TRANSMUTED INTO ART. 

the ideal sfraightness of a mathematical line, are ir- 
regular. But sfraightness is the one essential quality 
of a Rule or Ruhr ; and so of a LAW which is a Rule 
of Conduct, or a Regulator of our ways of Thinking, 
and hence of Acting. We cannot, therefore, look to 
Nature for RuL s or Laws ; and Science itself being 
nothing but a Systematized Collection of Rules and 
Laws, it follows that we cannot look to Nature 
for Science, in the highest, most exact sense of that 
term. Even in Astronomy, it is not the bodies 
of the sun and planets, primarily, but only thrir 
geometrical relations, which we study. From the High 
Scientological Point of View, Abstract Science is, there- 
fore, THE ONLY TRUE SCIENCE ; Natural and all Obser- 
vational Science is Pseudo-Science ; or, at least, Sub- 
ordinate and less positively entitled to the name. 

172. In Pure Ideal, in Thought itself, in Blank Ex- 
ternal Space, or in the Echoing Mind-Space within, 
nothing hinders us from drawing Lines Absolutely 
straight, (saving an ulterior transcendental criticism 
upon even this statement.) It is here, therefore, and 
here alone, that we can establish RULES, and LAWS, and 
Systematic Scientific -Schemes of Thought, witli which 
afterwards to compare the Deviations of Nature ; by 
which, therefore, to measure Nature ; and so even ulti- 
mately to control and systematize her operations ; to 
regenerate NATURE, in fine, through SCIENCE ; and so, 
ultimately, to convert the Crude Realm of Nature into 
the Sublime, Beautiful and Divine Realm of ART. 

173. It follows, therefore, as said above, that Science 
is radically planted in " The Abstract," and not in 

7 



TWO KINDS OF TRUTH. 145 

"The Concrete;' That Abstract Science, as The 
Mathematics and the Logic of Being, or, otherwise, 
Exact Science, is SCIENCE pre-eminently, or Science 
in the ruling sense ; and that Concrete Science or 
The Natural Sciences are only Scientific in a Secondary 
and Inferior sense. 

174. Some quarrel arises, however, at this point, be- 
tween The Mathematics and The Natural Sciences. 
As Natural Science proceeds upon the minute and 
careful Observation of Nature, what it perceives 
and records, must, it is urged, be true although its 
Facts are confessedly full of deviations, intertwinings 
and overlappings, which nearly defy classification at 
all ; and absolutely defy EXACT CLASSIFICATION, such as 
is illustrated by /Straight Lines, Squares and Cubes, in 
Geometry. On the other hand, Mathematical prop- 
ositions, as that Two are Equal to Two, that Two 
and Two are Four, that a Square has (and must 
have) four Eight Angles, are not only true, but are 
peculiarly true, not to the Exterior Senses, but to the 
Reason ; and even in the sense that it is inconceivable 
that they should be otherwise. 

175. The Solution is that there are two kinds of 
Truth; one addressed to the Senses, and one to the 
Pure Reason. To discuss radically the claims, rank 
and offices of each of these hemispheres of truth 
would take us too much aside from the present pur- 
pose. It must suffice to indicate the issue, as the 
real issue in the conflict of all past thinking ; and as, 
again, especially, the rising issue of the hour. The so- 
called ""Positive Science" now triumphantly dominant 



146 SUBDIVISION OF ABSTRACT AND CONCRETE. 

in the Scientific World, stands, representatively, for 
the Supremacy of the Senses, of Observational Knowl- 
edge, of Materialistic Realities and Tendencies, or, 
in a word, of Nature over Science. Universological 
Scientology will re-assert and vindicate, on the con- 
trary, the Ruling Function and Legitimate Supremacy 
of the Abstract and Absolute Reason ; of Reflective 
and Analytical Truth ; of Spiritualistic Realities and 
Tendencies ; or, in a word, of Science proper ; of the 
Higher Positivism, over Nature or the crudity of the 
Primitive Appearances. The Theologica-Metaphysical 
First Essay of Thinking has yielded or is yielding, it 
is true, to Observational Positivism ; butUniversology, 
reverting from this surrender ; on higher grounds ; 
while standing on and affirming in-full that Observational 
Basis, (but merely as basis), reasserts the Superior 
Dominion of the PURE REASON ; the Metaphysics of 
Science itself. 

176. The Abstract is named, Alwali, Sliaup,io (cf. 
Eng. shape, as Form ; Ger. sc7iqffe.n, TO MAKE) ; and the 
Concrete is &SiaiiI>,io (139.) These, again, subdivide 
immediately into their own Abstracts or Concretes, 
respectively. Within the Concretismus, fo.r example, 
all Light, Thin, or Attenuated and Trivial Objects, 
and markedly such as, by some other quality than 
massiveness or weight, attest inherent power ; as the 
gases and cutting edges above cited (170) ; echo, from 
their place in the Concrete world (for such objects 
are still concrete), to the Entire Pure - act W<>il<l, 
outside of the Concrete ; while Sulky and Heavy Ob- 
jects within the Concretismus echo, or rep.vit within 



ANALOGUES DEFINED. 147 

The Concrete, the Entire Concrete World itself. This 
echo (of the Abstracted of The Concrete to the Ab- 
stract, and of, as in the instance just given, the Con- 
cretozcZ of the same to the Concrete) is an instance, 
and an important one, of Scientific Analogy, (11.) 

177. The Objects and Ideas which so repeat each 
other, are called ANALOGUES of each other ; and this 
subtle echoing character of Objects to Objects, of 
Ideas to Ideas, of Objects to Ideas, of Objects and 
Ideas to entire Spheres or Domains of Being, of Do- 
mains to Domains, and the like, throughout all the 
Departments of Being, is what is meant by " Universal 
Analogy" or "The Doctrine of Correspondences," as 
it is now specifically discovered, and is about to be 
utilized in the Sciences. It is this discovery which 
renders a Universal Language and a Universal Sci- 
ence possible, because it establishes the possibility 
of a True although Transcendental Classification of 
All Things, and even of all possible Ideas. 1 

178. Nothing can be more striking, to one who is 
familiar with the qualities of Sound, than the exact 
appropriateness of the Thin, Light, (or Abstractoid) 
Class of the Consonant-Sounds, t, k, p, etc., to the 
denotation of The Abstract, universally, (THE AB- 
STKACTISMUS), and of all the Details and Particulars 
of the same ; and of the Thick, Heavy, (or Concre- 

1 1 cannot speak too highly of the recent work of Dr. McCosh, on 
" The Discursive Laws of Thought " (Logic), as furnishing to the 
careful student one of the best preparations for the still subtler 
definitions, and the deeper descent into the profundities, of the 
Universolomcal Abstract. S. P. A. 



148 "SPIRIT" AND "THE SPIEIT er TRUTH.' 



toid) Class d, g, I, etc., to that of The Concrete, uni- 
versally, (THE CONCRETISMUS), and its Particulars. 

179. In addition to the several namings for these 
two Classes of Sounds, previously noticed (113), Prof. 
Elsberg has very happily called the Thin Sounds Un- 
intoned, and the Thick or Heavy Sounds Intoned, refer- 
ring to the Vocalify (the same Substance of Sound 
which makes the Vowels), which is brought up from 
the Larynx and blended with The Abstracts for the 
production of The Concretes. They might also be 
named Consonets and Gonsonads. (B. O. c. 7, t. 43.) 

180. Concrete Objects, Heal Things, and Persons, as 
regards their Personality, exhale or emane those Finer 
Odylic Substances or Spheral Essences (" Spheres ' 
or Atmospheres) which are ordinarily meant by Spirit 
in the diffusive sense of the term ; the Analogues oS! 
which are the Cosmical Airs, Ethers, and Auras, and 
the more determinate Radiations (as of Light, Heat, 
Electricity and Magnetism) which infill the Inter- 
stices between the Planets and blend them by Influx 
and Efflux ; but Abstract Entities, as Lines and Laws 
(168) project still finer Spiritual AXIALITIES which pen- 
etrate, and co-ordinate, or organize the more Massive 
and unstable Spirit of The Concrete, wliich otherwise 
" bloweth where it listeth." These last are " the Spirit 
of Trtiih" or of Science and of Inherent Necessity and 
Laic THE SCIENTIFIC SPIRIT. (B. O. c. 8, t. 9 ; a. 47, 
48, t. 204 ; t. 634 ; and B. O. Vocnlultinj w. Spirit ; see 
also what is said ch. xi. of the Bi-triiiacria, and con- 
ceive the Projci'liiii/ Picijnhnicc Radiations, axially, 
from the Intellectual or Eational Axes of Being.) 



CHAPTER X. 

EE-STATEMENT AND EXPANSION OF THE CLASSIFICATION 
OF THE EEALMS OB DOMAINS OF BEING ; WITH NAM- 
INGS IN THE TERMINATIONS -10, -SO, AND -TO. 

181. The present chapter will be devoted mainly to 
a further exercise in word-building, and with the pre- 
dominance given to the namings of Domains by the use 
of the termination -io ; (with -so, and -to.) It will be 
the close thinker oillv, and one who is somewhat versed 

*j * 

in Philosophical discriminations who will fully ap- 
preciate the far-reaching and exhaustive nature of 
the Analysis, upon which these namings depend. 

Au,io, (ah-oo-ee-o), The REALiTY-Doraain (as con- 
trasted with Limitation^ THE HOMOGENEOUS; The 
Qws/-Indeterrainate, The Qwasi-Inarticulate ; Proto- 
plasmal, Confused. 

Au n io, (ah-oo n -ee-o), The Incompre7iensibiUty-Do- 
main, The Unknowable, THE PURE RATIONAL; The 
Cardinary or Transcendental Philosophical Realm. 

Engkauvlio, (eng-kah-oov-lee-o), or Shaumblio, 
(shah-oombl-ee-o), THE HETEROGENEOUS ; represents 
collectively the Consonants, as Au,io does the Yowels. 



150 DOMAINS, IN -10. 

Laumbzhio, (lali-oombzli-ee-o), THE LIMITARY or 
RELATIONAL (Lat. re, BACK, and lotus, SIDE) ; Ke-sicliDg 
or Coaptation of borders or edges ; (cf. Lat. limbus, 
EDGE, BOEDER ; Eng. limb.) 

Xau,io, (kah-oo-ee-o), The Parking, De-part-ing, 
Parf-uritional, Originative, Cfows-ative Domain ; The 
Domain of the THEREFORE, (for that reason, or 
cause the Logical Conclusion) ; Eml-to-end-ness, 
Demonstration, Indexism, Indication ; Logic, as to 
Co-Sequenciation or the process of Ratiocination, 
(The Chain of Logical Reasoning SEQUENCES.) 

Aukio, (ah-ook-ee-o), The Counter-PART-ing, Adjust- 
ative, Correlative Domain ; Side-by-side-ness (Lat. con, 
WITH, re, BACK and latus, SIDE) ; The Analogical, Corre- 
spondential, Comparological Domain. Logic as Ana- 
Logic, or the Law and Doctrine* of Correspondences. 

(Kauldo is the unition of the preceding two, and 
is the Panlological or Total Logical Domain relates 
to the distribution of Parts. B. O. c. 8, t. 15.) 

Tau,io, (tah-oo-ee-o), The Point-ing, A.p-point-mg, 
Designating Domain; The Given-Individuality-Do- 
main. 

Aut,io, (ah-oot-ee-o), The Counter-point-ing or Al- 
ternative Domain ; (The others, things or persons.) 

(Tautio is the uuition of the preceding two, and is 
the Entirety-Domain, as contrasted with the parts ; 
cf. Fr. tout, ALL.) 

Pau,io, (pah-oo-ee-o), The Positivitv-Domain ; the 
Hinge-wise Integration of the Whole and the Parts ; 
Mechanization; (cf. La(. oos-, Eng. 



DOMAINS, IN -10. 151 

Aupio, (ali-oop-ee-o), The (7o?mfer-Positivity-Do- 
main ; the Dubiosity-Domain, Possibility, May-be ; 
(cf. Eng. " qpcw-to-doubt.") (B. O. 632.) 

Qau,io, (tshah-oo-ee-o), The Abstract Distribu- 
tive ; The Selective or Elective Domain ; (cf. Eng. 
choice, choose.*) 

Augio (ah-ootsh-io), The Abstract Alternating or 
Counterpointing Distributive Domain ; (cf. Eng. each.) 

Thau,io, (thah-oo-ee-o), The Abstract Pivotal, and 
Stabiliological ; (cf. Gr. tkeos, GOD.) 

Auth,io, (ah-ooth-ee-o), The Abstract Counter-piv- 
otal. 

Gau,io, (gah-oo-ee-o), The Proceeding, On-going, 
or " Becoming "-Domain ; (cf. Eng. go.) 

Aug,io, (ah-oog-ee-o), The Counter-Proceeding, 
Resisting, Antagonizing Domain ; Action or the Effort 
to overcome ; (cf. Lat. ag-o, TO ACT, Eng. agony, etc.) 

Dau,io, (dah-oo-ee-o), The Hard, Permanent, Ob- 
jective, Enduring Domain ; (cf. Lat. dur-us, HARD.) 

Audio, (ah-ood-ee-o), The Counter-Objective Do- 
main ; Adjunctive and Coadjutive ; (cf. Eng. aid) ; 
Reverberation ; (cf. Lat. aud,ire, TO HEAR.) 

Bau,io, (bah-oo-ee-o), The Corporate, or Incorpo- 
rate Domain ; (cf. for meaning, Lat. corpus, BODY.) 

Au,bio (ah-oob-ee-o), The Counter-Corporate-Do- 
main ; The Inert or Dead-body Domain. 

Jau,io, ( jah-oo-ee-o), The Concrete Distributive 
Domain ; (see cauio.) 



152 DOMAINS, IN -10. 

Auj,io, (ah-ooj-ee-o), The Concrete Alternating or 
Counter-pointing Distributive Domain; (see auio). 

Jaujio distribution and counter-distribution ; mu- 
tual assignment of parts; (cf. Eng. judge, judgment, 
etc.) 

Dhauio, (dhah-oo-ee-o), The Concrete Standard- 
and-Pivotal Domain; Siabiliological. (B. O. t. 632.) 

Audhio, (ah-oodh-ee-o), The Concrete Counter- 
Standard - and - Pivotal Domain; (see thau,io and 
auth,io.) 

Shau,io, (shah-oo-ee-o), The Abstract Ramification- 
Domain ; within Limits, whence THE CONDITIONED. 

Aushio, (ah-oosh-ee-o), The Abstract Counter- 
Ramification-Domain ; The Conditioning, whence, it- 
self, THE UNCONDITIONED. 

Sau,io, (sah-oo-ee-o), The Collective Individuality- 
Domain ; (/7icMec?-Many-Pointism) ; within Limits, 
whence THE FINITE ; (cf. Engkauvlio, 127.) 

Au(s),io, (ah-oos-ee-o), The Counter-Collective In- 
dividuality-Domain (IfocMerf-Many-Pomtism) ; with- 
out or outside of and beyond Limits ; whence THE 
INFINITE ; (126 ; cf. Ger. cms, OUT.) 

Fau,io, (fah-oo-ee-o), THE PRACTICAL or ACTUAL 
Domain ; The Hinge-wise or Cardinated Pvelation of 
The Finite and The Infinite ; (cf. Eng. fact.) 

Aufio, (ah-oof-ec-o), The Counter-Actual-Domain ; 
Schemative ; Tna THEORETICAL Domain, The Suppo- 
sititious; (cf. Eng. f/'.) 



DOMAINS, IN -10. 153 

Mau,io, (mah-oo-ee-o), The Exterior ; THE OBJECT- 
IVE (Realm) ; THE MACROCOSM, (The Big World.) 

Nau,io, (nah-oo-ee-o), The Interior ; THE SUBJECT- 
ive (Realm) ; THE MICROCOSM, (The Little World.) 

Aungio, (ah-oong-ee-o), "The Mean State or Con- 
striction between The Objective and The Subject- 
ive, in which Reason consists," (see Comte's Catechism 
of Positive Religion., Eng. Ed. p. 168.) (Cf. Lat. an- 
guis, THE SERPENT, from the idea of throttling or con- 
striction round the waist or throat ; Eng. anguish, 
terrible stress or stringency of sorrow.) 

Aumio, (ah-oorn-ee-o), " THE ENVIRONMENT," of any 
generalized unity. 

Aunio, (ah-oon-ee-o), Any Given Generalized Uni- 
ty ; The Environed ; The given Subject, under con- 
sideration ; The Core or Centrum, which the Matrix 
or Medium encloses ; ONE ; A ONE ; ANY THING. 

Lauio, (lah-oo-ee-o), THE LONG RUN ; Ulterior and 
Reactionary Consequence; The (Realm or) Career of 
The Eternities ; (Gentleness, Calmness, Rest) ; The 
Integral, Continuous, Entire ; (of. Eng. long, longing, 
lingering. 

Rau,io, (rah-oo-ee-o), THE SHORT RUN ; Direct and 
Immediate Consequence; The (Realm or) Career of 
The Temporalities, (Disturbance, Trouble, Transi- 
toriness) ; The Broken, The Fractional ; (cf. Eng. rack, 
rag, rocky.) 

Aulio, (ah-ool-ee-o), The FINAL or ULTIMATE, (con- 
tinuing to the end), The Complete, The Falling or 
Failing, The Mature ; (cf . Eng. Old.) 



154 DOMAINS, IN -10. 

Aurio, (ah-oor-ee-o), THE INCIPIENT or IMMEDIATE ; 
that of the HOUR ; The New, The Young ; The Eising 
(as of the Sun), The Original ; (cf. Lat. hora, Ital. ora, 
Eng. hour; Lat. on'go, on'gen ; Lat. or,rior,TQ RISE, 
and or-do, for on'-do, ORDER, etc.) 

Hau,io, (hah-oo-ee-o), THE SPIRITUAL (Eealm), The 
Spirit-world, or Spiritual-Rational Universe, (God, 
Men, Spirits) ; The World of Spiritualities ; " The 
Church." 

Yau,io, (yah-oo-ee-o), TheBealm or World of Piv- 
otal Spiritualities ; THE PERSONAL (Domain) ; The 
Guild of Personages ; of distinguished or Represent- 
ative Individuals ; of " Stars " (central and radiating 
entities and personalities) ; " The Court " (of 
Heaven.) 

Wau,io, (wah-oo-ee-o), The World of Intercom- 
munications, Intercourse, Interchanges, Language, 
Commerce, etc. ; of Conversation, Association, So- 
ciety; "The World." 

182. The remainder of this chapter is occupied by 
certain Special branches of Distribution, related to 
what precedes, either as more specific, or as otherwise 
elaborative of the same ideas. They are merely speci- 
mens of what becomes an infinite expansion, a limit- 
less ocean, of verbal Forms, as the INHERENT NATURAL 
NAMLNGS of every possible variety of Human Thought, 
and of External Being. These, in turn, force the 
thought into new channels of Discrimination and 
Analysis ; both tasking and culturing the intellectual 
powers : 



DOMAINS IN -10. 155 

Alio, (ahl-ee-o), THE UNIVERSAL. 



Al,ia, (ahl-ee-ah), "QUALITY" 



' Au,io, (ah-oo-ee-o), " REALITY " Kant 

Laumpshio, (lah-oompsh-ee-o), or Limit- 
oio "LIMITATION "Kant. 



Kant. Aungio, (ah-oong-ee-o), The Indifference of 

Being; "No Matter;" "NEGATION" 
[ Kant. 

(The Essence of The Keality is kw,al-ia, or kw,al-iti.) 

Au,io distributed. 

I,io, (ee-ee-o), Domain of Entities (Things.) 

E,io, (a-ee-o), " Relations ; Sidings, Wings. 

.4,io, (a(ir)-ee-o), " Materioidal Essences, Etherial Emanations. 

A,io, (ah-ee-o), Material Realities ; Gross Substances. 

/".io, (uh-ee-o), " Temporalities, Transitory Things ; Sublunary. 

0,io, (aw-ee-o), Spiritualities, Permanencies (The Firmament.) 

O,io, (o-ee-o), Luminosities, Ideas, Theory. 

U,io, (oo-ee-o), Turbidities, Mixed Movements, Practicalities. 

Iu,io, (ee-oo-ee-o), " Conjunctures, Events, Copulations, Transits or Crossings. 

0i,io, (aw-ee-ee-o)," Superincumbencies, Overshadowings, Masculisms. 

J.i,io, (ah-ee-ee-o), " Subrecumbencies, Fundamenta, Feminisms. 

183. The distribution of au n io repeats the " same ' 
series in the Cardinary or Transcendental sense. So, 
also : 

Ie,io, (ee-a-ee-o), THE ELEMENTISMXTS. (82.) 

J.,io, (a(ir)-ee-o), THE NASCENT STATE, intermediate between Elementism and 
Elaborated Composition. 



Au,io, (ah-oo-ee-o), THE ELABOKISMITS, (82.) 
(From below upwards.) 



3. U,io, (oo-ee-o), Indeterminate 
ART. 

2. O,io, (o-ee-o), Indeterminate 
SCIENCE. 

l.A.io, (ah-ee-o), Indeterminate 
NAT ORE. 



Iau,io, (ee-ah-oo-ee-o), The Summation of the Elementismus with the Elaboris- 
mus, including the Nascent State as Intermediate or Transitional. 

184. Or, re-stated in short, we have : 



156 ADJECTIVES IN -SO. 



j lio The Entical Realm ; of Entities, Beings, Things. 
I Eio -The Relative World ; of Relations, Laws. 

Aio The Magic World; TranamutationaL 

Aio THE EARTH ; The Mundane World. 

Z7io " Continuity ; " The Time World. (Transitory.) 

Oio u Solidarity ; " The Space World, (Eternal.) 

Oio The Ideal World ; Imaginative. 

Uio The Practical World, (Mixed, Turbid.) 

luio The Germinative World ; (Einbryotic.) 

0iio HEAVEN. (Space-Centre-World.) 

Aiio HELL. (Earth-Centre-World.) 

Engkauvlio (eng-kali-oov-lee-o) distributed. 

Mlauio, (mlah-oo-ee-o), GENERALIZATION nickok. 
Shaubio (shah-oob-ee-o), SPECIALIZATION Hickok. 
Hwauio, (hwah-oo-eo o), PARTICUXARIZATION Hickok. 

Sliaubio distributed. 

Shaupio, (shah-oop-ee-o ; cf. Eng. shape), THE ABSTRACT Spencer. 
Zhaubio, (zhah-oob-ee-o), THE CONCRETE. Spencer. 

185. Adjective Distribution of Au,io. 

Iso, (ee-so), Absolute; Ontological; but in the Auso sense (t. 126). 
Eso, (a-so), Relative ; but within the Au,io (t. 127). 

.Aso, (a-so), Etherial, Thin, Attenuated; Spirit-like-Material. 

Aso, (ah-so), (Gross-) Substantial ; Thick, Dense ; Solid-like Material. 

Vso, (uh-so), temporal, temporary, transitory, sublunary. 
0so, (aw-so), Spa-ce-al, eternal, permanent, celestial. 

Oso, (o-so), Tfieoretical, aspectual, clear, luminous, full-face. 
Uso, (oo-so), Practical, experiential, dubious, turbid, averted. 

luso, (ee-oo-so), Conjunctional, copulative. 

<9iso, (aw-ee-so), mounting ; covering, overshadowing ; male. 
Aiso, (ah-ee-BO), substrate, covered, occult ; female. 

Mlauio distributed. 

Mau,io, (mah-oo-ee-o), THE OBJECTIVE Kant, Comte. 
Nau,io, (nah-oo-ee-o), THE SUBJECTIVE-- Kant, Comte. 



SUBSTANTIVES IN -TO. 157 

Aungio, (ah-oong-ee-o), The Intermediate RATIONAL Comte, Catechism, p. 
1G8. For notice of the omission of this mean term by Kant, see " Ves- 
tiges of Civilization," p. 51. 

Aunio, (ah-oon-ee-o), THE INHERENT ; Proprium Swedenborg. 
Aumio, (ah-oom-ee-o), TUB MEDIUM or ENVIRONMENT Comte, Spencer. 

Lrauio distributed. 

Lau,io, (lah-oo-ec-o), THE LONG RUN ; ULTERIOR AND REACTIONARY CONSE- 
QUENCE, see " Structural Outline." 

Rau,io. (rah-oo-ee-o), THE SHORT RUN; DIRECT AND IMMEDIATE CONSEQUENCE, 
see "Structural Outline." 

Mnaungio, (mnah-oong-ee-o), TUB GENERAL STATIC ; The Statical Comte. 

Lrauio, (Irah-oo-ee-o), THE GENERAL MOTIC ; " The Dynamical," as it should 
have been conceived by Comte, who, however, went over, here, to his 
" Three States " which are eminently Special, instead of being General ; 
not, therefore, of the same order as Mau and Nau. 



Shaupio distributed. 



Kaupio, (kah-oop-ee-o ; cf. Fr. coiqj-er, TO CUT), THE CUT ; the Domain of Cut- 
up ; Outlay, Outline ; Simple ; Co-existential. 

Shaufio, (shah-oof-ee-o ; cf. Eng. shape ; Ger. schaff-en, TO CREATE), THE MAKE ; 
the Domain of Fabrication, Creation, " The Becoming; " Complex ; Co- 
sequential. 

Oaubio, fgah-oob-ee-o ; cf. Eng. gob\ Aggregation, THE INORGANIC WORLD 

.(Gau "Force," jau "Mixture," Ban " Structure," Vest, of Ore., p. 162.) 
Zhauvio, (zhah-oov-ee-o), THE ORGANIC WORLD ; (zho Vegetable, zo Animal, 

Vo Mental; sight, insight ;" Growth," "Life," "Mind," Vest, of Cre., 

p. 3620 

186. Substantive Distribution in -to. 

Ito, Being, Thing, Entity ; Centre. 

Eto, Side-wise Adjunct ; Wing, Relation. 

ylto, a ghost, effigy, attenuated object. 

Ato. a Substancial Object. 

ZTto, fluxionoid object. 

<9to, a solid or permanent object. 

Oto, a hyaline or clear object ; an Idea. 

Uto, an opaque object, etc. 



CHAPTER XL 

SPECIAL AND TECHNICAL INSTANCES OF THE COMPOSITION 
OF ALWASO WORDS. ILLUSTRATION OF ALWASO GRAM- 
MATICAL STRUCTURE. 

187. It may be appropriate to give at least a single 
illustration of the unequaled Capacities of ATwato to 
serve as the Lingual Instrument for Technical Ex- 
pression, by the amount and precision of the Mean- 
ing or Meanings which may be compressed into the 
single word. 

188. Conceive, in the mind, in the first instance, a 
Figure composed of Three Straight Lines cutting 
each other, centrally and at right angles (in the diam- 
eters of the three dimensions), and this figure placed 
(as to Posture or Position), so that One of these 
Lines (the dimension of thickness) shall stand per- 
pendicularly to the earth's surface. This FIGURE- 
AND-PosiTiON is one of peculiar value and importance 
in the study of COSMICAL MORPHOLOGY, a New Branch 
of Science growing out of Universology ; and is a 
Figure-and-Position for the simple naming of which 
the resources of our Old Style Languages are wholly 
inadequate. In " The Basic Outline of Universol- 



COSMICAL MORPHOLOGY. 159 

ogy ' it has been called Bi-trinacria, a word which 
denotes, however, no more (for the want of a better 
term) than any object having six (twice three) Legs 
or Arms. 

189. To illustrate more concretely this important 
idea (of the Basic Bi-trinacria of the Cosmical Outlay) 
one may conceive of a simple Ordinary Turn-style 
(having a standard-post with two sets of arms at 
right angles) ; but, to be more definite, imagine the 
four arms adjusted to the four cardinal points of the 
compass, North, South, East and West, and the 
centering or standard-post to the Zenith and Nadir. 

190. This Figure-and-Posture is very fundamental 
or governing in the Morphic Distribution of the Earth 
and Heavens ; in the Plumb-centering, and Orientation 
of the Great World-Dome which stands above us ; 
and this again in alliance with the Pathagnomic 
Lines in the Structure of the Human Body and 
Head ; l with the Heavens and Hells in the Spiritual 
Cosmogony of Swedenborg ; with Abstract Ethical 
or Moral Conceptions and Science (as when we 
speak of the Uprightness of a character), with the 
Nature of Chemical Substances (see Introduction), 
with numerous other branches of Science and Phil- 
osophy ; and, pre-eminently, with the Analogical Echo- 
ing of each of these aspects of Being to every other. 

191. By reference to these Axial Lines of Cosmical 
Structure, and by the Analogical Outworkings of 



1 " Outlines of Anthropology," by Joseph R. Buchanan. For 
Definitions, see Vocabulary, p. xi-xi : i. 



160 THE BI-TRINACRIA. 

Principles and Laws derived from and relating to 
them, the Shapings of all things in the Universe and 
their Correlations in situ will come to be as well un- 
derstood scientifically, in the final Outworkings of 
Universology, as the parts and connections of any 
simple machinery ; and these, in turn, will become 
the infallible Working Patterns or Models to guide 
us in our Industrial, Political, Societary, Moral and 
Religious Constitutions and CONSTRUCTIONS of all sorts. 

192. The earliest, and, for a time, the governing use 
of Alwato will be to supply all the old and the new sci- 
ences (those begotten of Universology) with Nomen- 
clatures of infinite potency, minuteness, and exten- 
sion ; to reconstitute, in a word, the entire Word- 
World of Technicality, in Science, and in Art, and 
in Practical Life. 

193. To revert, now, to the proper Alwaso descrip- 
tion of the Figure-and-Posture in question (190), the 
following statement of the Yocal Elements, and their 
Meanings, and of the resulting technical Namings 
involved, will be sufficiently intelligible : 

E, relation, siding. 

k, cut, division, distribution, limitation. 

w, doubleness, counterpositional equation, or 

wing-like expansion. 
a, the substance (or even mere space) which is 

cut, limited or described. 
1, prolongation, liniar extension, 
-sta, a termination meaning System. 

In combination, e,kwal,sta, meaning Relational (o) 



E,KWAL;A,KRIN,STA. 161 

Cut, Division, or Distribution (k), equally duplicated 
or adjusted in balance (w), of the Cosinical Sub- 
stance or Expansion (a), predated (1), in the opposite 
directions, or as elongated arms (of the Bi-trinacria) ; 
,sta System or Schemative arrangement. This is a 
sufficiently accurate description of the object or con- 
ception under consideration, in respect, only, however, 
still, to CONFIGURATION, which is only the Absolute (or 
iso) Factor or Constituent of Form, (cf. Eng. Equal.) 
It remains to describe the Posture or Position which 
is assigned to the Figure in question, (230, Relative). 

194. The composition of this definition of posture 
is the following : 

K, cut or division (de-liniation.) 

1, laxity, permitting inclination or deviation from 
standard Directional Positions. 

r, rigor, resisting inclination or subsidence from 
the standard positions ; (cf. Gr. JcLin-em, TO LEAN or 
INCLINE, and &Rw-ein, TO JUDGE ; to exercise the func- 
tion of a judge ; that is to say, to non-incline to the 
right or left ; to be impartial ; to decide equitably ; 
to hold the balance of justice.) 

195. Krin,sta is, then, a System or Constitution (Lat. 
con, WITH amd. statuo, TO SET UP, allied with, sto, stare, TO 
STAND), a standing together (of, in this case, Lines or 
Axes) in a Posture or Position non-inclined from the 
Standard Directions (Perpendicular and Horizontal.) 
The prefixing of a (ah) A,krinsta gives Substance 
or Keality ; whence it follows that e,kwal;a 5 krm,sta is 
the technicality sought for. 

The scientific definition of this single compound 



162 THE COSMICAL BI-TRINACPJA. 



word, ekwalakrinsta, is, then, as follows : The Con- 
figurative Cosmical Bi-trinacria, posited ??,o?i-inclinis- 
mally (or without leaning) in exact adjustment to the 
Perpendicular and the Horizon ; or, more fully : The 
Universal Principle of Cosmical Adjustment eymbol- 
ized by a Figure composed of Three Axial Straight 
Lines crossing and cutting each other, Centrally, at 
Bight Angles ; and erected, as to Position and Di- 
rections, upon one of its Axes placed perpendicularly 
to a Basis-surface (as that of the Earth) ; so as by 
its Non-indinism and Regulated Equation, in all Senses 
or Directions, to serve as the General Measurer of 
Exactitude or Non-deviation on the one hand, and 
as Points (or Base-lines) of Departure, on all sides, 
from which to determine the degree of Inclination, 
Deviation or Declinature, of all- sorts, on the other 
hand. A single word charged with this amount of 
meaning, of a new and rare variety, but of intrinsi- 
cally scientific importance, for a conception, without 
which first fundamentally posited in the mind, all 
constructive thinking is necessarily at random, will 
exhibit the power and necessity of the new language. 
Ekwalakrinstaso is the Adjective relating to this 
Noun Substantive ; and ekwalakrinstali is the Corre- 
sponding Adverb. 

196. The following instances further illustrate the 
extreme exactitude or logical precision of which the 
Structure of Words in Alwato is susceptible : 

Kauso means cutting, severing, dividing ; hence 
part-ing, dis-partf-ing, DIFFERENTIATING ; and distrib- 
utes into kiso, keso, kaso, etc. 



KISO, KESO; IKSO, EKSO. 163 

9 

Aukso is the reversal of kauso, and means counter- 
part-ing, CONFEEENTIATING, re-coaptating, or re-com- 
bining of the parts previously dis-parfed. It dis- 
tributes into ikst>, ekso, akso, etc. These special 
roots are also varied in respect to the length of the 
vowel, ki or ik, ki or ik, etc. 

Kiso (indifferent as to the length of the vowel) 
means cutting along (lengthwise), as the edge of a 
knife, or as a geometrical line produced. 
kiso, the same as kiso, but with prominence given 
to the idea of continuity or persistency in the action, 
kiso, the same as kiso, but fractionally, or the 
action suddenly or shortly interrupted. 

kin, (Eng. keen), relating to the sharp edge, or to 
that which cuts. 

ikso, counterparting, at the end, lengthwise, (cf. Eng. 
eke, to piece out at the end.) 

ikso, the same protended or continued, 
ikso, the same, but sudden or abrupt. 
Keso, (ka-so) cleaving or separating sideidse. 
keso, the same plus idea of continuousness. 
keso, the same, but sudden or abrupt, 
ekso, counterparting, liniarly, at sides, or side- 
wise ; hence collateral. 

ekso, counterparting, liniarly, at sides, or side- 
l)ij-side, and continuously, or in a steady, equal 
manner ; with the relation prolated or " pro- 
duced ; y ' hence PARALLEL. 

ekso, counterparting, linially, and collaterally (as 
collateral lines, or the legs of a triangle), but 
in an abrupted manner, as, by their converging, 



164 PARALLELISM AND RECTANGULAPJTY. 

* 

the legs of a triangle intersect and limit each 

other ; hence ANGULAR, (cf. Ger. ecke, AN ANGLE.) 
ekia, or ekizm, parallelism, 
ekia, or ekizm, angularity, 
ekto, an angle, 
ekso, or ekioso, angular, 
twekso, (t, at, w, wingness; folded- wing-posture), 

acute-angular. 
pwekso, (p, hingeness with an implication of 

openness, cf. Lat. pandere, TO OPEN ; Eng. 

open ; open-wing-posture), o&wse-angular. 
kwekso, (k equal cut ; half-ness ; half-expanded- 

wing-posture), RECTANGULAR ; or rek meaning 

straight (r break, e side, and k cut for straight 

edge), rekti,ekso, or rekti, ekioso, rectangular. 
kwekia, or rekti, ekia, or rekti,ekloia, rcdangular- 

ity. 
gekioso, direct-and-reversed angularity as in the 

checker.. 
thekioso, decussation- angular ; (double apices.) 

197. Perhaps no severer test could be applied to a 
new language claiming to be a DISCOVERY, not an in- 
vention, than to demand of it accurate terms signify- 
ing Parallelism and RectangiHarity. These two ideas 
are the Core of Scientific Exactification. The Rectan- 
gular it y and Cubic Dimensions of the New Jerusalem, 
seen prophetically in vision by John, the revelator, 
on Patrnos (Revelations, v. 16, cli. xxi.) has come 
under consideration elsewhere. (B. O. Index.) 

198. The ideas named by the preceding list of words 
are such that each one might bo delineated di<i[/i'<(ni- 



THE ONENESS OF ELEMENTS. 165 

matically. It is at these Elementary Fountain-heads 
of Thought itself, that Language and the Domain of 
Form are demonstrated, by Universology, to be in- 
herently related, and, as it were, made identical. It 
will be the supreme triumph of Scientology, the Ex- 
act Branch of this new Universal Science, to exhibit 
in Diagram, and by illustrative object-teaching, all the 
Root-thoughts of which the Human Mind is capable, 
and of which the Root-words of the newly-discovered 
but inherently NATURAL Universal Language (Alwato) 
are merely the intrinsically appropriate vocal expres- 
sions or Namings. (69, 73.) 

199. It cannot be too emphatically repeated that the 
Elements of Sound, the Elements of Form, the Elements 
of Number, and the Elements of whatsoever other domain, 
or, in a word, of all Things, and of Thought itself, are 
in dose relations ivith each other, and are, in a word, so 
identified by an infinite echo* of analogy, that they are 
substantially ONE. There is, therefore, at the bottom 
of all Science an Alphabet of Sound, an Alphabet of 
Form, an Alphabet of Thought, and, so, an Alphabet of 
all Things ; and these Alphabets, are, in an important 
sense, ONE. They are, THE Alphabet or Fountain-head 
of the Pure Abstract Realm; THE ESSENTIAL or IN- 
DWELLING- LAW of all Being ; in a ivord, the LOGOS 
of Scripture, or GOD himself, manifested through the 
Universe of Existences, (19.) The discovery and 
revelation of this Divine "Word" cannot, therefore, 
but be the Crisis-event of Human Development; the 
inception of a brighter or more glorious phase of Human 
Destiny, the Advent of Order and Harmony in tJie 



IGG THE CRISIS-EVENT. 

regulation of Human Affairs. At all events, SCIENCE 
takes a new and more commanding relation to Gov- 
ernment and Human Administration in all tilings 
from the time when it is, itself, unified and centrally 
and organically constituted by the discovery and demon- 
stration of UNIVERSAL SCIENTIFIC PRINCIPLES. (19, 115.) 

200. We have hitherto dealt with the Structure of 
the Words of Alwato. It will be well to glance, for 
a moment, at the principles of its Syntax or Gram- 
matical Structure. The Central Department of 
Grammar is the Conjugation of the Yerb ; and pre- 
eminently therein the Variation of the Tenses The 
Temporology of the Yerb ; and there is nothing more 
intricate and troublesome than this in the whole 
composition of the Instinctual, Chance-begotten, or 
Old Style languages. It is only necessary to refer to 
the Greek Yerb, with its complication of Tense- 
forms, and its immense difficulty in this particular. 
The Structure of Alwato, in the same respect, is the 
perfection of simplicity, conciseness, and precision, 
and is dictated by that Law of Nature, scientifically 
evolved, which is applicable to the subject, as follows : 

201. The vowel sound a (ah) is the Pivotal Yowel- 
Sound at the Back-Mouth ; the o at the Front- 
Mouth, and the i (-ee) at the Middle-Mouth, or Mean 
position. I>rtc/-ward position corresponds with Pa*t 
Time, as the Past is behind us ; Front-ynml position 
corresponds with the Future, as the Future is before 
us ; and Mufinn/ position, bvlin-'. n the other two, cor- 
responds with Pi't'Ht'iit Time, or the Now. 

202. In accordance with these simple facts -a (-ah) 



ALWASO VERB ENDINGS. 167 

as a Verb-ending denotes Past Time (or action), -o the 
Future, and i (-ee) the Present. In other words, i (ee), 
a (ah), o, are the terminations of all verbs, for signify- 
ing the Present, the Past, and the Future Tenses, re- 
spectively as the Three Basis Tenses of tl^e Yerb. 
A repetition of these Yowels distributes the Tenses 
into a Relative Past, Present, and Future (called Per- 
fect, Imperfect, etc.) The vowel -u (-66) is the ending 
for the Imperative Mood (third Person) ; otherwise the 
Root-word serves for the Imperative ; -u also denotes 
the Subjunctive Mode, and receives the Pivotal Vow- 
els added for its Tenses ; and -i,e (ee-a) denotes the 
Conditional or Optative an assumed state (-e) of be- 
ing present (-i), the e serving for resultant state see 
the Participles. The ending -ya denotes the Infinitive. 
203. The Personal Pronoun I is, in Alwato, yo, or io, 
as in Spanish and Italian (y, radiating centricity, i, cen- 
tral being, and o, presence.) For a verb-stem we may 
assume the English word speak, merely changing the 
spelling of it to spik, for while a word wrought 
out from Alwaso Elements to mean the same might 
serve, it is equally permissible to naturalize adopted 
citizens, in the New Word-Republic, from any of the 
existing languages, only requiring of them to con- 
form, in decency of appearance (their orthographic 
dress), and in their relations with the natives (their 
prepositions, verb-endings, etc.), to the constitution 
and laws of the New Domain. These two words, to- 
gether with the Verb-endings shown in the last pre- 
ceding paragraph, suffice, to exhibit substantially the 
whole Conjugation of the Verb, as follows : 



168 



CONJUGATION OF THE ALWASO VERB. 



TABLE No. 7. 



Present. 
Yo splki, I speak, 



Past. 
Yo eplka, I spoke, 



Future. 
Yo splko, I shall or will 



INDICATIVE MODE. 

yo spiki.i, I am speaking, 

(Imperfect.) 
yo spiki,a, Ihave spoken, 

(Perfect.) 

yo splki, o, lam about to speak, 
(Prospective.) 



f yo eplka,i, I was speaking, 
(Imperfect.) 
yo spika,a, (or sp~ik(a)ha, or Jca), I had spoken, 

(Perfect.) 

yo spika,o, I should speak, (1 said that . . . ) 
(Prospective.) 

f yo splko,i, I shall be speaking, 

(Imperfect.) 
yo eplko,a, I shall have spoken, 

(Perfect.) 

yo sp!ko,o (or spikwo) I shall be about to speak, 
(Prospective.) 



IMPERATIVE MODE. 

Spik, speak, (thou, or you.) 

Spiku (pr. speek-00), or ke ro eplkfi, let him speak. 



OPTATIVE OB CONDITIONAL MODE. 

Yo spiki,e, (pr. speek-ee-a), da, I should or ivould speak, if . . . 

Yo splki,c.ia, (pr. ppeek-ee-a-ee-ah), / should or would have spoken, (if) 



SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. 

ke yo splku,i, (pr. epeek-oo-ee), . . . that I may or should speak. 
ke yo splku,ia, (or splkuya), . . . that I may or should have spoken. 

ke yo gpiku,a, . . . that 1 might or should speak. 

ke yo eplku.a,a, (or ka), . . . that I might or should hare spoken. 



INFINITIVE MODE. 

Spikya, (sj)Tkiyu or splkoya), to speak. 
Splkuya, to have 



ALWASO PRONOUNS. 169 



PARTICIPLES. 

1. Active. 
Present. Splkin (or -ing), speaking. 

Perfect or ( Splkian or } j, ar s n ~ ^okm 
Past. \ Splkan f ' 

Future. SpikOn, being about to speak. 

2. Passive. 

Present. Spikint, (being now) spoken, (d for t adds the idea of necessity spiMnd. 



Future. Splkont (or d) what will (or must) be (being) spoken. 

Special Adjectivoid Passive Past Participles Permanent States. 
Spik,et (or -ed, contract for -enta. -enda) Spoken ; cf. Eng. and Ger. Regular. 

f Spikt (spik(e)t, cf. Eng. Contracted forms ; d after Concretes, 
Contracted -j Liquids and Vowels. 

lSplk,e, cf. Fr. prevalent forms iu -e, -e, -es, -ees. 

Reflective or Middle. 
Spikinc(tsh), speaking itself. 
Spikiane, or Splkan9, having spoking itself. 
Spikonc, about to speak itself. 

204. The additional termination -ta converts the 
preceding Active into the Passive Voice Tense-Forms ; 
thus, Alwato splkita, splkata, splkota, Aiwa to is 
spoken, was spoken, will be spoken, etc. ; and -ga gives 
the Reflective or Middle sense ; splldca (pr. speek- 
ee-tshah), speaks itself. See Conspectus (of the Pro- 
nouns) below. 1 

TABLE No. 8. 

THE ORDINARY PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
1st Person. 2d Person. 3d Person. 





NOM. 


OBJEC. 


NOM. 


OBJEC. 


NOM. OBJEC. 


Mas. 


To, I; 


mo, me ; 


vo, thou; 


zo, thee ; 


ro, 7<e ; lo, him. 


Fern. 


ya, I; 


ma. me ; 


va, Z7i# / 


za, #/i^e / 


ra, ^A^ ; la, her. 


Mac 


yi, we ; 


mi. us ; 


vi. j'ow / 


zi, you ; 


ri, ^iey/ li, them. 


Fern. 


ye, we ; 


me, us; 


ve, yow ,' 


ze, you ; 


re, ^ey ; le, them. 


TiKlif- j 


yu, /, 


mu, me, 


vu, thou, 


zu, ^/iee, 


ru, Ae, In, her, him 


ferent-l 


or we. 


or ws. 


or ?/ow. 


or you. 


she or they, ortha/t. 



Notice the Confused Irregularity of the English Pronouns. 



CHAPTER XII. 

FINAL KESUME OF THE SUBJECT. 

205. A final word must be said, here, in respect to 
the Alwaso namings of Naturology, Scientology, and 
Artology, respectively, which narnings furnish the 
proper beginning-point for all subsequent distribu- 
tions ; and the several senses in which these terms 
may be taken must be pointed out and carefully dis- 
tinguished by appropriate special sets of Alwaso 
terms. The Indeterminate, Unlimited, or Infinite As- 
pect of Universal Being, represented by the Vowel- 
Sounds, is first in order, and has its own Naturisni, 
Scientism and Artism. Some re-statement will be 
necessary. The Central (Middle-mouth), most con- 
densed, and, consequently, slenderest of the Vowels, 
i (ee) signifies Thing, Entity, Being. The ending -ski 
(skee) means Science. Iski is therefore Ontology (Gr. 
onta, THINGS, BEINGS, from ei-mi, TO BE, and Lnrfos), 
the Science of Thing in se or abstracted to the 
uttermost, or, so far as may be, from those Relations 
or Condilittn 1 * in which Things are always <ic/nu1h/ 
found. Ordinary Ontology is still, however, not the 
Science of R.ilimat Pure Being (J"io, 149, 15S), 



PHILOSOPHOID NATUROLOGY, ETC. I'll 

but of Actual or Sensible Thing, considered apart 
from Kelations. The ending -io (-ee-o) means a 
Domain or Realm, and -ia (-ee-ah) a Principle. 
I,io is the Thing-Domain, and i,ia the Thing-Prin- 
ciple, otherwise called Entity (Lat. ens, BEING or 
THING). Finally i,ia,io (ee-ee-ah-ce-o) is The Eealm or 
Domain in which i,ia (ee-ee-ah) or the Thing-Principle 
especially exists, presides or predominates ; and this 
is peculiarly real (Lat. res, THING ; realis, REAL) ; and, 
hence, in this high Indeterminate Elemental sense 
i,ia,io is Nature, the Actual or Real World (of Con- 
fluent, Undifferentiated Substance) ; and i,ia,ioski is 
Naturology, in this attenuated elementary sense ; 
i,io,io is, then, the Corresponding Scientismus, or 
Differentiation into Domains; etc. But, contrasted 
with eski (a-skee), which follows, (206) the whole of 
iski (ee-skee, 205) is Naturology. 

206. The next slenderest (protensively) and most 
central vowel, but more thinned or flattened (than i) 
sidewise (?oferally, or re-?a-ively), is e, (pronounced 
like the English name of a.) This vowel, e, signifies 
^Relation (the betweenity of Things.) Relation general- 
ized or drawn out, or elongated or in the phrase of 
the geometer pro-duced, is Laiv, which is, therefore, 
denoted by e, (the same vowel-sound as e, but pro- 
lat-ed. or bearing the kw^r-mark, expressed or under- 
stood.) Eski (a-skee) is, therefore, Nornology, or the 
Science of abstract and necessary Laws existing in the 
Constitution of Things, (Gr. nomos, LAW ; and logos.) 
E,io is the Law-Domain or Law-dom, and e,ia is the 
Law-Principle; that of certainty, regulation,permamncy ; 



172 SCIENTOID NATUROLOGY, ETC. 

the understanding and systematization of wliich is, 
again, the very essence of Science. Finally, there- 
fore, e,ia,io (a-ee-ah-ee-o) is the Eealm or Domain in 
which Law, or Certainty and Kegularity prevails re- 
flecting upon and governing Thing or Things Science 
governing or presiding over Nature. This is peculiarly 
un-real, or abstract. In another high Indeterminate 
Elemental Sense e,ia,io is, therefore, Science (as pure 
Logic, or the Kealin of Laws) ; and e,ia,ioski is 
Scientology. 

207. 1 and e are the Elementary (central and slender) 
Yowels. The Kemaining Vowel-Sounds are Elabo- 
rate (circumferential, bulky, weighty). Again, there- 
fore, in the more Elaborate and usual Aspect of this 
Philosophical View of Being, (denoted by the Vow- 
els), it has been shown already that ASKI is NATU- 
ROLOGY, OSKI, SCIENTOLOGY, and USKI, ARTOLOGY, (57- 
59, 130-131.) All of this Elaborismus is contrasted 
with the Elementisrnus represented by i and e (130.) 

208. Still, however, all the preceding distributions, 
inasmuch as they rest wholly in the Vowels, are Phil- 
osophical rather than Scientific ; and are quite vague. 
The Scientific namings are NA,ski (Naturski or Natura- 
ski) for NATUROLOGY ; SKi,ski for SCIENTOLOGY, and AR- 
ski for ARTOLOGY. Observe, however, also, that Maski 
(prefixing in for macro-, or exo-) signifies Exo-Naturol- 
ogy, including the whole bulk of the Existing Sciences, 
as sporadically developed ; and Naski (prefixing n for 
micro-, orendo-) signifies Endo-Naturoloey. theNatu- 

O Ov* ' 

rology especially developed from Uuiversology and 
presided over internally and centrally by the Sciento- 
logical Principle and Idea. (75.) 



GENERALIZED NATUROLOGY, ETC. 173 

209. But, again, Nature, Science, and Art, general- 
ized to that final extent that they are inclusive and 
combinative of both the PHILOSOPHICAL and the SCIENTIFIC 
Aspects of Being demand still other varieties of nam- 
ings. Indeed, the Philosophical Mode of this Distribu- 
tion (208) itself, (that-of-Universal-Being into-Nature, 
Science-and-Art), is Naturismal, the Scientific Mode 
of the same (208), is Scientisrnal ; and the final 
Mode, remaining to be specified (210, 211), is Artis- 
mal, and Culminative. 

210. In this ulterior and inclusive aspect of the Dis- 
tribution in question, Au,ski (the Vowel-Domain = Phil- 
osophy) is NATUROLOGY ; Engkauvlski (or Limitosld, 
the Consonant-Domain, 127) is SCIENTOLOGY, and 
Alski (Universology itself), as including, combining, 
and reconciling Nature and Science in the Grand 
Artismus or Completed Structure of Being, is ARTOL- 
OGY ; but it is Hwau ll ski, the Science of the Yital and 
Attenuated Domain intervening between the Vowels 
and the Consonants (124, 158), which is Artology in 
the /Special Sense of THE FINE ARTS. 

211. Al (ahl) is a word which is constituted by the 
combination of the leading Yowel a, (ah), and the ul- 
timate Consonant (in the return-career from Con- 
sonantism to Vowelism), the 1 ; and as this word 
means the Unbroken Whole, so Ar (ahr) denotes 
the brokenness of the same into Specialty, or 
Parts. These Motic Liquids (1, r), likewise put the 
otherwise Static Universe into Movement, or, as it 
were, into an Orbital Career. The following table 
exhibits those namings of Nature, Science, and Arc, 



174 NATUEASKI ; SI,ENSKI ; ARTOSKI. 

which take into account this now feature, that of 
Movement. (Read from below upwards). The order 
is here reversed) as that of Actual Discovery is so from 
Nature, and begins with Art as Speciality thence 
rising to Nature as the Grand Whole : 

TABLE No. 9. 

3. ALSKI, NATUROLOGY, as Universology, or the Science of Nature in the 

Grand or Universal Sense. 

2. Alrski ; A Priori Order ; from the Universal 
to the Particular, or from Whole to Parts ; 
(tfitiaski.) 

2. SKISKI, SCIENTOLOGY.) i. AKLSKI; A Posteriori Order; from Particulars 

to Univcr^als, from Parts to Wholes, from 
Causes to Effects ; (Aitiaski ; cf. Gr. aitia, 

CAUSE.) 

1. ARSKI, ARTOLOGY (cf. Fr. Art, pronounced ahr, Specialite Balzac.) 

212. Finally, as the Condensed Extract, and Gen- 
erally Representative Trigade Series of terms for NA- 
TURE, SCIENCE and ART ; the following Darnings will 
most frequently and generically occur. 

TABLE No. 10. 

3. ARSKI or AKTOSKI ARTOLOGY. 

2. SKISKI SCIENTOLOGY. 

1. MNASKI, NASKI, NATURSKI or NATUKASKI NA- 

TUROLOGY. 

213. Or, in fine, as follows : 

TABLE No. 11. 

3. AKTOSKI ARTOLOGY. 

2. SKISKI for SI,ENSKI) SCIENTOLOGY. 

1. NATUEASKI (Nah-toor-a-skee) NATUROLOQY. 



UNISMI; DUISMi; SESQUISM1, ETC. 175 

214. The au,io (Homogenismus, 126) of Speech, or 
of the Universe, or of whatsoever Domain is the fun- 
damental Unismus of that Domain ; the cnkauvlio (He- 
terogenismus, 127) is the corresponding Duismus ; and 
the alio, (Totismus, 211), is the corresponding Trinis- 
mus (6.) The Vowels are, therefore, the Unismus of 
Oral Speech (not now including Music) ; the Conso- 
nants, the Duismus ; and The Syllable, and all the Ela- 
borate Structure which grows out of it, the Trinismus. 
The Yowel-and-Consonant Domain is Elementary. 
At the Center of this Elementismus of Speech, be- 
tween the Yowels and Consonants, are the Ambigu's 
(Hwau n io, 129, 158, 210), the Pneumatismus of Speech, 
the Analogue of Viscerism and Vital Spiritual Exist- 
ence, universally ; technically Sesquism (Lat. sesqui, 
ONE-AND-A-HALF.) Ti,ia (tee-ee-ah), ki,ia (kee-ee-ah), 
and pi,ia (pee-ee-ah) are The Abstract Limitological 
Aspects of Unism, Dtiism, and Trinism. Un,ia (oon- 
ee-ah), Du,ia, (doo-ee-ah) and Tre,ia (tra-ee-ah) are 
the more generalized aspects of the same. 

215. Before concluding this little treatise, let us re- 
turn, for a moment, from the special consideration of 
Alwato, as an Epitome of the Universe, to that of the 
Universe itself ; and of some few of the other and 
correlated branches of the Grand Whole. It is only, 

in a sense, accidental, that we have been mainlv oc- 

.< 

cupied, while introducing the investigation of Uni- 
versal Science, with Language, and especially with 
the Elementary or Alphabetic aspect of this par- 
ticular subject ; but, oo the other hand, there was, as 
previously shown (63, 71, 80, 81), a sufficient deter- 



176 ALL DOMAINS MODELIC. 



mining reason, for the choice of this special current 
of investigation in a certain centricity of position 
which is held by this rational core of Speech or Ut- 
terance (64, 67), as, representatively, the Logos or 
god-Principle of all Being (199, 216.) 

216. But apart from this consideration of a certain 
Pivotal or God-like Supremacy in the Loyos or Rational 
fundamentum of the Speech-Domain, there is, intrin- 
sically, no reason why we might not as well have 
sought for and illustrated the same GOVERNING PRIN- 
CIPLES OF UNIVERSAL BEING in the Elernentisrnus of 
any, and, so, in turn, of every other Domain ; for, by 
virtue of their being Universal, they occur equally 
in every Realm ; but, most specifically, in that which 
is most Elementary in every Realm of MATTER, MIND, 
and MOVEMENT, in the Universe at large, or within 
and throughout the Absolute Totality of Being : So 
that, had we commenced our investigation, instead 
of choosing the Domain of Language, in that of 
Number, we should have been dealing mainly with 
Zero and the Units ; with Units, Duads and Triads 
(Ones, Twos, and Threes) ; and with the Numerical 
Series, as Cardinal and Ordinal ; Integral and Frac- 
tional ; and Odd and Even ; which are the Elements 
of that Sphere- of Being ; or, in fine, with Numbers as 
The Absolute (iso), and with + , -, and ==, as The 
Relative (eso) Elementism of Numerical Science ; all 
of these as Analogues of Silence and Speech-Utter- 
ance ; of Vowels, Consonants, and Syllabic Elabora- 
tions ; of Lingual Developments expansively in Space 
and historically in Time ; of Metropolitan Integra- 



LANGUAGE, NUMBER, FORM, ETC. 177 

tions and Provincial Fractionalities or Divergencies ; 
of Monologue and Dialogue ; and, finally, of Prosaic 
Absolutism, or Free Utterance (iso) and of Poetic and 
Musical Measured Harmony, or- Verbal Relativity, 

(650, .) 

217. Or, had we commenced in Morphology (the 
Realm of Form, Geometrical), we should have been en- 
gaged in dealing mainly with another set of Analogues, 
echoing to the two sets just noticed ; with Blank 
Space and the Inscribed Points, Lines, and Surfaces ; 
with Point, Line, and Surface ; with Side-wise-ness 
and Length-wise-ness ; with Uniformity (Integral) and 
Pluriformity (Fractional) ; with Unequal and Equal, or 
Equaled, Shapes ; and with Figure as the Absolutism 
(i,ia), and Posture or Direction as the Relatism (e,m) 
of Form. In Mechanics, we should have dealt with 
Pull and Push and Reciprocating Action (Unismal, 
Duismal, and Trinismal) ; in Astronomy with Centri- 
petal, Centrifugal and Orbital Forces and Move- 
ments ; in Optics (representative of Physics), with 
Incidence, Reflection and Vision ; in Chemistry with 
Synstasis (Primary Agglomeration), Analysis, and 
Synthesis ; in Biology with Feminine, Masculine and 
Copulative Phenomena ; in Sociology (and pivotally 
in the Science of Government) with 1. CONVERGENT 
INDIVIDUALITY (Social Unity or Mutuality represented 
in some Pivotal Personage) ; 2. DIVERGENT INDIVIDU- 
ALITY (Democracy, " The Sovereignty of the Indivi- 
dual") ; and 3. Social Reconciliation (Pantar chatty, of 
those two Opposite Principles), the Trinisrn, from the 
two former as Unisin and Duism ; in Morals with 



178 THE PIVOTAL IDEAS HE-STATED. 

1. INCLINATION, The Absolute or Individual Will, 2. 
RECTITUDE, the Eelational Equity, and 3. " GRACE " 
or Gracefulness, from the True Compromise and Har- 
monic Reconciliation of the other two ; in Theology 
with Fetishism, Polytheism, and Monotheism ; or in 
another Sense, with Unitarianism, Trinitarianism, and 
the Scientific Reconciliation of these two, etc. 

218. In conclusion ; UNIVEESOLOGY is the Cen- 
tering and the All-inclusive One Grand SCIENCE, 
unifying and interpreting and expanding all the 
known Sub-Sciences, and developing a crowd of New 
and hitherto Unthought-of Sciences ; and recon- 
structing Education. INTEGRALISM is the New 
and Final PHILOSOPHY ; the All-sided and Complete 
Reconciliation of all possible Sectarian Divisions in 
All Spheres ; not as extinguishing Individual differ- 
ences, but as softening, co-ordinating, and utilizing 
them ; and, finally, PANTARCHISM is designed to be 
the Ulterior Planetary and Scientific OKGANIZATION and 
ADMINISTRATION of all Human Affairs, protecting and 
subserving the utmost practicable range of INDIVIDUAL 
FBEEDOM, in the bosom of a PRESIDING ORGANIC UNITY ; 
the harmonicallv constituted POLITY or ACTIVITY of 



Humanity, centered by RELIGION, as the Irradiating 
Spirit of the Whole. United, they may be conceived of 
as the Inauguration of the Millennium, through Intel- 
lectual Discovery and Science reconciled witli Inspira- 
tion and All the Experiences of the Past. Such is the 
Nature and Spirit of the Programme, to which the 
World is now invited ; Affectional Enthusiasm and a 
New Religious Fervor, based on Intellectual Gratifica- 



THE CONCLUSION. 179 

fcion and Triumph, demanding as their completion 
the Sanctified and Consecrated Best Exertions, in 
the Future, and from this hour, of every Individual 
Member of Society, in behalf of the Universal Good 
of our Col ective Humanity. 

219. And, again, in conclusion of this special icork ; 
Universology, as such, is a Determinate Science, as 
much so as Geometry or Chemistry, and is not to be 
classed with any speculative theory or so-called Sys- 
tem of Philosophy whatsoever; but it is, at the 
same time, a METHOD, still more distinctively than 
a SCIENCE ; and, as a Method, it is characterized, 
1. By a Primitive Radical Analysis of the Elements of 
All Things ; that is to say, by the Analysis of the 
Elements of each particular Sphere or Domain of 
Being or Things; 2. By the discovery of the exist- 
ence of Universal Echo, Analogy, or He/lection, as be- 
tween the Elements of each .Domain, and those of every 
other Domain; or of UNIVEKSAL ANALOGY in Elements ; 
and, 3. By the demonstration, thence, of Parallel Series 
of Evolution, from Analogic Elements, in all Spheres 
and so, of Universal Analogy, ALSO in ELABORATION 
or RESULTS ; both in respect to WHAT is, in Nature, and 

to WHAT REMAINS TO BE ACCOMPLISHED BY MAN. (193.) 

The student-reader is reminded that this work is only 

t/ 

the glimpse of an outline of an immense fabric. He 
may see, as the child sees, at first, only a blurred im- 
age of the New World which it opens ; it is, never- 
theless, a Neiv World of Ideas, and it will clear to his 
vision as he advances. 



180 APPENDIX A. 

APPENDIX A. 

HYBRIDITY, AND THE " MECHANICS OF LITERATURE." 

220. In the matter of style and the Mechanics of 
Literature it is impossible to please all critics. The 
term Universologj is open to objection as a literary 
Hybrid ; it has great popular advantage, however, 
over any term of purely Greek extraction, which 
would suggest no idea to the common apprehension. 
The whole subject and others similar have been con- 
sidered and discussed in " The Basic Outline " (B. O. 
c. 1-9, t. 3) ; it is also alluded to further on in the 
work Appendix D, t. 246, p. 295. 

221. At the point cited in The Basic Outline, the prin- 
ciples and policy of the liberal use of Capitals, Ital- 
ics, etc., as appliances for emphasis and distinction, 
which I have adopted in this, and shall continue in 
my subsequent scientific works, have been explained 
somewhat in detail. One additional consideration 
may be stated here. It is my desire and intention 
to introduce a system of Scientific Headings, for the 

/ O 

more rapid promulgation of these new scientific 
views ; and, where ideas are both weighty and new, 
a judicious rendering of them for the ears of others 
requires a deliberate and special management of the 
voice, with appropriate pauses, and a considerable 
variety of emphasis, changing with the degree of 
importance which attaches to each word or phrase. 
The exceptional system of Punctuation and Literary 
Dress which characterizes this and the accompanying 
work, is intended to aid tho reader in this respect ; 



TOWEL-SOUNDS AND THE AFFECTIONS. 181 

and, in a sense, to teach a special habit of reading 
adapted to this style of subject. 

222. I have also adopt. 'd the habit (liable to some 
criticism) of signing my initials to Notes and fugitive 
documents, whether they accompany my more formal 
labors or not, especially where the subject requires 
that I fall down to the familiar style which author- 
izes the use of the pronoun I. It is not altogether 
the usage, but it suits best my idea of the conclen- 
tial relation which I hope to establish with the Stu- 
dents of Universology. S. P. A. 

APPENDIX B. 

SWEDEKBOKG ON THE MEANING OF THE TOWELS. 

223. The Homogenisnius of Mind.is Affection, as its 
Heterogenismus or Limitary Aspect (Form-like) is 
Intellect, Intelligence, or The Knowing Faculty 
(Ideation.) The Vowel-sounds (homogeneous in 
character) echo, therefore, to, or correspond with, or 
are the analogues of, the Affedionality of the Mind, (as 
the consonants are related to the Thought-Element.) 
Music, which is the Language of the Affections, 
modulates mainly in the Yowels, and Thought or 
Cogitation prefers the Consonants. It is vaguely 
recognized among musicians that each Key and 
Note of music tends to awaken a different and spe- 
cific kind of emotion ; Helmholtz has proven that 
the Varieties of Vowel-Sound (in Oral Speech) rest 
on a Musical Basis. We are on the verge of a demon- 
stration, therefore, from purely empirical and me- 
chanical considerations, of the fundamental idea of 



182 "SPEECH OF THE ANGELS." 



Alwato ; wliicli Universology demonstrates in its own 
way. Intuitions of these occult facts of science are 
not wanting in the writings of certain inspirational 
thinkers ; and notably with Swedenborg ; even to a 
dogmatic affirmation of the Meanings of the different 
Vowels, as shown in the following extracts : 

224. [" Of THE ANGELIC LANGUAGE] ; E [a] and i 
[ee] properly belong to the Spiritual Affections," 
Doctrine concerning the Sobered Scripture (90) ; Heaven 
and *HeU (241.) That is to say i and e, Middle- 
Mouth and Slender- Vowel-Sounds, being Elementary 
(130) and the Vowels meaning Affections these 
two Sounds, the most meagre or skeleton-like of the 
Vowel-Sounds, and very like Consonants, mean Affec- 
tions for Abstractions and Limit-like Tenuities, or Subtle 
Entities, and, hence, they are u Spiritual " or Belated 
to Intelligence (Definition) which is the characteristic 
of Swedenborg's " Spiritual " Sphere. 

225. " The Speech of the Heavenly (or Celestial) 
Angels [above the " Spiritual " Angels] sounds much 
from the vowels o and u [oo.] From the expressions 
in The Word, in the Hebrew language, it may in 
some measure be known whether they belong to the 
Heavenly class or the Spiritual class, thus whether 
they involve Good or Truths; those which involve 
Good partake much of u [oo] and o, and also some- 
iliiiiff of A [ah] ; but those which involve Truth [In- 
tellectual, Spiritual] partake of E [a] and I [ee.] 
Because Affections manifest themselves chiefly by 
Sounds [Clangs Helmholtz], therefore, also, when 
great subjects are treated of, as heaven and God, 
those words are preferred in human discourse which 



THE GOOD, THE TRUE, AND THE BEAUTIFUL. 183 

contain the vowels u [oo] and o ; musical sounds also 
have an elevation to the same vowels, when similar 
things are expressed ; it is otherwise when the sub- 
jects treated of are not of importance ; hence it is 
that the art of music is able to express various kinds 
of Affection." Heaven and Hell (241.) 

226. The meaning of these mystic utterances, trans- 
lated by the light of Universology and Alwato, is this : 
The Back-Mouth (Basis) vowel-sound A (ah) is The 
Analogue of NATURE, of Substance, Eiches, Goods, GOOD 
(151), in the Lower, unspiritualized, or Natural Sense 
of Good ; it characterizes, therefore, the Speech of 
Swedenborg's angels who inhabit the "Natural 
Heaven ' beneath the " Spiritual ' and the " Celes- 
tial." The I (ee) and E (a) are intermediate between 
this and the o and u (oo), which last pertain to the 
Elaborate or Artistic, the region of the Hlilier or Ul- 

O U 

terior Good subsequent to Spiritualization, and are 
made at the lips the top of the mouth ; hence i (ee) 
and e (a) are Transitional, Evanescent, " Spiritual;" 
while, finally, o (clear, presentative, SCIENTIC) and u 
(oo) (retiring, shaded, modified, modulated, ARTISTIC) 
are conjointly " Celestial," Elaborate, Perfect, Com- 
plete. A (ah) is also Elaborate as contrasted with I 
and E elementary. This adaptation of the Elaborate 
Vowels A (ah), o, u (oo) to loftiness of the affections 
or feelings, as, in part, shown by Swedenborg, is well 
illustrated in the pompous character of the Spanish 
language where these three vow r els abound. When 
Language shall be printed phonetically, The Natural 
and Ethnical Phrenology (or the Mental Constituency 
of the different Peoples of the Earth) may be rneas- 



184 MUSICAL RECONSTRUCTION, 

ured with more accuracy than Callipers and Cranios- 
copy can apply to the heads of Individuals ; by the 
simple means of weighing Hie types employed in printing 
the different languages, observing the predominance 
of the different sounds, and apportioning the types, 
and a new branch of science will thus be born. The 
same tendency to prefer different Sounds and Classes 
of Sounds, or the words which contain them, will cause 
a modified idiomatism to prevail even in the -body of 
Alwato, characterizing different nationalities and 
classes of Society, down to the " Individual Equa- 
tion" but without disturbing the general unity of a 
language which is rallied by a constant appeal to its 
scientific bases. 

227. I shah 1 take pains elsewhere to do justice to 
the original and profound instinctual and poetical 
feeling of Benjamin Blood for the inherent mean- 
ing of Sounds, as related to Poetry. When Oral 
Sounds, Inherent Meaning, and Musical Experience, 
are finally adjusted to each other (as they will read- 
ily be) in the Sublime Musical Compositions of the 
Future, Music will have experienced the influence of 
Universological discovery, and will be radically re- 
generated. S. P. A. 

APPENDIX C. 

228. Mr. Dana, of " The Sun," (newspaper) recently 
requested of me, for his paper, a statement in brief of 
my " whole idea," measuring off on his finger (in tlio 
true spirit of modern journalism) the space in tin 



UNIVERSOLOGY, INTEGSALIS^I, TANTAECHY. 185 

column which could be assigned to me. The follow- 
ing attempt at the condensation of a whole scheme 
of philosophical thinking into a paragraph was the 
result ; as introduced and published in " The Sun " of 
December 11, 1870. S. P. A. 



UNIVERSOLOGY, INTEGRALISM, PANTARCHY. 

229. We are informed that the claim of Mr. STEPHEN 
PEAKL ANDREWS to the discovery of a new science of 
unparalleled extent and importance, which he de- 
nominates Universology, is receiving privately the at- 
tention of influential parties in this city, among the 
men of culture, general science and wealth. Private 
meetings are held, and explanations made of the 
subject. AYe have procured for the benefit of our 
readers the following statement of the leading points 
of the claim : 

WHAT UNIVERSOLOGY IS. 

230. As a science, in the exact or rigorous sense of 
the term, the discovery is named Universology. 

INTEGRALISM. 

231. As a Philosophy of Reconciliation among all 
the Sects and Parties of Mankind, upon the basis of 
the Scientific Principles revealed by Universology, it 
is called Integralism, which is defined to mean AU- 
sidedness. 

A UNIVERSAL GOVERNMENT. 

232. As a presiding practical organization over all 
human affairs, to culminate in the institution of a 



188 MATHEMATICAL BASES. 

Single or Universal Government for the planet, to 
which all the existing governments shall become sub- 
ordinate as branches this Governmental Institute 
to be based, in turn, upon the Science and the Phil- 
osophy it is called Pantarchy, from two Greek 
words which mean universal government. By Gov- 
ernment is not, however, here meant government in 
the ordinary sense, but a Rational-Spiritual Govern- 
ment, or an Organized Practical Influence of the 
Thinking and Aspirational Leaders of Humanity 
and their coadjutors ; to intervene, systematically, 
for the promotion of the highest principles of states- 
manship and social culture ; and to serve as Umpire 
between the special governments and the nations. 

ITS BASIS IS MATHEMATICAL. 

233. This new system of thought, which divides into 
these three branches (Science, Philosophy, and Polity 
or Practical Life), and which is best described, generi- 
cally, by its philosophical title, Integralism, is mftthe- 
vidfical in its foundations ; is, in a word, the re-dis- 
covery and the expansion, in the modern scientific 
spirit, of the half-completed mathematical doctrine 
and discoveries of Pythagoras, the old Greek phil- 
osopher. It claims to be more abstractly and meta- 
physically profound than Kant or Hegel ; more 
analytically and specifically positive than Conite, as 
preparatory to a larger, more scientific, and more 
powerful synthesis of ideas, and of Societ} T , than that 
which he has proposed ; more varied and magnificent 
iu its outlook for the future of humanity than the 



THE FUTURE VERNACULAR OF MAN. 187 

semi-scientific dream of Fourier ; more accurately 
correspondential than Swedenborg ; more exhaust- 
ively and minutely a Philosophy of the Sciences than 
Spencer; more beneficently regulative of human ad- 
ministration than all the merely experiential govern- 
ments, and more truly religious than the church ; in 
a word, to be Whole or Integral ; and all this, not as 
any miracle, but as the simple and natural result 
of recurring for First Principles to Mathematical (the 
only certain) Origins, carrying back all possible con- 
ceptions to this primitive source, and deriving thence, 
by a simple and infallible deduction, the Unitary Laws 
which permeate and regulate all the sciences. 

WHAT ARE ITS FIRST PRINCIPLES? 

234. These First Principles after Positive and 
Negative Polarity, derived from Unity (distributed into 
the positive numbers) and Zero are UNISM, DUISM, 
and TRINISM, by which is meant, 1. The spirit of the 
number One (primitive synthesis or integration, more 
properly synstasis) ; 2. The spirit of the number 
Two, (analysis, differentiation, variety) ; and, 3. The 
spirit of the number Three (ultimate or teleological 
synthesis or integration, the true synthesis). All the 
primary mathematical notions, as of Number, Form 
and Mechanical Action, are found in a similar manner 
to furnish the elementary principles and illustrations 
of, and so positively to teach All Scientific Laws, Clas- 
sification, and Doctrine, throughout the sciences, up 
to Sociology, Morals, and Theology. The Ordinal 
Series of Numbers furnishes, for example, the typo 



188 FIRST PRINCIPLES. 

of Ordinary affairs, and so of Temporalities, related 
to Time (Latin temp .*); and the Cardinal Series, tliat 
of Cardinary, or Transcendental Affairs, and so of 
Spiritualities, or the Fixed Axes and Spheral Exten- 
sions of the Circumambient Heavens, related to Space. 

THE NEW UNIVERSAL LANGUAGE. 

235. Mr. ANDREWS also discovers that all the artic- 
ulate sounds of the human voice, vowel and consonant- 
sounds, are inherently laden, by Nature herself, with 
distinctive and representative meanings, the same, by 
an echo of analogy, which are signified by the math- 
ematical origins of thought just alluded to ; whence 
it follows that words compounded of these Sounds, 
so first rightly understood in respect to their natural 
Meanings, denote precisely and technically the 
Things and Ideas compounded, in a parallel manner, 
from their Mathematical Elements ; so that nature 
has, herself, as absolutely provided, as she has pro- 
vided music, an exhaustless system of the true Techni- 
calities of all the sciences. Mr. Andrews is therefore 
engaged upon the foundations of a New Scientific Lan- 
guage, the future vernacular of the planet, which he 
calls Alwato. This new lano;aa^e will be derived in 

o o 

part from the exact scientific bases above indicated, 
in which sense it will furnish self-defining words by 
the million, and, in part, from the harmonious inter- 
blending of the materials of existing languages. 

APPENDIX D. 

236. This remaining Appendix contains the An- 
nouncement of The Basic Outline of Universology, 
referred to in the Preface. 



CIRCULAR.} 

In Press, the exceedingly important Scientific and Philosophic Work, the title-page 
and description of which are as follows : 

THE BASIC OUTLINE 

OP 

UNIVERSOLOGY; 

AN INTRODUCTION TO THE NEWLY-DISCOVERED SCIENCE 
OF THE UNIVERSE; ITS ELEMENTARY PRINCIPLES; 
AND THE PRIMARY STAGES OF THEIR DEVEL- 
OPMENT IN THE SPECIAL SCIENCES; 

TOGETHER WITH PRELIMINARY NOTICES OF 

AJLWA.TO, 

THE NEWLY-DISCOVERED SCIENTIFIC UNIVERSAL LANGUAGE, 
RESULTING FEOM THE PRINCIPLES OF UNPvERSOLOGY. 

BY 

STEPHEN PEAEL ANDREWS, 

MEMBER OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY OF ARTS AND SCIENCES; OF THK AMF.KIOAN 

ETHNOLOGICAL 8OCIKTY, ETC. 

AUTHOR OF "THE SCIENCE OF SOCIETY," " DISCOVERIES IN CHINESE," ETC. 



O 0ebs del yew/xerpet God perpetually geometrizes. PLATO. 



REVELATION THROUGH SCIENCE; PHILOSOPHY OF INTEGRALISM; 
ADVENT OF THE HARMONY OF IDEAS. 



WITH EIGHTY ILLUSTRATIVE DIAGRAMS. 

NEW YOKK : 
DION THOMAS, 142 NASSAU STEEET. 

1870. 



190 PUBLISHER'S CIRCULAR. 

STATEMENT BY THE AUTHOR, 

237. I am requested by iny publisher to give some 
condensed account of " The Basic Outline of Univer- 
sology." It is difficult to do this, in any small 
compass, more explicitly than is done in the title- 
page. The work is the result of a life-time of labor 
devoted to the exhaustive study of all the great sub- 
jects of human thought, and especially of those 
which agitate the present age, culminating in specific 
discoveries which it is believed will greatly enlarge 
the scope of the Sciences and hasten the already 
rapid progress of humanity. The work contains no 
less than five distinct Introductions from the able 
pens of as many learned gentlemen whom the devel- 
opment of the new science has gathered around me 
for some years past as students, and, to some ex- 
tent, as collaborators. A preliminary exposition was 
given by me some months since before the Polytech- 
nic branch of the American Institute. This elicited 
various notices from the metropolitan press, which 
were appreciative and flattering. I prefer, to any- 
thing which I might add, to supplement this state- 
ment by extracts from these two sources the several 
Introductions to the work, and the notices of the press. 
238. The publication of a work definitely establishing 
the Unity of the Sciences, if it be really such, must, 
from the highest point of view, be regarded as the 
most marked event of the age. Humanity take* a m-tv 
departure from the time when there is a Clearly Recognised 
Harmon if in all our Inf<-U<--f>-<il C'omr/;.'A> ts. 

December, 18GS. STEPHEN PEARL ANDREWS. 



FROM THE INTRODUCTIONS 

TO THB 

BASIC OUTLINE OF UNIVERSOLOGY. 



1. By Prof. M. A. CLANCY : 

239. " Universology is a Science which owing to 
its peculiar character, the extent of its subject-matter, 
the intricacy and complexity of its applications, and 
the importance of its influence upon the interests of 
Humanity is beset, in the labor of making it under- 
stood and appreciated, with difficulties commensurate 
with its vastness. If the discovery of an isolated 
fact or principle be not easy of exposition and com- 
prehension, the difficulty in the case of Universology 
is enhanced by so much as the whole is greater than 
a part. The problem is the more severe owing in 
part to the fact that the extreme simplicity of the fun- 
damental aspect of the discovery is such that it is 
exceedingly difficult first to apprehend it, and then 
to express it in intelligible language ; and in part to 
the novelty of view which the student is called upon 
to take of facts and phenomena with which he is al- 
ready to a considerable degree familiar .... This 
discovery has, therefore, a twofold character. It is 
not only a Science vast as the Universe in its scope, but a 
Method of Scientific Procedure capable of application to 
every domain of Thought and Being, in the new in- 
vestigations which will ever be demanded in exploring 
new special departments of Being .... It is proper 
to notice here one of the more immediate and iin- 



192 PUBLISHER'S CIRCULAR. 

portant results of the application of the Science 
namely, the discovery of a Scientifically constructed 
Universal Language. The necessity for such a lan- 
guage, as one of the exigencies of the Science, is 
patent, as, without a Universal Language, Universal 
Science would be destitute of its proper adequate 
Terminology." 

2. By Kev. EDWARD B. FREELAND : 

240. "Looking at Universology from the same point 
of view in which this celebrated Naturalist (Agassiz) 
regards Classification, we may announce it as the 
complete discovery and perfect interpretation of l the 
Deity in creation,' and the entire unfolding of 'the 
creative plan of God,' not only as expressed in ' or- 
ganic forms,' but as involved" in every Sphere of 
Thought and Being in the Universe of Matter and 
of Mind." 

3. By DAVID HOYLE : 

241. " With the Evolution of this Science is inaugu- 
rated, if I mistake not, a new era in the history of the 
world, and one transcending, in the importance of its 
results, any by which it has been preceded. It 
possesses potency sufficient, under enlightened direc- 
tion, peacefully and beneficently to revolutionize the 
world in all its domains, whether Ideal, Physical, 
Social, Moral, Political, or Religious ; and the results 
of its application, in the solution of Problems within 
these departments of Being, will exceed those here- 
tofore attained by blind efforts merely, in proportion 
to the power of ;icliievement which methods of 



PUBLISHER'S CIRCFIAR. 193 

Scientific Exactitude possess over tlie incertitude and 
failure of perpetual guessing and believing. It is, 
in fine, the Sublime Expounder of the Universe of 
God ; and the means of the eventual introduction of 
the Race to a Paradisic Existence whose pleasures 
will transcend the highest imaginings of so-called 
Utopian dreamers." 

4. By J. WEST NEVLNS. 

242. "A Universal Philosophy, and its absolute ap- 
plication in a Positive Science, whose demonstrations 
shall be beyond the reach of question, must be the 
preliminary theoretical step, [to the practical regen- 
eration of the race.] The tools must first be fur- 
nished with which the work is to be done. Such is 
Universology, the Science of the Whole Universe, or 
the Positive and Rational Revelation of the Organic 
Laws of Thought and Being by means of their Cor- 
respondences, or of the Grand Pervading Analogies 
between them." 

5. By Prof. A. F. BOYLE : 

243. " I feel as if the world wants it at just this nick 
of time, and that it will, in the end, prove to be just 
the book that should have been written, even if it 
have, for the first year or two, only a dozen readers 
who fully appreciate it." 



NOTICES OF THE PRESS. 

"A NEW SCIENCE." 

244. " On Thursday evening, before the Polytechnic 
Branch of the American Institute (Cooper Institute 
Building), a lecture, every way remarkable, was de- 



194 PUBLISHERS CIRCULAR. 

livered by Stephen Pearl Andrews. It purported to 
be upon the Unity of the Sciences, but it was, in fact, 
the first public announcement and exposition before 
the scientific world of the nature of what Mr. An- 
drews claims to be a new science, the most important 
of the sciences, and a science inclusive of and under- 
lying all the other sciences. From time to time, 
during the last five or ten years, the public have 
been made aware, through partial announcements or 
intimations, that Mr. Andrews was devoting himself 
to an unusual series of scientific and philosophic in- 
vestigations which looked to the discovery of some 
recondite ground of unity between all the sciences. 
A series of articles by him and by his coadjutor, 
Edward B. Freeland, published in The Continental 
Monthly, three or four years ago, upon branches of 
the subject, attracted considerable attention. The 
New Science, or that which is claimed to be such, is 
denominated UNIVERSOLOGY. One of the branches 
of the discovery is said to be the basis of a new 
Scientific Universal Language, which, it is supposed, 
will be ultimately the vernacular of the world. The 
lecture, or entertainment, of last evening consisted 
mainly of readings from the Introduction to the 
Fundamental Exposition of the New Science, which, 
we understand, is now in type, and will be forthcom- 
ing at an early day, as a bulky volume filled with 
diagrams and demonstrations. The introduction is 
in turn made up of a series of papers or special in- 
troductions by five or six other writers than Mr. 
Andrews, who have studied, and more or less tlior- 



PUBLISHER'S CIRCULAR. 105 

oughly mastered the new science, and who belong, it 
is said, to an incipient University which the new 
scientific discovery has already been the means of 
organizing. The claim is certainly sufficiently ex- 
traordinary to excite general attention, and the wri- 
ters in question, it must be confessed, give the im- 
pression of being men who understand themselves 
and their subject ; but a mere introductory statement 
is necessarily general, and for that reason, in a sense, 
vague. The exact nature and scientific validity of 
this supposed discovery of universal scientific prin- 
ciples could only be judged of after the most thor- 
ough opportunity should have been granted to make 
the exhibit, and it is to be hoped that the American 
Institute which has been established to render pre- 
cisely this kind of service to the community, will not 
fail to get to the bottom of this extraordinary claim." 
From the N. T. Tribune (April 3, 1868). 



245. " A paper was then read by Mr. Stephen Pearl 
Andrews, upon a new science, under the name of 
UNIVERSOLOGY, which had received his attention, with 
that of others, for the past five years. The gentle- 
man first spoke of the embarrassment he felt regard- 
ing the proper method of presenting his subject, as a 
generalization would perhaps only expose him to the 
charge of entertaining speculative opinions ; while, 
on the other hand, he could not be expected to gire 
an exposition of the science in the space of one 
evening, as the claims of Universology were of un- 
paralleled extent and importance. He stated that 



196 PUBLISHER'S CIRCULAR. 

there was a work upon the subject in type, which 
would comprise some 900 pages, explanatory of the 
science ; he should therefore simply rely for first im- 
pressions upon statements contributed to this book 
by those who have had opportunity to know of the 
nature of the science, in preference to his own affir- 
mation of its value. The immensity of the field, the 
necessity for lucidity, and the novel character of the 
scope of investigation, together with many other 
things, made the problem of presentation one of ex- 
treme difficulty. The speaker then remarked that it 
is obvious, on reflection, that there must be a science 
of the universe as such, distinguished from the spe- 
cial sciences of the parts, or of the spheres, or do- 
mains of the universe ; and yet the very idea is one 
which is hardly entertained with any clearness of 
conception in the scientific world. 

246. "All Pldlosopluj has, indeed, aimed, in a sense, 
at this result, but the methods of Speculative Philos- 
ophy are too vague to satisfy the demands of the 
Scientific World, and in the sense of a Science ^prop- 
erly so called the idea of anything Universal has been 
almost entirely wanting. The Scientific men are 
Specialists. Their labors are as if a colony of learned 
ants were to have undertaken the investigation of 
the Human Body. One section of the little Com- 
munity devotes itself to the exhaustive examination 
of a finger nail, another to that of a lobe of the ear, 
another to that of the hair of the beard, and others 
to the investigation of all the various parts and or- 
gans and systems segregated and mjardcd sinyly ; but 



PUBLISHERS CIRCULAR. 197 

they have been so busy in these special and minute 
examinations, that it has never occurred to any one 
of them to guess even, or, in any event, to give due 
consideration to the fact, that all of these various 
subjects are the parts and constituents of 'a Man ; 
a ad that, therefore, the first thing to know, logically 
speaking, in order to know anything rightly, of these 
particular subjects, is the General Design and the 
Exact Outlay of the Man himself." (B. O. Introduc- 
tion.) From the Hird:iy Journal 



UNIYERSOLOG-Y, ALWATO. 

247. " Last evening, before the Polytechnic branch 
of the American Institute, Stephen Pearl Andrews oc- 
cupied the evening in making an extended prelimi- 
nary statement of what is claimed to be a new sci- 
ence, which he denominates Universology, and one 
of the results of which is to be a new scientific 
universal language, to be called Alwato. Sufficient 
enthusiasm was excited to draw from the learned 
body, contrary, we believe, to their usage, a vote of 
thanks in behalf of Mr. Andrews for the able papers 
read by him. This was not, we understand, to be 
considered as an approval of the extraordinary 
claims of that gentleman, but as a recognition of the 
able manner in which he had stated the claims and 
made his introductory exposition. We have several 
years since called attention to the fact that Mr. 
Andrews was engaged upon inquiries of this sort. 
With the appearance of this book, now going through 



198 PUBLISHER'S CIRCULAR. 

the press, the public will have the opportunity to 
judge of their value. 

248. " The term Universology is liable to objection 
among the learned, on the ground of its hybridity, 
but no 'more so than sociology, which has now be- 
come current. The objection has, we understand, 
been well considered by Mr. Andrews, and he prefers 
to incur it rather than to adopt a more classical but 



less popularly intelligible name. The name bestowed 
on the new language, wrought out from the language 
itself by its own laws, is Alwato, pronounced Ahl- 
wah-to. The public will await with interest the 
further development of these important statements 
and claims." From the Evening Post. 



249. " NEW YORK POLYTECHNIC. Last evening the 
usual routine of proceedings at the weekly meetings of 
this useful institution were varied by the introduction 
of a subject, which may prove to be something of 
real importance. Stephen Pearl Andrews made be- 
fore this body the first formal announcement of the 
discovery of a new science. He read, from the in- 
troduction to a forthcoming work, an elaborate state- 
ment of the domain and nature of the science in 
question ; and notwithstanding the novelty and 
strangeness of the claim he presents, it would hardly 
be possible that a deeper impression should have 
been made by the exposition of a single evening. It 
is true, the principles of the science itself were not 
reached ; but a very clear case was made out to the 



PUBLISHER'S CIRCULAR. 199 

extent that there is room in the nature of things for 
precisely such a science as it is claimed is now dis- 
covered, and that there ought to be, if there is not, 
precisely such a discovery. The new science, so 
claimed to be, is denominated ' Universology,' and is 
said to have the same relation to the universe, as a 
whole, as that which any special science now holds, 
or has held, to its own special domain. The lecturer 
goes so far as to propose the introduction of a scien- 
tifically constructed universal language with a uni- 
versal alphabet." From the Sun. 



250. "A NEW SCIENCE. A lecture was delivered last 
evening before the members of the American Insti- 
tute, by STEPHEN PEARL ANDREWS, on " The Unity of 
the Sciences." The speaker claimed to have dis- 
covered an entirely new science, as exact and pro- 
found as logic or mathematics, and even more far- 
reaching and inclusive than either of them, or than 
any other science. He endeavored to show that 
there is, in fact, only one science, of the principles 
of which all the special sciences are merely particular 
modifications or instances. Mr. ANDREWS affirms that 
heretofore there has not been a single universal prin- 
ciple known in positive science, and that conse- 
quently science is yet in the chaotic or fragmentary 
stage of its development. The new science is to 
supply this defect, and to base all the known sci- 
ences, and, indeed, all possible sciences, upon an 
a priori knowledge of exact scientific laws of uni- 



200 PUBLISHER'S CIRCULAR. 

versal application, whether in the department of 
matter or that of mind. Upon this new science he 
bestows the name of ' Universology,' or the Science 
of the Universe. As a branch of it he also an- 
nounces the discovery, and, to a great extent, the 
elaboration, of a new scientific universal language. 
Mr. ANDREWS' audience appeared to be deeply inter- 
ested in his theories." From fhe N. Y. Times. 



SUBSCRIPTION SHEET 

FOB 

THE BASIC OUTLINE OF UNiVERSOLOGY, 

ARRANGEMENT OF THE WORK. 

I. The Text; II. The Commentary ; III. The An- 
notation. The text is the basis of the other two. 
The Commentary consists of such additional original 
matter as has been prepared in direct connection 
with the text, for its greater elucidation or on minor 
particulars. The Annotation includes extracts from 
other authors, and from Mr. Andrews' previous 
manuscripts, upon points related in some measure to 
the subject treated of in the Text or the Commen- 
tary. IY. A Vocabulary or Glossary is prefixed, con- 
taining definitions of all philosophic and other un- 
usual terms. V. A digested Index to the entire 
work, of nearly 100 pages. The whole will be coin- 
prised in 900 pp. 8vo, containing eighty illustrative 
diagrams. 

The author says in conclusion : 



PUBLISHER'S CIRCULAR. 201 

" I have thus laboriously brought to a conclusion that Prelimi- 
nary Treatment of Universal Doctrine upon which I have thought 
it fitting to bestow the name of ' Basic Outline of Universology.' 
. . . . Whether this Treatise shall meet at once with the wel- 
come reception and grateful appreciation of many minds the an- 
ticipation of which has served to brighten my solitary path in the 
deep recesses of abstract contemplation for thirty years the event 
alone can determine The Signs of the Times may in- 
dicate, and Science may confidently predict ; but the prevision of 
Science, in this behalf, is not yet perfectly secured from the possi- 
bility of error. The Principles of Universology are held to be in- 
fallible ; but no personal infallibility is claimed for its exponent " 
[An extract from the work.'] 

All names received in season will, unless ordered 
to the contrary, be placed in the printed list, now 
being prepared, of the first patrons of the work. 

There will be a limited edition of the work pub- 
lished on LARGE PAPER, 4to, bound in cloth, (to sub- 
scribers only), at $15 per copy; to non-subscribers, 
if there should be any copies of it left over, the price 
will be raised to Twenty Dollars per copy. The re- 
gular edition, 8vo, bound in cloth, will be furnished 
at $7.50 per copy, payable on delivery of the work. 

Subscribers will please send their names at their 
earliest convenience to DION THOMAS, Publisher, 
142 Nassau St., New York. 

Please signify which edition, and the number of 
copies you desire. 



INDEX 



A. 

ABBREVIATIONS, p. x. 

ABSOLUTE, The, (Subs.), The Aunio, 1. 126, p. 94. ; (Adj.), Form = Figure, 

t. 193, p. 161 ; Number, t. 216, p. 176. Speech, do. ; cf. 1. 180, p. 148. 
ABSTRACT, The, in connection with Sounds, t. 101, p. 65 ; t. 113, p. 78 ; 

THE, Spencer, t. 139, p. 102 ; named, do. ; formally treated, t. 161-180, 

pp. 136-148; defined, t. 163, p. 137; inclusion of, t. 164-170, pp. 138- 

143 ; t. 169, p. 141 ; consists of Pure Nothings, t. 170, 171, pp. 143, 144; 

Alwani, Shaupio, t. 176, p. 146 ; divides into Abstract and Concrete 

(-oid), do. ; t. 184, p. 156. 
ABSTBACT-CONCBETE Spencer, 1. 139, p. 102 ; namings for, do., and Note, 

t. 161, p. 137. 
ABSTRACTION(S), Pure Nothings, 1. 164, p. 138, and to end of chapter ; t. 

168, p. 141 ; Mysteries of, t. 169, do. ; or Pure Nothings, t. 164, p. 138 ; 

yet Most Positive, do. ; t. 170, p. 142. 
ABSTRACTISMUS, limits of, t. 164, p. 138 ; Shaupio, t. 176, p. 146 ; fitness of 

the Thin Consonants to express, t. 178, p. 147 ; see Abstract. 
ABSTRACT SCIENCES, only two Spencer; a third, t. 168, p. 141. 
ACADEMY, French, see Agassiz. 
ACCENT, and other marks, t. 152-156, pp. 119-123. 
ACUMEN, see Ken. 

AGASSIZ, on Universology, Note, t. 12, p. 7. 

AGGEEGATION, of Points, repeats do. of Units or Things, t. 167, p. 140. 
ALPHABET(S), kinds of, t. 64, p. 41 ; Imperfect Phonetic, t. 66, p. 42 ; Perfect 

do., to be ; t. 66, do. ; the Sanscrit, Note, t. 65, p. 42 ; a fountain of lingual 

development, t. 67, p. 43 ; t. 69, p. 44 ; a UNIVERSAL, how to be founded, 

t. 79, p. 49; Elements of, extend throughout Language, t. 80, p. 50; t. 

81, do. THE SKELETON UNIVERSAL (Alphabet), t. 93, p. 59 ; t. 95, p. 61 ; 

t. 96, p. 62 ; in TABLE No. 1, t. 94, p. 60 ; number of Letters in, t. 95, p. 61 ; 

1. 108, p. 68 ; English Adapted, do. ; Pitman's Phonographic, Table No. 2, 

t. 106, p. 67 ; The International, t. 109, p. 68; names of Classes of Sounds 

of, Table No. 1, t. 94, p. 60; Table No. 2, t. 107, p. 67 ; t. 113, p. 77; 

Universal, Ethnical, Romanized, t. 156, p. 123. 



204 INDEX. 

" ALPIIABETICS," Science of, Alexander Melville Bell, t. 79, p. 49 ; t. 87, p. 55. 

ALSKI, as Artology, t 210, p. 173 ; derivation and distribution of, t. 211, 
o., Table No. 9, do., p. 174. 

ALTAR, see Fire-place. 

ALWATO, (ahl-wa-to), THE NEW SCIENTIFIC UNIVERSAL LANGUAGE, t. 78, 
p. 48; how founded, t. 79, p. 49 ; composed of two kinds of words, 1. 
Those which are self-defining, and 2. Those not so, t. 150, p. 109 ; how 
will affect Old Style Languages, do. ; will serve to effect the GRAND EE- 
CONCILIATION of all the Philosophies, t. 159, p. 128 ; first use of, to sup- 
ply technicalities, 1. 187, p. 158 ; 1. 192, p. 160 ; the element of precision 
in, illustrated, t. 195, p. 162 ; a Discovery, not an invention, t. 197, p. 
164 ; Syntax (Conjugation of the Verb) of, t. 200-203 (Table No. 7), pp. 
166-169 ; Pronouns of, Table No. 8, t. 204, p. 169 ; As THE SCIENTIFIC 
OPENING OF THE SLUICEWAYS FOR THE PRACTICAL COALESCENCE OF ALL 
EXISTING LANGUAGES, t. 150, p. 109 ; t. 203, p. 167 ; naturalization of 
words in, t. 203, p. 168 ; t. 235, p. 188; t. 239, p. 191 ; t. 244, p. 194; t. 
248, p. 198 ; t. 249, p. 199 ; see Elements, and Sounds. 

ALWATONI WORD-BUILDING, see Word-building. 

AMBIGU'S, see Sounds. 

AMERICA, description of, used for illustration, t. 41, p. 29. 

AMPERE, cited, t. 26, p. 21 . 

ANALOGUES, defined and illustrated, t. 177, p. 147. 

ANALOGY, first Vague, Unscientific ; Unscientific use of, t. 9, p. 4 ; Chem- 
ical illustration of, do. ; Underlying Principles of the True Scientific, t. 
11 p. 5, 6 ; t. 62, p. 39 ; between Elementary and Elaborate Domains, of 
Speech, etc., t. 83, p. 53 ; between the Elements of Arithmetic and of Geom- 
etry, t. 168, p. 140 ; t. 169, p. 141 ; between Points and Principles ; Lines 
and Laws, 1. 168, 169, p. 141 ; between the Cut, keenness, or acumen of the 
Intellect and the Cut of the Line, t. 170, p. 142 ; Universal, defined and 
illustrated, t. 170 ; Infinite Echo of, among Elements, t. 199, p. 165 ; see 
Universal Analogy, and Correspondence. 

ANALYSIS, of Speech, t. 64, p. 41 ; the more rigorous " Phonetic," t. 69, p. 
44; equivalent to do. of Universe, t. 71, p. 45. 

" ANALYSIS," see Spelling by Sound. 

ANGULARITY, named, Alwali, t. 196, 198, pp. 162-165. 

ANIMAL KINGDOM, the, a Minor Universe, t. G2, p. 39 ; named, T. 1-iO, p. 103 

A"SKI, Magic, t. 158, p. 12/. 

ANTHROPOIDULE, man-shaped Little Figure, t. 54, p. 38. 

ANTS, learned, illustrate Specialists, t. 246, p. 196. 

AOUSK.I, Table No. 5, 1. 131, p. 97. 

APPEARANCES, World of, Sciento-Negative, t. 164, p. 

APPENDIX A, p. ISO ; B, p. Ifil ; C, p. 184; P, p. 188. 



INDEX. 205 

ARITHMETIC, and Algebra, the Abstract branch of Mathematics, t. 170, p. 
143. 

ARSKI, Artoski, Tables, Nos. 9, 10, 11, t. 211, 212, 213, p. 174. 

ART, there is a Grand Domain of, in Universe, t. 44, p. 31 ; corresponds 
to Trinism, t. 47, p. 32; defined; meaning of the term enlarged, t. 
49, 50, do. ; Upper End of Column or Line, and Punctum Vitx (in 
plant or man), Analogues of, t. 54, p. 35 ; androgyne, t. 56, p. 37 ; further 
defined, t. 59, p. 38 ; see Nature-Science-and-Art, and Fine Arts. 

ARTICULATION, (Little-jointing), t. 121, p. 90; 1. 122, p. 91 ; t. 124, p. 92. 

ARTISMUS, defined (see Vocabulary), t. 45, p. 31 ; there is one, of every 
Sphere of Being, t. 62, p. 391. 

ARTISTIC MODIFICATION, cited, t. 59, p. 38. 

ARTOLOGY, defined, t. 59, p. 37 ; of Language, t. 74, p. 47 ; t. 77, p. 48 ; t. 
131, p. 97 (Table No. 5); USKI, t. 157, p. 126; named and tabulated, 
Tables, Nos. 9, 10, 11, t. 211-213, p. 174 ; cf. Naturology, and Scientology. 

ARTO-PHILOSOPHY, Table 5, 1. 131, p. 97. 

ASKI, t. 207, p. 172. 

ASPIRATES, Sanscrit, t. 156, p. 123. 

Au, diphthong, representative of all the vowels, t. 92, p. 58 ; a stem for 
consonants in Bundle-Koot-Words, 1. 127, p. 94. 

Air,io, The Infinite, 1. 126, 127, p. 94; Subdivisions of into Scale, Table No. 
4, t. 130, p. 96 ; re-statements of, t. 131, 132, do. ; t. 157, p. 126 ; distri- 
buted, 1. 181, p. 149 ; t. 182, p. 155 ; 1. 184, p. 156 ; Adjective do. in -so, 
t. 185, do. ; substantive do. in -to, do., p. 157. 

Aumo, t. 127, p. 94; t. 160, p. 129 ; t. 181, p. 149 ; t. 183, p. 155. 

AunsKi, Transcendental Philosophy, 1. 126, p. 94; t. 157, pp. 125, 127-128, 
et passim ; see Inski. 

A USKI, Philosophy, t. 126, p. 94; Table No. 6, t. 132, p. 98; t. 157, pp. 
125, 126; as Naturology, t. 210, p. 173. ; et passim. 

AXIAL LINES, t. 191, p. 159; t. 194, p. 162; see Bi-trinacria, or Kkwal-a- 
krinsta. 

B. 

BACON, cited, t. 26, p. 21. 
BALZAC, cited, Table No. 9, t. 211, p. 174. 
BARBARISMS, defined, t. 25, p. 21. 

" Basic Outline of Uuiversology," the larger work to which this is an In- 
troduction, alluded to, Preface, pp. iii, iv, v ; et passim. 
BASIS, see Foundation ; of Inverted Procedure above, t. 54, p. 35. 
" BECOMING," The, equal to Art, t. 59, p. 38. 
TELL, Alexander Melville, cited, t. 79, p. 49. 
P.I-LATERAL KooT-woRDS, t. 146, 147, p. 106 ; see Working Elements. 



206 INDEX. 

BI-TRINACRIA, defined, t. 188, p. 159 ; named Alwali, t. 193, p. 160. 
"BLANKS," "SPACES," 1. 123, p. 92, see Silences. 
BLOOD, Benjumin, cited, t. 227, p. 283. 
BODY, see Human Body. 
B<EHME, Jacob, cited, t. 158, p. 128. 
BUCHANAN, Dr. Joseph E., cited, t. 190, p. 159. 

BuNDLE-KooT-WoKDs, meanings and list of, t. 157, pp. 124-135 ; see, also, 
t. 181, pp. 149-157 ; see Hoot-words. 

c. 

CARD, a, 011 Universology, signed by Parke Godwin, and others, Preface, 
p. v. 

CARDINAL, Cardinated, Cardinism, t. 6, p. 3. 

CARDINARY, meaning of, t. 158, p. 127 ; t. 160, p. 129. 

CARDINATION, see Hinging. 

CARDO, Latin for a Tiinge, t. 6, p. 3. 

CAREER, every, has a Beginning, Middle, and End, t. 54, p. 34. 

CAREERS, Liquidoid and Proteusive, t. 143, p. 105. 

CATEGORIES, of the Understanding, and of Being, distributed, t. 71, p. 45. 

QATOEI, Logic Spencer, 1. 139, p. 102, mid Note. 

CAVITIES, see Interstices. 

CENTER, = t, etc., 1. 160, p. 130. 

CENTRUM, of Speech, The Alphabet such, t. 87, p. 56. 

CEREBRALS, Sanscritic, t. 156, p. 123. 

CHAOS, Primitive, Analogue of Inarticulate Sounds, t. 125, p. 93. 

CHEMICAL ELEMENTS, illustrations by, t. 9, p. 4; t. 12, p. 9 ; upward and 
downward tending, t. 13, p. 10 ; and Edifice, and Lightning, 1. 14, p. 11; 
t. 15, 16, pp. 11, 12 ; t. 17, p. 14 : t. 217, p. 177. 

CHEMICAL TEMPLE, t. 13, p. 10 ; see Dome, Temple. 

CHEMISTRY, (Masaski), Special, c,auski, t. 139, p. 102 ; and Cosmical Mor- 
phology, t. 190, p. 159 ; Synstasis in, etc., t. 217, p. 177. 

"CHRONICLE, WASHINGTON," Extract from, Preface, p. vi. 

CLASSES, of Sounds, new names of, Solids, etc., t. 113, p. 77. 

CLASSIFICATION, in the Natural Sciences inexact, t. 12, p. 10 ; of the Sci- 
ences variously attempted, t. 26, p. 21 ; really a Universology, t. 27, p. 
22 ; but not complete, do. ; Scientific Universal, t. 62, p. 39 ; of Lan- 
guage and the Universe, 1. 121, p. 90, and to end of chapter ; the EXACT. 
t. 174, p. 145 ; a true, possible, t. 177, p. 147 ; see Sounds. 

CLASS-NAMINGS, of Sounds, sec Classes. 

CLUCKS, Zulu, t. 156, p. 123. 

COALESCENTS, see Sounds, (Ambigu's.) 

COEXISTENCES, t. 185, p. 157. 



INDEX. 207 

COLON, Alwaso uses of, 1. 155, p. 122. 

COLOES, gamut of; 3, 7, 12 ; referred to, t. 26, p. 21. 

COMMA, Alwaso uses of, t. 155, p. 122. 

COMPAEOLOGY, defined, t. 69, p. 44 ; Table No. 5, t. 132, p. 98. 

COMPOSITION^, of the Vocal Elements into Words ; see Word-building ; of 
Words themselves, t. 155, p. 122. 

COMTE, Auguste, t. 26, p. 21 ; Echosophic Generalogist, 1. 138, p. 101 ; t. 
159, p. 128; t. 185, p. 157. 

CONCRETE, The, in Connection with Sounds, t. 101-103, p. 65 ; 1. 113, p. 
78 ; THE, Spencer, t. 139, p. 102; named, do. ; formally treated, t. 161- 
180, pp. 136-148 ; defined, t. 163, p. 137 ; inclusion of, t. 164, p. 138, 
only imperfectly scientific, (t. 12, p. 10), 1. 171, p. 143 ; The, Zhaubio, 1. 176, 
p. 146 ; divides into Abstract and Concret(-oid), 1. 176, do. ; 1. 184, p. 156. 

CONCEETISMUS, limits of, 1. 164, p. 138 ; zhaubio, t. 176, p. 146 ; the, fitness 
of the heavy Consonants to represent, t. 178, p. 148 ; see Concrete. 

CONDITIONED, The, see The Unconditioned. 

CONFECTION, in Cookery, t. 149, p. 108. 

CONJUGATION, of the Alwaso verb, Table No. 7, t. 203, p. 168 ; t. 204, p. 169. 

CONSONANTS, represented by ng, k, v, 1, t. 127, p. 94; the Heterogenizing 
Element of Language, t. 142, p. 104; as Scientology, t. 210, p. 173. 

CONSONANT-SOUNDS, see Consonants and Elements. 

CONSTEUCTIONS, human, how to be guided, 1. 191, p. 160. 

COOK, Confection of Proximate Elements by, t. 149, p. 108. 

COPULATION, between Ground and Heaven, t. 55, p. 36; denoted by iu, t. 
109, p. 70, et passim. 

COEEESPONDENCE(S), between the Constitution of Language and that of 
the Material Universe, 1. 121, p. 90, and to the end of the chapter ; be- 
tween Mathematical and Lingual Elements, t. 160, pp. 129, 130 ; doc- 
trine of, embraces Logic, t. 168, p. 141 ; doctrine of, defined and illus- 
trated, t. 177, p. 147 ; see Analogy, and Universal Analogy. 

COSMICAL MOBPHOLOGY Bi-trhiacria, etc., t. 188-195, pp. 158-162. 

COSMOS (or Kosmos), distributed into Grand Sciences, t. 139, p. 102; into 
Grand Spheres, t. 145, p. 105. 

CRISIS-EVENT, THE, of Human Development, t. 199, p. 165. 

CUBIC DIMENSIONS, of the New Jerusalem, t. 197, p. 164. 

CUBIC LINES, of Dimension, see Bi-trinacria. 

Cur, = k, etc., 1. 160, p. 130. 

D. 

D'ALEMBEET, cited, t. 26, p. 21. 

DEDUCTIVE METHOD, improperly so called, t. 9, p. 4 ; see Method. 

DEFINITIONS, see Logic. 



208 INDEX. 

DEPARTMENTS, of Language (Alwato), two, self-defining, and not so, 1. 150, 
p. 109 ; The Elementary and The Elaborate compared, t. 83, p. 53 ; see 
Domains. 

DIACRITICAL MARKS, nasalization, t. 97, p. 62 ; accent, nasalization, long 
and short marks, etc., t. 152-156, pp. 119-123. 

DIAGRAMMATIC KEPRESENTATION, of word-meanings, t. 198, p. 165. 

DIALECTS, of Alwato ; t. 77, p. 48. 

DIRECT, and Inverse Order, of Sounds, t. 157, p. 124. 

DIRECT AND IMMEDIATE CONSEQUENCE, Eau,io, 1. 185, p. 157. 

DIRECTION, see Drift. 

DISCOVERT, distinguished from Invention, 1. 197, p. 164. 

DISTRIBUTION, see Classification. 

DOHERTY, Hugh, Epicosmology, t. 145, p. 105. 

DOME, of Earth and Heaven, t. 13, p. 10 ; t. 14, 15, p. 11 ; 1. 16, p. 12 ; t. 
17, p. 13 ; t, 180, p. 148 ; t. 190, p. 159. 

DOMAINS, of Being or Existence, what is meant by, t. 23, p. 19 ; larger or 
smaller, t. 24, do. ; are of all sorts, t. 25, p. 20 ; named by -io, t. 126, p. 
93 ; distribution of, in -io, 1. 181-183, pp. 149-157 ; Elements in different, 
identified, Number, Form, Language, t. 216, 217, pp. 176, 177. 

DOOR- WAY, Analogue of Punctum Vitce, t. 54, p. 86. 

DRIFT, or Direction, the First, t. 53, p. 34 ; First, Second, and Third, t. 54, 
p. 35. 

DUISM, introduced, and naming of, t. 2, p. 1 ; various (ordinary) namings 
of, t. 5, p. 2 ; bifurcates, do. ; alliance of, with Plurality, do. ; referred 
to, t. 8, p. 4 ; t. 46, p. 31 ; echoes to Science, t. 47, do. ; tlie Second Uni- 
versal Principle, related to the Number Two, t. 214, p. 175; various (Al- 
waso) namings of, do. 

DTTTSMUS, how same as Ileterogenismus, t. 214, p. 175. 

"DYNAMIC " Comte (motic), t. 185, p. 157. 

E, 

EAR, abused by the Eye, t. 106, p. 67. 

ECHO, see Correspondence. 

EDGE, vanishing, of Cutting Instrument, t. 170, p. 142. 

EDIFICE, to illustrate Universal Distribution, t. 54, p. 35 ; see Dome. 

EDUCATION, to be reconstituted by Uuiversology, Preface, p. vii. ; Unity of 

System in, do. ; t. 218, p. 178. 
EKWAL-AKRFNSTA, t. 195, p. 162. 
ELABORISMUS, the, defined, t. 82, p. 52 ; t. 83-87, pp. 53-55 ; t. 87, p. ">." ; 

t. 130, 131, pp. 96-97 (Tables Nos. 4 and 5); t. 183, 184, pp. 155, 156 ; t. 

207, p. 172 ; of Speech, t. 214, p. 175. 
EL ABOROLOGY, defined, t. 82, p. 52 ; Table No. 5, t. 131, p. 97. 



INDEX. 209 

ELECTRO-NEGATIVE, 1. 14, p. 11 ; see Dome, 

ELECTKO-POSITIVE, t. 14, p. 11 ; see Dome. 

ELEMENTARY SOUNDS, see Elements, and Sounds. 

ELEMENTISMUS, the, defined, t. 82, p. 52 ; t. 83-87, pp. 53-55 ; t. 87, p. 55 ; 
t. 130, 131, pp. 96, 97 (Tables Nos. 4 and 5) ; t. 183, 184, pp. 155, 156 ; t. 
207, p. 172 ; of Speech, t. 214, p. 175 ; the Ambigu's are at centre of, 
do. ; of various Domains, t. 216, p. 176. 

ELEMENTOLOGY, denned, t. 82, p. 52 ; Table No. 5, t. 131, p. 97. 

ELEMENTS, 24 Chemical, supposed, t. 9, p. 4 ; t. 12, p. 9. ; true number of, 
uncertain do. ; Phonetic, t. 64, p. 41 ; equal to do. of Universe, t. 71, p. 45 ; 
of Sound charged with Meaning, t. 72, 73, pp. 45, 46; t. 80, p. 50; gov- 
ern Elaborations, t. 83, p. 53 ; Sounds distinguished from Signs, t. 88, 
89, p. 56 ; contradictory usage of signs of, in different languages, t. 90, p. 
57 ; Vowel, and Consonant, defined, t. 91, p. 57; Vowel, few, t. 92, p. 58; 
how pronounced, do. ; t. 94, p. 59 ; Exceptional Sounds, t. 95, 96, p. 61 ; 
t. 97, p. 63; t. 99, 100, p. 64; intimate, and Working, t. 146, p. 106; 
Mathematical and Lingual, Analogy of, t. 160, p. 130 ; Primary, of 
Form abstract, 1. 166, p. 189 ; of different Domains, identical. 1. 198, 199, 
p. 165 ; t. 216, p. 176 ; see Alphabet, and Sounds. 

ELLIS, Alexander J., cited, t. 79, p. 49. 

ELSBERG, namings of Classes of Sounds, t 116, p. 79 ; t. 179, p. 148. 

ENDO-LEXIC PUNCTUATION, t. 155, p. 123. 

ENDO-NATUROLOGY, Naski, t. 207, p. 172. 

ENGKAUVLIO, defined, t. 127, p. 94; distributed, t. 184, p. 156. 

ENGKAUVLSKI, as Scientology, t. 210, p. 173. 

EnsKi, Transcendental Dialectics Hegel, 1. 158, p. 127, et passim. 

ENVIRONMENT, Aumio Comte, Spencer, t. 185, p. 157. 

EPICOSMOLOGY, Hugh Doherty, 1. 145, p. 105. 

EQUALAKR:NSTA, see Ekwal-akrinsta. 

ETHER, type of Homogenism, t. 136, 137, p. 100. 

ETHEREALOGY, Table No. 3, 1. 130, p. 96. 

ETHICS, and Morphology, 1. 190, p. 159; Elements of, t. 217, p. 177. 

ETYMOLOGY, Comparative, t. 70, p. 44. 

EVEN, and Odd, t. 160, p. 129. 

EVOLUTION, is Art, (in Nature), t. 50, p. 33 ; has Three Stages, t. 54, p. 34; 
threefold, t. 55, p. 36. 

EXACTITUDE, see Precision. 

EXO-NATUROLOGY, Maski, t. 208, p. 172. 

F. 

FASCICULATED, see Bundle-Eoot- Words. 
FEMINISM, of Nature, t. 56, p. 36. 



210 INDEX. 

FERRIMA, see Form. 

FETICHISM, t. 217, p. 178. 

FIOIITE, alluded to, t. 7, p. 3 ; a Transcendental Ontologist, t. 158, p. 12V. 

FIGURE, is Absolute, Position Relative Form, t. 193, p. 161. 

FiouRE-AND-PosTURE, a special, named, t. 193, p. 160. 

FINE ARTS, see Ilwaunski. 

FINITE, The, t. 127, p. 94 ; a Species of The Unlimited, t. 128, p. 95. 

FIRE-PLACE, the Fund urn Vitce of the Edifice, t. 54, p. 36. 

Focus, see Fire-place. 

FORK, the, used for illustration, t. 5, 6, p. 2. 

FORM, defined, (Forma, Ferrima), t. 52, p. 33 ; t. 54, p. 35 ; the Hetero- 

genizing Element consonantal, t. 142, p. 104; what it consists of, t. 100, 

p. 139; t. 217, p. 177. 
FORMA, (Ferrima), see Form. 
FOUNDATIONS, Electro-Positive, Earthy, t. 15, p. 12 ; Analogue of Nature, 

t. 53, p. 34; Spiritual, are above, t. 54, p. 35 ; Analogue of Hoot, do. ; t. 

55, p. 36 ; of Languages, t. 87, p. 56. 

FOURIER, Transcendental Practical-Philosopher, t. 158, p. 128. 
FRACTIONAL, and Integral, t. 160-, p. 129. 
FRENCH ACADEMY, see Agassiz. 

G-. 

GENERALISMUS, referred to, t. 137, p. 100 ; mlau,io, within the Limitary, t. 

138, p. 101 ; t. 143, p. 105 ; 1. 184, p. 156. 
GENERALOGY, t. 138, p. 101. 

GENERATIVE PRINCIPLE, science, Masculine, t. 56, p. 36. 
GEOSPHERE, t. 145, p. 105. 

GERMAN, and Italian Languages characterized, t. 85, p. 54 ; t. 86, p. 55. 
GERMINAL POINT, Analogue of Art, t. 54, p. 35. 
" GLIDES," t. 156, p. 123. 
GOD-PRINCIPLE, see Logos. 
GOD'S WILL, the Supremo Law, scientifically discovered in Universology, 

Preface, p. vii. 

GOVERNMENT, The Universal, see Universal Government. 
" GRAfE," meaning of, t. 217, p. 178. 

GRAMMAR, distributed, t. 64, p. 41 ; of Alwato ; see Conjugation. 
GRAND RECONCILIATION, The, through Alwato, ot Philosophies, t. 159, p. 

128. 

GROUND, common, between Subject and Object Schelling, t. 158, p. 127. 
GUTTURALIZATIONB, Semitic, t. 156, p. 123. 

H. 

1! A.MILTON, Sir Win., on The Unconditioned, t. 128, p. '.).">. 



INDEX. 211 

HARMONIOLOGY, Table No. 4, 1. 130, p. 97. 

HEAD, of Column, the Basis of Inverted Procedure, t. 54, p. 35. 

HEGEL, alluded to, t. 7, p. 3 ; Transcendental Dialectician, t. 158, p. 127. 

HELMHOLTZ, cited, t. 223, p. 181. 

HERMETIC, t. 158, p. 127. 

HETEROGENISMUS, and Homogenismus, t. 133, p. 98, and to end of chap- 
ter; how same as Duismus, t. 214, p. 175. 

HINGING, t. 122, p. 91. 

HINGINGS, t. 160, p. 130, see Elements, and Bundle-Boot- Words. 

HOMOGENEITY, represented by Vowel-Sounds, t. Ill, p. 76. 

HOMOGENISMI, of Cosmos, Spheres, t. 145, p. 105. 

HOMOGENISMUS, and Heterogenismus, t. 133, p. 98, and to end of chapter; 
when Universal = The Infinite, t. 138, p. 101 ; how same as Unismus, 
t, 214, p. 175. 

HUMAN BODY, analogy of, with Edifice, t. 14, p. 11 ; the, a Minor Uni- 
verse, t. 62, p. 39 ; a Modelic Sphere, t. 63, p. 40. 

HUMAN MIND, the, a Minor Universe, t. 62, p. 39. 

HwAunio, The Spirit-World, Theandrismus, t. 129, p. 95. 

HWAUDSKI, The Science of the Fine Arts, t. 210, p. 173. 

HYBRIDITY, lingual, t. 25, p. 20 ; justified, t. 220, p. 180 ; t. 248, p. 198. 

HYPHEN, Alwaso uses of, 1. 155, p. 122. 

I. 

-!A, termination, t. 205, p. 171. 

IAU, t. 157, p. 124. 

IAU,IO, t. 183, p. 155. 

ICTUS, on stopped vowels, t. 154, p. 121. 

IDEAS, all possible, may be classified, t. 177, p. 147. 

IDENTITY OF LAW, t. 60, p. 39 ; Inherency of do., t. 62, do. 

IDEOLOGY, Table No. 4, t. 130, p. 96 

IESKI, Table No. 5, t. 131, p. 97. 

INARTICULATE SOUNDS, correspondence of, 1. 125, p. 93. 

INCLINATION, in Morals, t. 217, p. 178. 

INCONCEIVABILITY OF THE OPPOSITE, t. 174, p. 145. 

INDEX, pp. 203-224. 

INDIVIDUALITY, DIVERGENT and CONVERGENT, t. 217, p. 177. 

INEXPUGNABILITY OF PRIME ELEMENTS, t. 84, 85, p. 54. 

IXFERNOLOGY, Table No. 4, t. 130. p. 97. 

INFINITE, The, see Reality; Species of The Unlimited, t. 128, p. 95; t. 126, 

p. 93; t. 127, p. 94; == Hoinogenism, t. 138, p. 101. 
INFINITIES, Special, t. 138, p. 101. 
INHERENCY, Aunio, t. 185, p. 157. 



212 INDEX. 

INHERENT MEANINGS of Sounds, see Sounds. 

INHEREVT NECESSITY, t. 60, p. 39 ; t. 180, p. 148. 

INITIALS, use of, t. 222, p. 181. 

INORGANISMUS, t. 137, p. 101 ; t. 135, p. 157. 

I'ISKI, Transcendental Ontology Fichte, t. 158, p. 127, (etc.) 

INSTINCTUAL LANGUAGE, see Old Style Languages. 

INTEGRAL, and Fractional, t. 160, p. 130. 

INTEGRALISM, Final and All-sided Philosophy, t. 218, p. 178; t. 231, p. 185 

INTELLIGENCE, Pure Transcendental Ficlite, t. 158, p. 127. 

INTERSPACES, of Silence ; see Silences = Negation, t. 143, p. 104. 

INTERSTICES, = Negation, t. 143, p. 104. 

INVERSE AND DIRECT ORDER, of Sounds, t. 157, p. 124. 

-lo, as termination, distributed, t. 181, 182, pp. 149-155 ; t. 20."), p. 171. 

-Isiius, as termination, defined, Vocabulary ; t. 45, p. 31. 

ITALIAN, and German Languages characterized, t. 85, p. 54 ; t. 86, p. 55. 

ITALICS, etc., free use of, t. 221, p. 180. 

J. 

JUDGMENT, see Non-inclinism. 

K. 

KANT, General TranscendentaJist, t. 153, p. 128 ; cited, t. 185, p. 156. 

KAUV,IO, the Specialismus, t. 139, p. 102. 

KEN, or keenness of mind, t. 170, p. 142. 

KINGDOMS, the Three, of Nature, t. 118, p. 80 ; t. 14'"), p. 103. 

KLIX-EIN, and /-in-ein, Greek, t. 194, p. 161. 

KKIX-EIN krinsta, see yWin-ein ; t. 194, p. 161. 

L. 

L, (and E), Inherent Meanings of, illustrated in English, t. 119, pp. 82-87. 

LANGUAGE, a Minor Universe, t. 63, p. 39 ; the Modelic one, do., Media- 
torial, do. ; two Naturismal Methods with, t. 64, 65, 68, pp. 40-43 ; 
Scientismal Method repeats the Logic of Naturism, t. 69, p. 44 ; meas- 
ures the distribution of the Universe, t. 71, p. 45; A NEW SCIENTIFIC 
UNIVERSAL, t. 74, p. 46 ; entire, distributed by the Alphabet, t. 80, p. 50 ; 
distributes the Universe, t. 81, do. ; t. 150, p. 109 ; only accidentally 
the leading subject, t. 215, p. 175; t. 216, p. 177 ; Angelic, t. 224, p. 132. 

LANGUAGES, some characterized by Vowels, some by Consonants, t. 85, p. 54. 

LARDNER, Dr. Dionisius, on Steam Navigation of the Ocean, t. 120, p. 88. 

LAW, of Analogy, not understood, t. 9, p. 4; Inherent and Necessary, t. 
62, p. 39 ; the Analogue of a Line, t. 168, p. 141; Essential, Indux-llinir, 
of all Being, t. 199, p. 165 ; Domain of, t. 206, p. 171. 

LEIIRE, (Ger.) equal to lore or -logy, t. 25, p. 20. 



INDEX. 213 

LEPSITJS, cited, t. 79, p. 49 ; 1. 156, p. 123. 

LIFE, an Analogue of Art, t. 54, p. 35. 

LIGHTENING, the, and the Chemical Elements, 1. 14, p. 11 ; see Dome. 

LIMITARY, The, Consonantal, t. 138, p. 101. 

LIMITATION Kant, 1. 112, p. 76 ; 1. 121, p. 90 ; t. 122, 123, p. 91 ; t. 124, p. 
92. 

LIMITATIONS, see Fositings. 

LIMITED, The, see Sounds. 

LIMITING, The, see Sounds. 

LIMITOSKI, t. 210, p. 173. 

LINE, an Analogue of a Career, t. 54, p. 34; k, etc., t. 160, p. 130; de- 
fined, t. 165, p. 138; see Abstractions. 

LINGUO-AETOLOGY, see Artology. 

LrNGUo-NATUROLOGY, see Naturology. 

LiNGtro-SciENTOLoaY, see Scientology. 

LIP-SOUNDS, p and/, t. 101, p. 65 ; & and V, t. 102, do. 

LIQUIDITIES, t. 137, p. 100 ; t. 138, p. 101 ; t. 143, p. 105. 

LIQUIDS, Table No. 1, t. 94, p. 60; t. 113, p. 77; 1. 133, p. 101 ; distrib- 
uted, t. 143, 144, p. 105. 

LITERATURE, of Existing Languages, how affected by Alwato, t. 150, p. 
109. 

LOGIC, a branch of language, t. 64, p. 41 ; Science of Laws and Principles, 
embraced in Analogy, t. 168, p. 141 ; t. 170, p. 142. 

LOGICAL ALPHABET, referred to, t. 81, p. 50. 

LOGOS, the, Title-page, 1. 19, p. 17; as word-ending, t. 20, p. IS; t. 199, 
p. 165 ; the God-Principle, t. 215, 216, p. 176. 

-LoGY, as termination, t. 19, p. 17 ; t. 20, p. 18 ; t. 22, p. 19 ; t, 25, p. 20 ; 
for Spencer's Abstract, etc., 1. 161, p. 136; for names of New Sciences, 
see An,io, Au n io, Tables, Word-building. 

LONG KUN, t. 185, p. 157. 

LRAUIO, distributed, t. 185, p. 157. 

M. 

MAGI, t. 158, p. 127. 

MARGINAL IMPERFECTION, alluded to, t. 12, p. 9. 
MARKED Letters, Accent, etc., t. 152-156, pp. 119-123. 
MASCULISM, of Science, t. 56, p. 36. 
MATERIALOGY, Table No. 4, 1. 130, p. 9S. 
MATERIALS, see Homogenismus. 

MATHEMATICAL ELEMENTS, and Lingual, Analogy of, t. 160, p. 130. 
MATHEMATICS, Scientifically Positive, t. 170, p. 143 ; quarrel of, with Na- 
tural Science, t. 174, p. 145 ; peculiarly true, do. 



214 INDEX. 

MoCosH, 011 LOGIC, Note, t. 177, p. 147. 

" MEANING," of Facts Richard Owen, t. 17, p. 14. 

MEANINGS, of Sound, Inherent, see Elements, and Sounds. 

MECHANICS, Pauski, t. 139, p. 102 ; push, pull, etc., t. 217, p. 177. 

MERE PREPONDERANCE, t. 84, p. 54 ; t. 85, p. 55. 

METALS, heavy, t. 13, p. 10 ; see Dome. 

METAPHYSICS, of Science, t. 175, p. 146. 

METAPHYSIOA-THEOLOGICAL, see Theologies-Metaphysical. 

METHOD, Uuiversological, Condensed Statement of, p. xvi. ; TJie ANTIOIPA 

TORY, t. 9, p. 4 ; Inductive, Deductive, t. 10, 11, pp. 5, 6 ; Universolog' 

ical, restated, t. 219, p. 179. 
METHODS, in study of Language, t. 64, p. 40. 
MILLIONS, of words, will be spontaneously formed, t. 150, p. 108. 
MIND, see Human Mind. 
MINIATURE UNIVERSE, see Minor Universe. 
MINOR UNIVERSE, every Sphere is one, t. 62, p. 39 ; Language especially, 

t. 63, p. 40 ; t. 71, p. 45 ; t. 73, p. 46 ; t. 215, p. 175. 
MISSIONARY SOCIETY, English Church, t. 79, p. 49. 
MLAU,IO, The Generalismus, t. 138, p. 101 ; t. 185, p. 156 ; distributed, t. 

185, p. 157. 

MODELS, see Patterns. 

MONOSPHEROLOGY, defined, t. 68, 69, p. 44 ; Table No. 6, t. 132, p. 98. 
MONOTHEISM, t. 217, p. 178. 
MORALS, see Ethics. 
MOBPHOLOGY, the Science of Form, t. 23, p. 19 ; Cosmical Bi-trinacria, etc., 

t. 188-195, pp. 158-162. 
MOTHER-PRINCIPLE, Nature, t. 56, p. 36. 
MOTOID, etc.. see Alphabet. 
MOTOLOGY, Table No. 4, t. 130, p. 97. 
MOVEMENT, Analogous with Art, t. 50, 51, p. 33. 
MUELLER, Max, cited, Note, t. 113, p. 77. 
Music, a branch of language, t. 64, p. 41 ; t. 223, p. 181 ; t. 225, p. 183 ; 

will be reconstructed by Alwato, t. 227, p. 184. 
MYSTICS, t. 158, p. 127. 

N. 

NASALIZATION, needed in English, t 93, p. 59; what, how represented, t. 
97, p. 62 ; sign of Incomprehensibility, t. 126, p. 94; twang in the 
t. 151, p. 113 ; fully defined, 1. 153, p. 120 ; sign of, t, 156, p. 123 ; t. 
pp. 127, 128 ; t. 183, p. 155 ; t. 205, p. 170; t. 210, p. 173. 

NASALS, see Liquids. 



INDEX. 215 

NASCENT STATE, 1. 183, p. 155. 

NATION, Great Planetary, of the Future, t. 74, p. 46. 

NATURALIZATION, of Foreign words, in Alwato, t. 203, p. 167. 

NATURAL SCIENCES, inexact terms legitimate in, 1. 12, p. 10; not the High 

Scientific Domain, t. 173, p. 145 ; facts of the, still true ; how ; t. 174, 

175, do. 

NATURASKI, Tables, Nos. 9, 10, 11, t. 211, 213, p. 174. 
NATURE, a Domain of the Universe, t. 44, p. 31 ; corresponds to Unism, t. 

47, do. ; defined, t. 49, p. 32 ; is Feminine, t. 56, p. 36 ; irregular, nou- 

scientoid, 1. 171, 172, pp. 143, 144 ; in what sense true, 1. 174, 175, p. 

145 ; subordinate to Science, t. 206, p. 172 ; t. 209, p. 173 ; see Nature- 

Science-and-Art. 
NATURE-SciENcs-and-ART, defined and shown as a Primitive Distribution 

of the Universe, t. 47, p. 31 ; defined, t. 49, p. 32 ; t. 51, 52, p. 33 ; 

compared to the parts of an Edifice, t. 53, p. 34 ; to a Line, t. 54, do. ; 

further defined ; not mere Facts, t. 55, p. 36 ; Nature, Science, and Art, 

Indeterminate, t. 183, p. 155. 

NATURISMUS, defined, t. 45, p. 31 ; there is one of every Sphere, t. 62, p. 39. 
NATUROLOGY, defined, t. 57, p. 37 ; its scope, t, 60, p. 38 ; t. 61, p. 39 ; of 

Speech, t. 68, p. 44 ; t. 74, 75, p. 47 ; 1. 130, p. 96 (Table) ; ASKI, t. 157, 

p. 125; named and tabulated, Tables, Nos. 9, 10, 11, t. 211-213, p. 174. 
NATUROLOGY, SCIENTOLOGY, and ARTOLOGY, various namings of, t. 205- 

211, pp. 170-174 (Tables Nos. 9, 10, 11.) 
NATURO-METAPHYSICS, Table No. 5, t. 131, p. 97. 
NEGATION Kant, t. Ill, p. 76; t. 121, p. 90; 1. 122, 123, pp. 91, 92; t. 

123, 124, p. 92 ; Vocal, t. 143, p. 104. 
NEGATIVE, see Positive. 

NEW JERUSALEM, the, dimensions of, t. 197, p. 164. 
NOMOLOGY, Tables, Nos. 4, 5, t. 130, 131, pp. 96, 97. 
NON-INCLINISM, defined, t. 194, p. 161. 
NON-METALS, light, t. 13, p. 10 ; see Dome. 

NON-PLURALIZABLE SUBSTANTIVES, t. 144, p. 105. 

" NOTHING," see Silences, Negation, Zero. 

NOTHINGS, Pure, all Abstractions are so, t. 164, p. 138, and to end of 

chapter. 

NOTICE TO EEADER, p. x. 
NUMBER, Elements of, t. 160, p. 129 ; t. 167, p. 139 ; t. 216, p. 176. 

o. 

OBJECTIONS, to the possibility of Universology, answered, t.29-40, pp. 22-28. 

OBJECTIVE, The, Mau,io, t. 185, p. 156. 

OBJECT-TEACHING, for Universology and Alwato, t. 198, p. 165. 



216 INDEX. 

ODD, and Even, t. 160, p. 1'2'J. 

OLD STYLE LANGUAGES, 1. 150, p. 109. 

-OLOGT, see -logy. 

ONE, Two, and THREE, furnish the naming* of UNISM, DUISM, and TRI- 

NISM, t. 2, p. 1 ; t. 46, p. 31. 
ONTOLOGICAL ALPHABET, referred to, t. 81, p. 51. 
ONTOLOGY, Tables, Nos. 4, 5, 1. 130, 131, pp. 96, 97. 
ORDER, the First or Primitive, and the " Inverted," t. 53, p. 34 ; Keversc. 

of Discovery, Table No. 9, t. 211, p. 174 ; a priori and a, posteriori, Table 

No. 9, do. 
ORDERS, of Vowels and Consonants, t. 98, p. 63 ; Direct and Inverse of 

do., 1. 157, p. 124 ; see Methods. 
ORGANISAIUB, The Grand, subdivides into three Kingdoms, t. 137, p. 101 ; 

1. 140, p. 103 ; t. 185, p. 157. 
OPTICS, Incidence and Reflection, t. 217, p. 177. 
OSKI, t. 207, p. 172. 
OVERLAPPING, alluded to, 1. 12, p. 9. 
OWEN, Eichard, cited, t. 17, p. 14; Table No. 4, 1. 130, p. 96. 

P. 

PAIES, of Sounds, see Elements, and Souncls. 

PALATAL SOUNDS, 1. 156, p. 123. 

PANTAROHISM, the Organic Unity and Unitary Polity of the Humanity of 

the Future, t. 218, p. 178 ; t. 229, 232, p. 185 ; see Universal Government. 
PARALLELISM, 1. 196, 197, pp. 162-164. 

PARTICULARIZATION, Individuation, etc. ; Hwau,io, t. 184, p. 156. 
PARTINGS, and Unitiugs, t. 160,, p. 130 ; see Elements and Bundle-Koot- 

Words. 

PATHOGNOMIO LINES Buchanan, t. 190, p. 159. 
PATTERNS, Working, for our Constructions, 1. 191, p. 160. 
PERAS, To, see Sounds. 
PHILOSOPHY, Ordinary, named, t. 126, p. 94; Cardmary, Transcendent:)!, 

or Eational, do. ; Practical, Table No. 4, 1. 130, p. 97 ; Table No. 5, t. 

130, p. 97 ; named, Table No. 6, 1. 132, p. 98 ; 1. 157, pp. 125, 126 ; Grand 

departments of, Fichte, etc., 1. 158, p. 127. 
PHONETIC ALPHABET, see Alphabet. 
PHONOGRAPHY, Unvocalized, to illustrate Undiacriticised types, t. 154, p. 

122 ; see Pitman. 

PHONOS, the Something-Element of Speech, t. 124, p. 92, see Reality. 
PHRENOLOGY, an Ethnical and National, a New Science, how to be found- 
ed, t. 226, p. 184. 
PHYSICS, (Fauski), Special, Thauski, t. 139, p. 102. 



INDEX. 217 

PITMAN, Isaac, referred to, t. 79, p. 49 ; distinguishes Light and Heavy 
Sounds, t. 103, p. 65 ; Extract from Steno-phonographic Alphabet of, 
Table No. 2, t. 107, p. 67. 

PLAN, of Nature, in Organization, t. 84, p. 53 ; in Language, t. 85, p. 54. 

PLANT, or Tree, Type to illustrate Universal Distribution, t. 54, p. 35. 

PLATO, Table No. 4, t. 130, p. 96 ; cited, and classified, 1. 158, p. 128. 

PLUMULE, of the Plant, Analogue of Superstructure, t. 54, p. 35. 

PLURALITY-TERMINATIONS, 1. 160, p. 129. 

PNEUMATISMUS, of Speech, Hwaimio, t. 214, p. 175. 

POINT, of Conjunction (Copulative), Analogue of Art, t. 54, p. 35 ; Ger- 
minal, do. ; as Pointer, 1. 160, p. 130; defined, 1. 165, p. 138 ; repeats Unit, 
t. 167, p. 140; Analogue of a Principle, t. 168, p. 141 ; see Abstractions. 

POLITY, the Future Human, t. 218, p. 178 ; see Universal Government, and 
Pautarcbisrn. 

POLYTHEISM, t. 217, p. 178. 

POSITINGS, and Limitations, Abstract, in Space, t. 166, p. 139. 

POSITION, First Normal, The Perpendicular, t. 54, p. 35. 

POSITIVE, and Negative, reversal of, from Natural and Scientic Standings, 
respectively, t. 164, p. 138 ; t. 170, p. 142. 

" POSITIVE" SCIENCE, so called, rank of; The Higher ; t. 175, p. 145. 

POSTURE, and Figure, of Bi-trinacria, t. 194, p. 161 ; see Position. 

PRECISION, of Alwato, illustrated, t. 196, p. 162. 

PREFACE, pp. iii-ix. 

PRIMITIVE ELEMENTS, see Ultimate Elements. 

PRINCIPLES, only Three ; apparent exceptions, t. 2, 3, p. 1 ; first statement 
of, strictly Universal, t. 8, p. 3 ; t. 46, p. 31 ; analogous to Points, 1. 168, 
p. 141 ; Universal Scientific, t. 199, p. 166 ; GOVERNING UNIVERSAL, in 
various Domains, t. 216, p. 176. 

PROGENISM, of Art, Androgyne, as of the child partaking of the nature of 
father and mother, t. 56, p. 36. 

PRONOUNS, of Alwato, t. 203, p. 167 ; Table No. 8, t. 204, p. 169. 

PRONUNCIATION, of the Vowels, t, 92, p. 58 ; t. 94, p. 59 ; of Exceptional 
Letters, t. 95, p. 61 ; diacriticised, t. 152-156, pp. 119-123. 

PROOFS, kinds of, that, Sounds have INHERENT MEANINGS, t. 114, p. 78, 
and to end of the chapter. 

PROPRIUM, Aunio Swedenborg, t. 185, p. 157. 

PROSTHETIC, E, t. 127, p. 94. 

PUNCTUATION, Alwaso, t, 152-156, pp. 119-123 ; Endo-lexic, t. 155, p. 123. 

PUNCTUM VITJS, (Point of Life), defined, t. 54, p. 35. 

R. 

K, (and L), inherent meanings of, illustrated in English, t. 119, pp. 82-87. 



218 INDEX. 

RAPP, cited, t. 79, p. 49. 

READING, art of, badly taught among us, t. 106, p. 67. 

REALITY -Kant, the Vowels, t. Ill, p. 76 ; t. 121, p. 90 ; t. 122, 123, p. 91 ; 

t. 124, p. 92 ; t. 141, p. 104 ; t. 144, p. 105 ; t. 151, p. 115 ; t. 179, p. 14S ; 

t. 181, p. 149 ; t. 182, p. 155 ; t. 205, p. 171 ; t. 208, p. 172 ; t. 210, p. 

173 ; t. 214, p. 175 ; t. 216, p. 176. 
REASON, the Pure, the Supreme Faculty iu Science, t. 175, p. 146 ; Comte, 

Aungio, t. 185, p. 157. 
RECONCILIATION, Social, t. 217, p. 177; The Grand Pantarchal, t. 218, p. 

178; t, 241, p. 192; t. 244, p. 193; see Pautarchism, and Universal 

Government. 

RECTANGTJLARITY, see Angularity. 
RECTITUDE, in Morals, t. 217, p. 178. 
RELATION, converted into Law, t. 206, p. 171. 
RELATIVE, Form (eso) = Posture, t. 193. p. 161 ; (i,ia), t. 217, p. 177; 

Number (eso), t. 216, p. 176 ; Lingual, do., p. 177. 
RELIGION, named, Table No. 6, t. 132, p. 98 ; The Pautarchal, irradiating 

centre of all Social Affairs, t. 218, p. 178. 
RHETORIC, a branch of language, t. 64, p. 41. 
ROOT, Analogue of, Foundation, t. 54, p. 35. 
ROOT-WORDS, Two-letter or Bi-literal, t. 146, -147, p. 106 ; Number of, t. 

149, p. 108 ; Unilateral, t. 151, pp. 109-113 ; Two-Syllable, Mere Roots, 

t. 160, pp. 129-135 ; see Elements, Bauclle-Root-Words. 
RULE, ruler, see Struightness. 

s. 

SANSCRIT, Aspirates, Cerebrals, etc., t. 156, p. 123 ; Roots, t. 160, p. 129. 

SOUELLING, cited and classified, t. 158, pp. 127, 128. 

SCIENCE, must take on a new elevation, t. 17, p. 14; defined, t. 22, p. 18; a 
Domain of Being, t. 44, p. 31 ; corresponds to Duisrn, t. 47, do. ; again 
defined, t. 49, p. 32 ; Line or Ferrima, Analogue of, t. 54, p. 35 ; is 
Masculine, t. 56, p. 36 ; named, Table No. 6, t. 132, p. 98 ; The Abstnu-t 
the Governing Branch of, t. 170, p. 143, why, t. 171-173, pp. 143-14:.; 
T7te Only True, t. 171, p. 143 ; new and commanding relation of, to Gov- 
ernment, t. 109, p. 166; presides over Nature, t. 206, p. 172; see Na- 
ture-Science-and-Art. 

SCIENCES, how many ? a difficult question ; t. 26, p. 21 ; as many as there 
are Domains of Being, t. 27, p. 22 ; Ending for, Ahvali, in -ski, t. 126, 
p. 94 ; 1. 157, pp. 125-127 ; et passim. 

SOIENTISMUS, defined, Vocabulary ; t. 45, p. 31 ; there is one of every 
Splu-re, t. 62, p. 39. 

SCIENTOLOGY, defined, t. 53, p. 37 ; is new, t. 60, p. 38 ; of Language and 



INDEX. 219 

of the Universe, t. 69-81, pp. 44-51 ; t. 130, p. 96 (Table) ; OSKI, 1. 157, 
p. 126 ; Universological, a third Abstract Science, t. 168, p. 141 ; Uni- 
versological, asserts the supremacy of Spirit over Matter, of The Ab- 
stract over The Concrete, etc., 1. 175, p. 146 ; final triumph of, what will 
be, t. 198, p. 165 ; t. 210, p. 173 ; named, Tables, Nos. 9, 10, 11, t. 211- 
213, p. 174. 
SCIENTO-PHILOSOPHY, Table No. 3, 1. 130, p. 96 ; Table No. 5, 1. 131, p. 97 ; 

1. 157, pp. 126, 127. 
SEATS, of Sound, three, Back-Mouth, Middle-Mouth, Front-Mouth, t. 79, 

p. 50 ; Table No. 1, t. 94, p. 60 ; t. 103, p. 65. 
SEMICOLON, Alwaso uses of, t. 155, p. 122. 
SEMITIC GUTTURALIZATIONS, t. 156, p. 123. 
SENSES, the, opposed to the Keason, t. 175, p. 145. 
SEQUENCES (" CO-SEQUENCES "), 1. 185, p. 157. 
SESQUISM, = Pneumatismus, t. 214, p. 175. 
SHAPE, see Form. 

SHAPINGS, of oil things to be hereafter understood, t. 191, p. 160. 
SHAUBIO, t. 184, p. 156 ; distributed, t. 185, p. 157. 
SHAUPSKI, Abstractology Spencer, t. 139, p. 102. 
-Sno, termination, t. 151, p. 114. 
SHORT HUN, t. 185, p. 157. 
SI,ENSKI, see Skiski. 
SILECNES, in Speech, the Analogue of Zero, and of Nothing or NEGATION 

Kant, t. Ill, p. 76 ; see Negation, and Nothings. 
SIXTY-FOUR, a Typical Number, t. 12, p. 9. 

-SKI, termination for Science, t. 126, p. 94; t. 157, p. 125 ; t. 161, p. 137. 
SKISKT, Scientology, Tables Nos. 9, 10, 11, t. 211-213, p. 174. 
-So, termination, t. 151, p. 114 ; distributed, t. 185, p. 156. 
SOLID, Geometrical, an Abstraction, t. 165, p. 138 ; t. 166, p. 139. 
SOMETHING- ELEMENT, represented by Vowels, t. Ill, p. 76 ; t. 124, p. 92 ; 

see Eeality. 

SONG, a branch of language, t. 64, p. 41. 

SOUNDS, Elementary, of Speech, not always represented by single letters, 
t. 99, p. 63 ; exceptional, as Compound Elements, do. ; LIGHT and 
HEAVY ; ABSTBACT-OID and CONORET-OID, t. 101, 102, pp. 64, 65 ; Light and 
Slack-faced Letters, t. 102, p. 65 ; distinction seized on by Pitman, t. 
103, p. 65 ; in pairs, do., t. 103, p. 66 (Mule and Female); illustrated, 
Table No. 2, t. 107, p. 67 ; INHERENT MEANINGS of, t. 82, p. 52; t. 83, p. 
53 ; t. 84, pp. 53, 54 ; t. 85, p. 54 ; t. 87, p. 55 ; t. 108, p. 68 ; Table 
No. 3, t. 109, pp. 69-75 ; Justification of the assignments of do., 1. 110- 
120, pp. 76-89 ; Classes of, = Laws, t. 110, p. 76 ; the Vowels plasmal 
nndhotnogeneous, = EEALITY Kant, t. Ill, p. 76 ; Consonants = Limits, 



220 INDEX. 

Heterogeneity, " LIMITATION "Kant, t. 112, do. ; The Limited, The 
Limiting, to peras, do., p. 77 ; The Ambigu's or Coalescents Spirit 
and Vitality, do. ; names of Classes of, t. 113, do. ; L and K, mean- 
ings of, in English, t. 119, pp. 82-88 ; Cosmic Correspondences of, 1. 121, 
p. 90, and to end of chapter; t. 127, p. 94; Meaning of Ambigu's, t. 
129, p. 95 ; Ultimate, and Working Elements, t. 146, p. 106 ; SHORT 
VOWELS, Marked Letters, etc., t. 152-150, pp. 119-123 ; arrangement of, 
in composition, t. 157, p. 124 ; Light and Heavy, or Thin and Thick, 
fitness of, for naming THE ABSTRACT and THE CONCRETE, t. 178, p. 147 ; 
other namings of, Unintoned, Intoned, Elsberg, t. 179, p. 148 ; Conso- 
nets and Cousonads, do. ; Vowel, have a musical basis Helmholtz, t. 
223, p. 181 ; see Elements, and Seats of Sound. 

"SOVEREIGNTY, of the Individual,"- -Warren, t. 217, p. 177. 

SPACE, a Nothing, t. 165, p. 138 ; Out-, and In-, 1. 169, p. 141 ; 1. 172, p. 144. 

SPA-CE-OLOGY, Table No. 4, t. 130, p. 96. 

" SPACES." " Blanks " = Space = Silences, t. 123, p. 92. 

SPECIALISTS, onr Scientists mostly so, t. 10, p. 4 ; special faculties of, need 
training, 1. 12, p. 7 ; in Science, incompetent to judge Universology, t. 
12, pp. 7-9 ; t. 16, p. 12; t. 17, p. 13; Universology declines the juris- 
diction of, t. 18, p. 15 ; are tending towards Universology, Note, do. : 
who, t. 139, p. 102 ; learned ants, t. 246, p.-196. 

SPECIALITE Balzac, Table No. 9, t. 211, p. 174. 

SPECIALIZATION, Shaubio, t. 184, p. 156. 

SPECIALOGY, t. 139, p. 102. 

SPEECH, Oral, a branch of language, t. 64, p. 41. 

SPEECH-TEMPLE, its Portico and Inner Galleries, t. 150, p. 109. 

SPELLING BY SOUND, t. 91, p. 57. 

SPENCER, Herbert, cited, t. 26, p. 21 ; his distribution of the Sciences, t. 
139, p. 102, and Note ; an Echosophist, t. 159, p. 128; t. 161, p. 136; t. 
168, p. 141; t. 185, p. 157. 

" SPHERES," Spiritual, emanated, t. 180, p. 148. 

"SPIRIT," diffusive emanation, t, 180, p. 148; do. "of Truth," do. 

SPIRITUALISTIC KEALITII s, rank of, t. 175, p. 146. 

SPIRIT-WORLD, Hwaunio, 1. 129, p. 95. 

SQUEEZING, and Stretching, t. 12, p. 10. 

STAGES, of Mental Evolution, t. 9, p. 4; t. 10, p. 5; t. 12, p. 6 ; see Stories. 

STATIC, The, Comte, t. 185, p. 157. 

STATOID, etc., see Alphabet, Sounds. 

STOPPED VOWELS, how represented, t. 154, p. 121. 

STORIES, of Edifice, t. 54, p. 35. 

STRAIGUTNESS, test of Science, t. 171, pp. 143, 144 ; possible only in ideal, 
t. 172, p. 144; t. 174, p. 145. 



INDEX. 221 

STREAMS, see Career. 

STUFFS, Substances, Materials ; see Homogenismus, and Reality 

SUBDOMINANCE, t. 84, p. 54; t. 85, p. 55; t. 119, p. 82. 

SUBJECTIVE, The, Nauio, t. 185, p. 156. 

SUBSTANCE, and FORM, t. 49, p. 32 ; FORM, and MOVEMENT, = Nature, Sci- 
ence, and Art, do.; (Substance), defined, t. 52, p. 33; Homogeneous, t- 
141, p. 104; t. 166, p. 139; see Eeality, and Homogeuisnius. 

SUPERINCUMBENCY, its relation to foundation, t. 55, p. 36. 

" SUPERIOR LETTERS," defined, and uses of, t. 156, p. 123. 

SUPERNOLOGY, Table No. 4, t. 130, p. 97. 

SUPERSTRUCTURE, Analogue of Science, etc., t. 53, p. 34; t. 54, p. 35. 

SWEDENBORG, representative name in Theandrology, t. 129, p. 96 ; cited 
for proprinm, t. 185, p. 157 ; Heavens and Hells, or Spiritual Cosmogony 
of, t. 190, p. 159 ; on the Meanings of the Vowels, in the Speech of the 
Angels, t. 223-226, pp. 183-184. 

SYNTAX, of Alwato, (Conjugation), t. 200-204 (Table No. 6), pp. 166-169. 

" SYNTHESIS," of Hegel and Fichte, alluded to, t. 7, p. 3. 

T. 

TABLE OF CONTENTS, p. xv. 

TABLES, No. 1 THE ALPHABET, t. 94, p. 60; No. 2, Pitnianian Alphabet, 
t. 107, p. 67 ; No. 3, INHERENT MEANINGS OF SOUNDS, t. 109, p. 69 ; No. 
4, Elementism and Elaborism, t. 130, p. 96 ; No. 5, do., 1. 131, p. 97 ; No. 
6, PHILOSOPHY, SCIENCE, RELIGION, t. 132, p. 98 ; No. 7, CONJUGATION OF 
THE ALWASO VERB, t. 203, p. 168; No. 8, The Alwaso Pronouns, t. 204, 
p. 169 ; No. 9, Nature, Science, and Art, in the Order of Discovery, t. 

211, p. 174; Nos. 10, 11, Naturology, Scientology, Artology, named, t. 

212, 213, p. 174. 

TAUTUS ERUDITUS, mental, required, in Primitive Word-building, t. 148, 

p. lo7. 
TECHNICALS, adaptation of Alwato to use for, t. 187, p. 158, and to end 

of chapter. 
TEMPLE, the Chemical, 1. 13, p. 10; t. 16, p. 12 ; of Speech, 1. 150, p. 109 ; 

see Dome, Universe. 
TEMPOROLOGY, Table No. 4, t. 130, p. 96 ; of the Verb, Tenses, t. 200, p. 

166. 
TERMINAL CONVERSION INTO OPPO-ITES, of Meanings of Sounds, t. 119, 

p. 82. 
TERMINATIONS, -io, -ia, t. 126, p. 93 ; -ski, do., p. 94 ; -so, t. 140, p. 103 ; 

-so, -s'lo, -to, -ski, -li, -ni, t. 151, pp. 114, 115; for Plurality, t. 160, p. 

129. 



222 INDEX. 

TH, and DH, two Sounds of th, in English, t. 104, 105, p. 66. 

TlIALLATOSPHERE, t. 145, p. 105. 

THEANDRISMUS, Hwaunio, t. 129, p. 95. 

THEOLOGIOA- METAPHYSICAL, First Essay, yielding, t. 175, p. 146. 

" THESIS," of Hegel and Fichte, alluded to, t. 7, p. 3. 

THIN, Things, t. 176, p. 146 ; Sounds, t. 178, p. 147 ; Thick, do. ; see 
Sounds, and Elements. 

THOUGHT-LINE, referred to, t. 54, p. 34; defined, t. 163, p. 140; = Laws, 
t. 168, p. 141 ; 1. 170, p. 142. 

THOUGHT-POINTS, t. 168, p. 140 ; t. 169, p. 141 ; t. 170, pp. 142, 143. 

THOUGHT-RELATIONS Kant, Hegel, t. 158, p. 127. 

THOUGHT-SPACE, t. 168, p. 140; t. 169, p. 141 ; t. 170, p. 143. 

THOUGHT-SURFACES, t. 168, p. 140 ; t. 170, p. 142. 

TIKIWA, see Alwato. 

TIME, an Abstraction, or Nothing, t. 165, p. 138. 

TITLE-PAGE, p. 1. 

-To, termination, t. 151, p. 114; distributed, t. 185, p. 156. 

TOTISMUS, how same as Trinismus, t. 214, p. 175 ; see Whole. 

TRANSCENDENTAL, The, t. 126, p. 94 ; t. 128, p. 95. 

TREE, or Plant, Type to illustrate Universal Distribution, t. 54, p. 35. 

TRINISM, introduced, and naming of, t. 2, p. 1 ^ signifies Totality, t. 6, p. 2 ; 
Jdnge-UTce, do., t. 7, p. 3; Compound; deficit of namings of, do., (t. 7, p. 
3); = "Synthesis" do., referred to, t. 8, p. 4; t. 46, p. 31; echoes to 
Art, t. 47, do.; the Third Universal Principle, related to the Number 
Three, t. 82, p. 52 ; various names of, t. 214, p. 175 ; see CarJinism, Art- 
ism, Artismus, Artology, and Unism-Duism-and-Trinism. 

TraNisMrs, how same as Totismus, t. 214, p. 175. 

TRINITARIANISM, t. 217, p. 178. 

TRUTH, is of two kinds, t. 175, p. 145. 

TWANG, in the Nose of the Religious Enthusiast, meaning of, 1. 151, p. 113. 

TWO-LETTER ROOT-WORDS, t. 146, 147, p. 106. 

TYPE, the Line a, of a Career, t. 54, p. 34; Primal and Universal of Being, 
t. 55, p. 36 ; Language a, of the Universe, t. 63, p. 40 ; the Ether is so 
of Homogenism, t. 136, p. 100 ; see Tree, or Plant. 

TJ. 

ULTERIOR AND REACTIONARY CONSEQUENCE, Lau,io, 1. 185, p. 157. 
ULTIMATE ELEMENTS, defined, t. 146, p. 106. 
UNCONDITIONED, The Sir Wrn. Hamilton, t. 128, p. 95. 
UNDIFFERENTIATED, The, defined, t. 133, p. 98. 
UNEUPHONEOUS NAMINGS, justified, Note, t. 139, p. 102. 



INDEX. 223 

UNISM, introduced, and naming of, t. 2, p. 1 ; various namings of, t. 4, p. 
2; referred to, t. 8, p. 4; t. 46, p. 31 ; echoes to Nature, t. 47, do. ; the 
First Universal Principle, related to the Number One; hence Elementis- 
nius, t. 82, p. 52 ; t. 214, p. 175; various names of, do. 

UNTSM-DIKSM-AND-TRINISM, t. 79, p. 50; Sociological, t. 217, p. 177. 

UNISMUS, how same as Homogenismus, (au) t. 210, t. 173 ; t. 214, p. 175. 

UNIT, a Thought-point, repeats Point and Thing, t. 167, p. 140 ; in a Sum, 
t. 163, do. ; t. 169, p. 141 ; see Thought-Point. 

UNITARIANISM-, t. 217, p. 178. 

UNITINQS, see Partings. 

UNITY OF SYSTEM, in Education, Preface, p. vii ; in the Universe, 1. 11, p. 
5; Lingual, t. 150, p. 109; in Science, Philosophy, Government, Ee- 
ligion, t. 218, p. 178; see University. 

UNIVERSAL ANALOGY, basis of Universology, t. 8, p. 3 ; t. 9, p. 4 ; t. 62, 
p. 39. 

UNIVERSAL GOVERNMENT, to result from Universology, Preface, viii ; t. 
218, p. 178 ; t. 232, p. 185 ; see Pantarchism. 

UNIVERSE, The, the largest Domain of Existence, t. 24, p. 20; Subject to 
Classification, do. ; not easy to condense the consideration of, t. 42, p. 
29 ; an Edifice with Stories, a Tri-Unity, t. 53, p. 34 ; Minor, see Minor 
Universe. 

UNIVERSITY, The Pantarchal, a New Grand Institutional Centre of Learn- 
ing, demanded, Preface, p. viii, t. 218, p. 178 ; an Incipient Working, 
already founded, t. 244, p. 195. 

UNIVERSOLOGICAL METHOD, CONDENSED STATEMENT of, p. xv ; t. 219, p. 
79 ; t. 239, p. 191 ; t. 242, p. 193. 

UNIVERSOLOGY, " Basic Outline of," Preface, p. iii ; a Card respecting, p. 
v ; defined, p. 8, t. 3 ; how based, do., 1. 11, p. 6 ; accounts for irregu- 
larity in Nature, t. 16, p. 13 ; declines the jurisdiction of Specialists, t. 
18, p. 15 ; further defined, t. 28, p. 22 ; Objections to the possibility of, 
answered, t. 29-39, pp. 22-28 ; the fact of, t. 41, p. 29 ; t. 62, p. 39 ; what 
it does in Speech, t. 70, p. 44; Sublime office of, to interpret other 
Philosophies, t. 159, p. 128; (do., through Alwato, do., and t. 199, p. 
165) ; higher departments of, 1. 170, p. 142, and t. 198, p. 165 ; definitely 
characterized, t. 218, p. 178; a Science and a METHOD, t. 219, p. 179; 
farther defined and characterized, t. 229, 230, p. 185; basis of, mathe- 
matical, t. 233, p. 186 ; its First Principles of, t. 234, p. 187 ; BASIC OUT- 
LINE of, described, t. 236-251, p. 251. 

UNLIMITED, The, 1. 128, p. 95 ; see Hamilton, and Reality. 

USE, (Construction and Occupancy, Analogue of Art), t. ."/;, p. C4. 

USKI, t. 207, p. 172. 



224 INDEX. 

V. 

VALUES, of Sounds, Direct and Inverse, t. 157, p. 124 ; see Sounds, 

Alphabet, Elements. 
VEGETABLE KINGDOM, the, a Minor Universe, t. 62, p. 39 ; named, t. 140, 

p. 103 ; t. 185, p. 157 ; see Minor Universe. 
VERNACULAR, of the World, Ahvato, t. 74, p. 46 ; t. 150, p. 109 ; t. 235, 

p. 188. 

VESTIBULE, of Speech, the Alphabet, t. 87, p. 56. 
VISCERISM, t. 214, p. 175. 
" VISIBLE SPEECH," Bell, t. 79, p. 49. 
VOCABULARY, pp. xi-xiii. 

VOCALITY, Vowel-Element = Something, t. 124, p. 92; see Keality. 
VOWELS, represented by au, t. 92, p. 58 ; t. 126, p. 93 ; t. 127, p. 94 ; t. 

157, p. 124: as Verb-endings (i, a, o, etc.), t. 202, p. 167 ; t. 203, p. 168 ; 

t. 205, p. 170 ; t. 206, p. 171 ; t. 207, p. 172 ; the Unismus of Speech, t. 

214, p. 175 ; Swedenborg's account of Meanings of, t. 223-226, pp. 181- 

183 ; see Elements, Alphabet, Sounds. 
VOWEL SCALE, (8), t. 154, p. 121. 

w. 

WHINE, see Twang. 

WHITNEY, Prof. Wm. Dwight, his views adverse to Inherency of Mean- 
ing in Sounds, t. 120, p. 88, and Note. 

WHOLE, is the Triuismus, t. 82, p. 52 ; t. 210, p. 173 ; t. 214, p. 175. 

"WORD," see Logos ; used for "Scriptures," t. 225, p. 182. 

WORD-BUILDING, instanced, t. 21, p. 18 ; Primitive, from Two-letter Roots, 
difficult, t. 147, 148, p. 107 ; from Working Elements, easy, t. 149, 150, 
p. 108; ILLUSTRATIONS of, t. 151, pp. 110-119. 

WORDS, formed by the million, needing no dictionary, t. 150, p. 108 ; 
others requiring one, do. ; meaning of, how rendered definite, t. 151, 
Note, p. 110 ; Compounding of, t. 155, p. 122 ; Two-letter, not so much 
Words as Roots, t. 160, p. 129. 

WORLD CATHEDRAL, see Dome. 

WORKING ELEMENTS, defined, t. 146, p. 106. 

z. 

ZERO, see Silences. 

ZIIAUBIO, t. 184, p. 156. 

ZHAUBSKI, Concretology Spencer, t. 139, p. 102. 






HOME USE 

CIRCULATION DEPARTMENT 

MAIN LIBRARY 

This book is due on the last date stamped below. 

Renewals and recharges may be made 4 days pr.or 
to due date. 







- 



KO. CIS. 



OCT 1 7 2007 



. 

BJBJI 



I 

. 












LD'21 A-40m-8,'75 
(S7737L) 



General Library 

University of California 

Berkeley 



r 
^H 



I 

-; . 



s 

, : ': 

B 



I 

: . 



OOO A S 

<o4o 




005^3360^ 






/ \ N 



!>;>}}>; >)K>ty. 
W>$$$W 

->:W'>W'>; 

f v* / v* / O /* \. * y v* / \^ > * 

'>V'>W4 

O / v / v / v / v ' N ' 

" I* . / o t / *' 

'>:>){>: -.- - 

\vV^Vr 







.' 









:>)'